Commission Regulation (EC) No 1360/2002 of 13 June 2002 adapting for the seventh time to technical progress Council Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 on recording equipment in road transport (Text with EEA relevance)
1360/2002 • 32002R1360
Legal Acts - Regulations
- Inbound citations: 14
- •
- Cited paragraphs: 0
- •
- Outbound citations: 21
5.8.2002
EN
Official Journal of the European Union
L 207/1
COMMISSION REGULATION (EC) No 1360/2002
of 13 June 2002
adapting for the seventh time to technical progress Council Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 on recording equipment in road transport
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community,
Having regard to Council Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 of 20 December 1985 on recording equipment in road transport (1), as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 2135/98 (2), and in particular Articles 17 and 18 thereof,
Whereas:
(1)
The technical specifications of Annex I (B) to Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 should be adapted to technical progress paying particular attention to the overall security of the system and to the interoperability between the recording equipment and the driver cards.
(2)
The adaptation of the equipment also requires an adaptation of Annex II to Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85, which defines the marks and approval certificates.
(3)
The Committee set up by Article 18 of Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 did not deliver an opinion on the measures provided in the proposal and the Commission therefore submitted to the Council a proposal relating to these measures.
(4)
On the expiry of the period laid down in Article 18(5)(b) of Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85, the Council had not acted and it is accordingly for the Commission to adopt these measures,
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
The Annex to Regulation (EC) No 2135/98 is replaced by the Annex to this Regulation.
Article 2
Annex II to Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 is amended as follows:
1.
Chapter I, item 1, first subparagraph is amended as follows:
—
the conventional sign for Greece ‘GR’ is replaced by ‘23’,
—
the conventional sign for Ireland ‘IRL’ is replaced by ‘24’,
—
the conventional sign for ‘12’ is to be added for Austria,
—
the conventional sign for ‘17’ is to be added for Finland,
—
the conventional sign for ‘5’ is to be added for Sweden.
2.
Chapter I, item 1, second subparagraph is amended as follows:
—
the wording ‘or of a tachograph card’ is inserted after the words ‘record sheet’.
3.
Chapter I, item 2 is amended as follows:
—
the wording ‘and on each tachograph card’ is inserted after the words ‘record sheet’.
4.
In Chapter II, the following wording is added to the title ‘FOR PRODUCTS COMPLIANT WITH ANNEX I’.
5.
The following Chapter III is added:
‘III. APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FOR PRODUCTS COMPLIANT WITH ANNEX I B
A State, having granted approval, shall issue the applicant with an approval certificate, the model of which is given below. When informing other Member States of approvals issued or, if the occasion should arise, withdrawn, a Member State shall use copies of that certificate.
’
Article 3
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Communities.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 13 June 2002.
For the Commission
Loyola DE PALACIO
Vice-President
(1) OJ L 370, 31.12.1985, p. 8.
(2) OJ L 274, 9.10.1998, p. 1.
ANNEX
ANNEX I B
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION, TESTING, INSTALLATION AND INSPECTION
CONTENTS
I.
II.
1.
2.
3.
4.
III.
1.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
7.
8.
9.
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.
9.8.
9.9.
9.10.
9.11.
9.12.
10.
11.
12.
12.1.
12.1.1.
12.1.2.
12.2.
12.3.
12.4.
12.5.
12.6.
12.7.
12.8.
12.9.
12.10.
12.11.
12.12.
12.13.
12.14.
12.15.
13.
14.
15.
15.1
15.2.
15.3.
15.4.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
IV.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5.1.
5.1.1.
5.1.2.
5.1.3.
5.1.4.
5.2.
5.2.1.
5.2.2.
5.2.3.
5.2.4.
5.2.5.
5.2.6.
5.2.7.
5.2.8.
5.2.9.
5.2.10.
5.2.11.
5.3.
5.3.1.
5.3.2.
5.3.3.
5.3.4.
5.3.5.
5.3.6.
5.3.7.
5.3.8.
5.3.9.
5.3.10.
5.4.
5.4.1.
5.4.2.
5.4.3.
5.5.
5.5.1.
5.5.2.
5.5.3.
V.
1.
2.
3.
VI.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
VII.
VIII.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Appendix 1.
Appendix 2.
Appendix 3.
Appendix 4.
Appendix 5.
Appendix 6.
Appendix 7.
Appendix 8.
Appendix 9.
Appendix 10.
Appendix 11.
I. DEFINITIONS
In this Annex:
(a) “activation“ means : phase where the recording equipment becomes fully operational and implements all functions, including security functions;
Activating a recording equipment requires the use of a workshop card and the entry of its PIN code;
(b) “authentication“ means : a function intended to establish and verify a claimed identity;
(c) “authenticity“ means : the property that an information is coming from a party whose identity can be verified;
(d) “built-in-test (BIT)“ means : tests run at request, triggered by the operator or by an external equipment;
(e) “calendar day“ means : a day ranging from 00.00 hours to 24.00 hours. All calendar days relate to UTC time (universal time coordinated);
(f) “calibration“ means : updating or confirming vehicle parameters to be held in the data memory. Vehicle parameters include vehicle identification (VIN, VRN and registering Member State) and vehicle characteristics (w, k, l, tyre size, speed limiting device setting (if applicable), current UTC time, current odometer value);
calibrating a recording equipment requires the use of a workshop card;
(g) “card number“ means : a 16 alpha-numerical characters number that uniquely identifies a tachograph card within a Member State. The card number includes a consecutive index (if applicable), a replacement index and a renewal index;
a card is therefore uniquely identified by the code of the issuing Member State and the card number;
(h) “card consecutive index“ means : the 14th alpha-numerical character of a card number that is used to differentiate the different cards issued to a company or a body entitled to be issued several tachograph cards. The company or the body is uniquely identified by the 13 first characters of the card number;
(i) “card renewal index“ means : the 16th alpha-numerical character of a card number which is incremented each time a tachograph card is renewed;
(j) “card replacement index“ means : the 15th alpha-numerical character of a card number which is incremented each time a tachograph card is replaced;
(k) “characteristic coefficient of the vehicle“ means : the numerical characteristic giving the value of the output signal emitted by the part of the vehicle linking it with the recording equipment (gearbox output shaft or axle) while the vehicle travels a distance of one kilometre under standard test conditions (see Chapter VI(5)). The characteristic coefficient is expressed in impulses per kilometre (w = … imp/km);
(l) “company card“ means : a tachograph card issued by the authorities of a Member State to the owner or holder of vehicles fitted with recording equipment;
the company card identifies the company and allows for displaying, downloading and printing of the data stored in the recording equipment which has been locked by this company;
(m) “constant of the recording equipment“ means : the numerical characteristic giving the value of the input signal required to show and record a distance travelled of one kilometre; this constant shall be expressed in impulses per kilometre (k = … imp/km);
(n) “continuous driving time“ is computed within the recording equipment as (1) : the continuous driving time is computed as the current accumulated driving times of a particular driver, since the end of his last AVAILABILITY or BREAK/REST or UNKNOWN (2)
(o) “control card“ means : a tachograph card issued by the authorities of a Member State to a national competent control authority;
the control card identifies the control body and possibly the control officer and allows for getting access to the data stored in the data memory or in the driver cards for reading, printing and/or downloading;
(p) “cumulative break time“ is computed within the recording equipment as (1) : the cumulative break from driving time is computed as the current accumulated AVAILABILITY or BREAK/REST or UNKNOWN (2) times of 15 minutes or more of a particular driver, since the end of his last AVAILABILITY or BREAK/REST or UNKNOWN (2) period of 45 minutes or more (this period may have been split in several periods of 15 minutes or more).
The computations involved take into account, as needed, past activities stored on the driver card. Unknown periods of negative duration (start of unknown period > end of unknown period) due to time overlaps between two different recording equipments, are not taken into account for the computation.
When the driver has not inserted his card, the computations involved are based on the data memory recordings related to the current period where no card was inserted and related to the relevant slot;
(q) “data memory“ means : an electronic data storage device built into the recording equipment;
(r) “digital signature“ means : data appended to, or a cryptographic transformation of, a block of data that allows the recipient of the block of data to prove the authenticity and integrity of the block of data;
(s) “downloading“ means : copying together with digital signature of a part or of a complete set of data stored in the data memory of the vehicle or in the memory of a tachograph card;
downloading may not alter or delete any stored data;
(t) “driver card“ means : a tachograph card issued by the authorities of a Member State to a particular driver;
the driver card identifies the driver and allows for storage of driver activity data;
(u) “effective circumference of the wheel tyres“ means : the average of the distances travelled by each of the wheels moving the vehicle (driving wheels) in the course of one complete rotation. The measurement of these distances shall be made under standard test conditions (Chapter VI(5)) and is expressed in the form “l = … mm“. Vehicle manufacturers may replace the measurement of these distances by a theoretical calculation which takes into account the distribution of the weight on the axles, vehicle unladen in normal running order (3). The methods for such theoretical calculation will be approved by a competent Member State authority;
(v) “event“ means : abnormal operation detected by the recording equipment which may come from a fraud attempt;
(w) “fault“ means : abnormal operation detected by the recording equipment which may come from an equipment malfunction or failure;
(x) “installation“ means : mounting of the recording equipment in a vehicle;
(y) “motion sensor“ means : part of the recording equipment, providing a signal representative of vehicle speed and/or distance travelled;
(z) “non valid card“ means : a card detected as faulty, or which initial authentication failed, or which start of validity date is not yet reached, or which expiry date has passed;
(aa) “out of scope“ means : when the use of the recording equipment is not required, according to the provisions of Council Regulation (EEC) No 3820/85;
(bb) “over speeding“ means : exceeding the authorised speed of the vehicle, defined as any period of more than 60 seconds during which the vehicle's measured speed exceeds the limit for setting the speed limitation device laid down in Council Directive 92/6/EEC of 10 February 1992 on the installation and use of speed limitation devices for certain categories of motor vehicles in the Community (4);
(cc) “periodic inspection“ means : set of operations performed to control that the recording equipment works properly and that its settings correspond to the vehicle parameters;
(dd) “printer“ means : component of the recording equipment which provides printouts of stored data;
(ee) “recording equipment“ means : the total equipment intended for installation in road vehicles to show, record and store automatically or semi-automatically details of the movement of such vehicles and of certain work periods of their drivers;
(ff) “renewal“ means : issue of a new tachograph card when an existing card reaches its expiry date, or is malfunctioning and has been returned to the issuing authority. Renewal always implies the certainty that two valid cards do not co-exist;
(gg) “repair“ means : any repair of a motion sensor or of a vehicle unit that requires disconnection of its power supply, or disconnection from other recording equipment components, or opening of it;
(hh) “replacement“ means : issue of a tachograph card in replacement of an existing card, which has been declared lost, stolen or malfunctioning and has not been returned to the issuing authority. Replacement always implies a risk that two valid cards may co-exist;
(ii) “security certification“ means : process to certify, by an ITSEC (5) certification body, that the recording equipment (or component) or the tachograph card under investigation fulfils the security requirements defined in Appendix 10 Generic security targets;
(jj) “self test“ means : tests run cyclically and automatically by the recording equipment to detect faults;
(kk) “tachograph card“ means : smart card intended for use with the recording equipment. Tachograph cards allow for identification by the recording equipment of the identity (or identity group) of the cardholder and allow for data transfer and storage. A tachograph card may be of the following types:
—
driver card,
—
control card,
—
workshop card,
—
company card;
(ll) “type approval“ means : process to certify, by a Member State, that the recording equipment (or component) or the tachograph card under investigation fulfils the requirements of this regulation;
(mm) “tyre size“ means : the designation of the dimensions of the tyres (external driving wheels) in accordance with Directive 92/23/EEC of 31 march 1992 (6);
(nn) “vehicle identification“ means : numbers identifying the vehicle: vehicle registration number (VRN) with indication of the registering Member State and vehicle identification number (VIN) (7);
(oo) “vehicle unit (VU)“ means : the recording equipment excluding the motion sensor and the cables connecting the motion sensor. The vehicle unit may either be a single unit or be several units distributed in the vehicle, as long as it complies with the security requirements of this regulation;
(pp) for computing sake in the recording equipment “week“ means : the period between 00.00 hours UTC on Monday and 24.00 UTC on Sunday;
(qq) “workshop card“ means : a tachograph card issued by the authorities of a Member State to a recording equipment manufacturer, a fitter, a vehicle manufacturer or workshop, approved by that Member State.
The workshop card identifies the cardholder and allows for testing, calibration and/or downloading of the recording equipment;
II. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS AND FUNCTIONS OF THE RECORDING EQUIPMENT
000Any vehicle fitted with the recording equipment complying with the provisions of this Annex, must include a speed display and an odometer. These functions may be included within the recording equipment.
1. General characteristics
The purpose of the recording equipment is to record, store, display, print, and output data related to driver activities.
001The recording equipment includes cables, a motion sensor, and a vehicle unit.
002The vehicle unit includes a processing unit, a data memory, a real time clock, two smart card interface devices (driver and co-driver), a printer, a display, a visual warning, a calibration/downloading connector, and facilities for entry of user's inputs.
The recording equipment may be connected to other devices through additional connectors.
003Any inclusion in or connection to the recording equipment of any function, device, or devices, approved or otherwise, shall not interfere with, or be capable of interfering with, the proper and secure operation of the recording equipment and the provisions of the Regulation.
Recording equipment users identify themselves to the equipment via tachograph cards.
004The recording equipment provides selective access rights to data and functions according to user's type and/or identity.
The recording equipment records and stores data in its data memory and in tachograph cards.
This is done in accordance with Directive 95/46/EC of 24 October 1995 on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data (8).
2. Functions
005The recording equipment shall ensure the following functions:
—
monitoring cards insertions and withdrawals,
—
speed and distance measurement,
—
time measurement,
—
monitoring driver activities,
—
monitoring driving status,
—
drivers manual entries:
—
entry of places where daily work periods begin and/or end,
—
manual entry of driver activities,
—
entry of specific conditions,
—
company locks management,
—
monitoring control activities,
—
detection of events and/or faults,
—
built-in and self tests,
—
reading from data memory,
—
recording and storing in data memory,
—
reading from tachograph cards,
—
recording and storing in tachograph cards,
—
displaying,
—
printing,
—
warning,
—
data downloading to external media,
—
output data to additional external devices,
—
calibration,
—
time adjustment.
3. Modes of operation
006The recording equipment shall possess four modes of operation:
—
operational mode,
—
control mode,
—
calibration mode,
—
company mode.
007The recording equipment shall switch to the following mode of operation according to the valid tachograph cards inserted into the card interface devices:
Mode of operation
Driver slot
No card
Driver card
Control card
Workshop card
Company card
Co-driver slot
No card
Operational
Operational
Control
Calibration
Company
Driver card
Operational
Operational
Control
Calibration
Company
Control card
Control
Control
Control (9)
Operational
Operational
Workshop card
Calibration
Calibration
Operational
Calibration (9)
Operational
Company card
Company
Company
Operational
Operational
Company (9)
009The recording equipment shall ignore non-valid cards inserted, except displaying, printing or downloading data held on an expired card which shall be possible.
010All functions listed in II.2. shall work in any mode of operation with the following exceptions:
—
the calibration function is accessible in the calibration mode only,
—
the time adjustment function is limited when not in the calibration mode,
—
the driver manual entries functions are accessible in operational or calibration modes only,
—
the company locks management function is accessible in the company mode only,
—
the monitoring of control activities function is operational in the control mode only,
—
the downloading function is not accessible in the operational mode (except as provided for in Requirement 150).
011The recording equipment can output any data to display, printer or external interfaces with the following exceptions:
—
in the operational mode, any personal identification (surname and first name(s)) not corresponding to a tachograph card inserted shall be blanked and any card number not corresponding to a tachograph card inserted shall be partially blanked (every odd character — from left to right — shall be blanked),
—
in the company mode, driver related data (requirements 081, 084 and 087) can be output only for periods not locked by another company (as identified by the first 13 digits of the company card number),
—
when no card is inserted in the recording equipment, driver related data can be output only for the current and eight previous calendar days.
4. Security
The system security aims at protecting the data memory in such a way as to prevent unauthorised access to and manipulation of the data and detecting any such attempts, protecting the integrity and authenticity of data exchanged between the motion sensor and the vehicle unit, protecting the integrity and authenticity of data exchanged between the recording equipment and the tachograph cards, and verifying the integrity and authenticity of data downloaded.
012In order to achieve the system security, the recording equipment shall meet the security requirements specified in the motion sensor and vehicle unit generic security targets (Appendix 10).
III. CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORDING EQUIPMENT
1. Monitoring cards insertion and withdrawal
013The recording equipment shall monitor the card interface devices to detect card insertions and withdrawals.
014Upon card insertion the recording equipment shall detect whether the card inserted is a valid tachograph card and in such a case identify the card type.
015The recording equipment shall be so designed that the tachograph cards are locked in position on their proper insertion into the card interface devices.
016The release of tachograph cards may function only when the vehicle is stopped and after the relevant data have been stored on the cards. The release of the card shall require positive action by the user.
2. Speed and distance measurement
017This function shall continuously measure and be able to provide the odometer value corresponding to the total distance travelled by the vehicle.
018This function shall continuously measure and be able to provide the speed of the vehicle.
019The speed measurement function shall also provide the information whether the vehicle is moving or stopped. The vehicle shall be considered as moving as soon as the function detects more than 1 imp/sec for at least five seconds from the motion sensor, otherwise the vehicle shall be considered as stopped.
Devices displaying speed (speedometer) and total distance travelled (odometer) installed in any vehicle fitted with a recording equipment complying with the provisions of this Regulation, shall comply with the requirements relating to maximum tolerances laid down in this Annex (Chapters III(2)(1) and III(2)(2)).
2.1. Measurement of distance travelled
020The distance travelled may be measured either:
—
so as to cumulate both forward and reverse movements, or
—
so as to include only forward movement.
021The recording equipment shall measure distance from 0 to 9 999 999,9 km.
022Distance measured shall be within the following tolerances (distances of at least 1 000 m):
—
± 1 % before installation,
—
± 2 % on installation and periodic inspection,
—
± 4 % in use.
023Distance measured shall have a resolution better than or equal to 0,1 km.
2.2. Measurement of speed
024The recording equipment shall measure speed from 0 to 220 km/h.
025To ensure a maximum tolerance on speed displayed of ± 6 km/h in use, and taking into account:
—
a ± 2 km/h tolerance for input variations (tyre variations, …),
—
a ± 1 km/h tolerance in measurements made during installation or periodic inspections,
the recording equipment shall, for speeds between 20 and 180 km/h, and for characteristic coefficients of the vehicle between 4 000 and 25 000 imp/km, measure the speed with a tolerance of ± 1 km/h (at constant speed).
Note: The resolution of data storage brings an additional tolerance of ± 0,5 km/h to speed stored by the recording equipment.
025aThe speed shall be measured correctly within the normal tolerances within 2 seconds of the end of a speed change when the speed has changed at a rate up to 2 m/s2.
026Speed measurement shall have a resolution better than or equal to 1 km/h.
3. Time measurement
027The time measurement function shall measure permanently and digitally provide UTC date and time.
028UTC date and time shall be used for dating throughout the recording equipment (recordings, printouts, data exchange, display, …).
029In order to visualise the local time, it shall be possible to change the offset of the time displayed, in half hour steps.
030Time drift shall be within ± 2 seconds per day in type approval conditions.
031Time measured shall have a resolution better than or equal to 1 second.
032Time measurement shall not be affected by an external power supply cut-off of less than 12 months in type approval conditions.
4. Monitoring driver activities
033This function shall permanently and separately monitor the activities of one driver and one co-driver.
034Driver activity shall be DRIVING, WORK, AVAILABILITY, or BREAK/REST.
035It shall be possible for the driver and/or the co-driver to manually select WORK, AVAILABILITY, or BREAK/REST.
036When the vehicle is moving, DRIVING shall be selected automatically for the driver and AVAILABILITY shall be selected automatically for the co-driver.
037When the vehicle stops, WORK shall be selected automatically for the driver.
038The first change of activity arising within 120 seconds of the automatic change to WORK due to the vehicle stop shall be assumed to have happened at the time of vehicle stop (therefore possibly cancelling the change to WORK).
039This function shall output activity changes to the recording functions at a resolution of one minute.
040Given a calendar minute, if any DRIVING activity has occurred within the minute, the whole minute shall be regarded as DRIVING.
041Given a calendar minute, if any DRIVING activity has occurred within both the immediately preceding and the immediately succeeding minute, the whole minute shall be regarded as DRIVING.
042Given a calendar minute that is not regarded as DRIVING according to previous requirements, the whole minute shall be regarded to be of the same type of activity as the longest continuous activity within the minute (or the latest of the equally longest).
043This function shall also permanently monitor the continuous driving time and the cumulative break time of the driver.
5. Monitoring driving status
044This function shall permanently and automatically monitor the driving status.
045The driving status CREW shall be selected when two valid driver cards are inserted in the equipment, the driving status SINGLE shall be selected in any other case.
6. Drivers manual entries
6.1. Entry of places where daily work periods begin and/or end
046This function shall allow for the entry of places where the daily work periods begin and/or end for a driver and/or a co-driver.
047Places are defined as the country and, in addition where applicable, the region.
048At the time of a driver (or workshop) card withdrawal, the recording equipment shall prompt the (co-)driver to enter a “place where the daily work period ends“.
049The recording equipment shall allow this request to be disregarded.
050It shall be possible to input places where daily work periods begin and/or end without card or at times other than card insertion or withdrawal.
6.2. Manual entry of driver activities
050aUpon driver (or workshop) card insertion, and only at this time, the recording equipment shall:
—
remind the cardholder the date and time of his last card withdrawal, and
—
ask the cardholder to identify if the current insertion of the card represents a continuation of the current daily work period.
The recording equipment shall allow the cardholder to disregard the question without answering, or to answer positively, or to answer negatively:
—
in the case where the cardholder disregards the question, the recording equipment shall prompt the cardholder for a “place where the daily work period begins“. The recording equipment shall allow this request to be disregarded. If a location is entered, then it shall be recorded, in the data memory and in the tachograph card, and related to the card insertion time,
—
in the case of a negative or positive answer, the recording equipment shall invite the cardholder to enter activities manually, with their dates and times of beginning and end, among WORK, AVAILABILITY, or BREAK/REST only, strictly included within the period last card withdrawal — current insertion only, and without allowing such activities to overlap mutually. This shall be done in accordance with the following procedures:
—
in the case where the cardholder answers positively to the question, the recording equipment shall invite the cardholder to enter activities manually, in chronological order, for the period last card withdrawal — current insertion. The process shall end when the end time of a manually entered activity equals the card insertion time.
—
in the case where the cardholder answers negatively to the question, the recording equipment shall:
—
invite the card holder to enter manually activities in chronological order from the card withdrawal time up to the time of end of the related daily work period (or of the activities related to that vehicle in the case where the daily work period continues on a record sheet). The recording equipment shall therefore, before allowing the cardholder to enter manually each activity, invite the cardholder to identify if the time of end of the last recorded activity represents the end of a previous work period (see note below),
Notes: in the case where the cardholder fails to declare when the previous work period ended, and manually enters an activity of which end time equals the card insertion time, the recording equipment shall:
—
assume that the daily work period ended at the start of the first REST (or remaining UNKNOWN) period after card withdrawal or at the time of card withdrawal if no rest period has been entered (and if no period remains UNKNOWN),
—
assume that the start time (see below) equals the card insertion time,
—
proceed through the steps below;
—
then, if the time of end of the related work period is different from the time of card withdrawal, or if no place of end of daily work period had been entered at that time, prompt the cardholder to “confirm or enter the place where the daily work period ended“ (the recording equipment shall allow this request to be disregarded). If a location is entered, it shall be recorded in the tachograph card only and only if different from the one entered at card withdrawal (if one was entered), and related to the time of end of the work period,
—
then invite the cardholder to “enter a start time“ of the current daily work period (or of the activities related to the current vehicle in the case where the card holder previously used a record sheet during this period), and prompt the cardholder for a “place where the daily work period begins“ (the recording equipment shall allow this request to be disregarded). If a location is entered, it shall be recorded in the tachograph card and related to this start time. If this start time is equal to the card insertion time, the location shall also be recorded in the data memory,
—
then, if this start time is different from the card insertion time, invite the cardholder to enter manually activities in chronological order from this start time up to the time of card insertion. The process shall end when the end time of a manually entered activity equals the card insertion time,
—
the recording equipment shall then allow the card holder to modify any activity manually entered, until validation by selection of a specific command, and thereafter forbid any such modification,
—
such answers to the initial question followed by no activity entries, shall be interpreted by the recording equipment as if the cardholder had disregarded the question.
During this whole process, the recording equipment shall wait for entries no longer than the following time-outs:
—
if no interaction with the equipment's human machine interface is happening during one minute (with a visual, and possibly audible, warning after 30 seconds) or,
—
if the card is withdrawn or another driver (or workshop) card is inserted or,
—
as soon as the vehicle is moving,
in this case the recording equipment shall validate any entries already made.
6.3. Entry of specific conditions
050bThe recording equipment shall allow the driver to enter, in real time, the following two specific conditions:
—
“OUT OF SCOPE“ (begin, end)
—
“FERRY/TRAIN CROSSING“
A “FERRY/TRAIN CROSSING“ may not occur if an “OUT OF SCOPE“ condition is opened.
An opened “OUT OF SCOPE“ condition must be automatically closed, by the recording equipment, if a driver card is inserted or withdrawn.
7. Company locks management
051This function shall allow the management of the locks placed by a company to restrict data access in company mode to itself.
052Company locks consist in a start date/time (lock-in) and an end date/time (lock-out) associated with the identification of the company as denoted by the company card number (at lock-in).
053Locks may be turned “in“ or “out“ in real time only.
054Locking-out shall only be possible for the company whose lock is “in“ (as identified by the first 13 digits of the company card number), or,
055locking-out shall be automatic if another company locks in.
055aIn the case where a company locks in and where the previous lock was for the same company, then it will be assumed that the previous lock has not been turned “out“ and is still “in“.
8. Monitoring control activities
056This function shall monitor DISPLAYING, PRINTING, VU and card DOWNLOADING activities carried while in control mode.
057This function shall also monitor OVER SPEEDING CONTROL activities while in control mode. An over speeding control is deemed to have happened when, in control mode, the “over speeding“ printout has been sent to the printer or to the display, or when “events and faults“ data have been downloaded from the VU data memory.
9. Detection of events and/or faults
058This function shall detect the following events and/or faults:
9.1. Insertion of a non-valid card““ event
059This event shall be triggered at the insertion of any non-valid card and/or when an inserted valid card expires.
060This event shall be triggered when any of the valid cards combination noted X in the following table arise:
Card conflict
Driver slot
No card
Driver card
Control card
Workshop card
Company card
Co-driver slot
No card
Driver card
X
Control card
X
X
X
Workshop card
X
X
X
X
Company card
X
X
X
9.3. “Time overlap“ event
061This event shall be triggered when the date/time of last withdrawal of a driver card, as read from the card, is later than the current date/time of the recording equipment in which the card is inserted.
9.4. “Driving without an appropriate card“ event
062This event shall be triggered for any tachograph cards combination noted X in the following table, when driver activity changes to DRIVING, or when there is a change of the mode of operation while driver activity is DRIVING:
Driving without an appropriate card
Driver slot
No (or non-valid) card
Driver card
Control card
Workshop card
Company card
Co-driver slot
No (or non-valid) card
X
X
X
Driver card
X
X
X
X
Control card
X
X
X
X
X
Workshop card
X
X
X
X
Company card
X
X
X
X
X
9.5. “Card insertion while driving“ event
063This event shall be triggered when a tachograph card is inserted in any slot, while driver activity is DRIVING.
9.6. “Last card session not correctly closed“ event
064This event shall be triggered when at card insertion the recording equipment detects that, despite the provisions laid down in paragraph III(1), the previous card session has not been correctly closed (the card has been withdrawn before all relevant data have been stored on the card). This event shall be triggered by driver and workshop cards only.
9.7. “Over speeding“ event
065This event shall be triggered for each over speeding.
9.8. “Power supply interruption“ event
066This event shall be triggered, while not in calibration mode, in case of any interruption exceeding 200 milliseconds of the power supply of the motion sensor and/or of the vehicle unit. The interruption threshold shall be defined by the manufacturer. The drop in power supply due to the starting of the engine of the vehicle shall not trigger this event.
9.9. “Motion data error“ event
067This event shall be triggered in case of interruption of the normal data flow between the motion sensor and the vehicle unit and/or in case of data integrity or data authentication error during data exchange between the motion sensor and the vehicle unit.
9.10. “Security breach attempt“ event
068This event shall be triggered for any other event affecting the security of the motion sensor and/or of the vehicle unit as specified within the generic security targets of these components, while not in calibration mode.
9.11. “Card“ fault
069This fault shall be triggered when a tachograph card failure occurs during operation.
9.12. “Recording equipment“ fault
070This fault shall be triggered for any of these failures, while not in calibration mode:
—
VU internal fault,
—
printer fault,
—
display fault,
—
downloading fault,
—
sensor fault.
10. Built-in and self tests
071The recording equipment shall self-detect faults through self tests and built-in-tests, according to the following table:
Sub-assembly to test
Self test
Built-in-test
Software
Integrity
Data memory
Access
Access, data integrity
Card interface devices
Access
Access
Keyboard
Manual check
Printer
(up to manufacturer)
Printout
Display
Visual check
Downloading (performed only during downloading)
Proper operation
Sensor
Proper operation
Proper operation
11. Reading from data memory
072The recording equipment shall be able to read any data stored in its data memory.
12. Recording and storing in the data memory
For the purpose of this paragraph,
—
“365 days“ is defined as 365 calendar days of average drivers activity in a vehicle. The average activity per day in a vehicle is defined as at least six drivers or co-drivers, six card insertion withdrawal cycles, and 256 activity changes. “365 days“ therefore include at least 2 190 (co-)drivers, 2 190 card insertion withdrawal cycles, and 93 440 activity changes,
—
times are recorded with a resolution of one minute, unless otherwise specified,
—
odometer values are recorded with a resolution of one kilometre,
—
speeds are recorded with a resolution of 1 km/h.
073Data stored into the data memory shall not be affected by an external power supply cut-off of less than twelve months in type approval conditions.
074The recording equipment shall be able to record and store implicitly or explicitly in its data memory the following:
12.1. Equipment identification data
12.1.1. Vehicle unit identification data
075The recording equipment shall be able to store in its data memory the following vehicle unit identification data:
—
name of the manufacturer,
—
address of the manufacturer,
—
part number,
—
serial number,
—
software version number,
—
software version installation date,
—
year of equipment manufacture,
—
approval number.
076Vehicle unit identification data are recorded and stored once and for all by the vehicle unit manufacturer, except the software-related data and the approval number which may be changed in case of software upgrade.
12.1.2. Motion sensor identification data
077The motion sensor shall be able to store in its memory the following identification data:
—
name of the manufacturer,
—
part number,
—
serial number,
—
approval number,
—
embedded security component identifier (e.g. internal chip/processor part number),
—
operating system identifier (e.g. software version number).
078Motion sensor identification data are recorded and stored once and for all in the motion sensor, by the motion sensor manufacturer.
079The vehicle unit shall be able to record and store in its data memory the following currently paired motion sensor identification data:
—
serial number,
—
approval number,
—
first pairing date.
12.2. Security elements
080The recording equipment shall be able to store the following security elements:
—
European public key,
—
Member State certificate,
—
equipment certificate,
—
equipment private key.
Recording equipment security elements are inserted in the equipment by the vehicle unit manufacturer.
12.3. Driver card insertion and withdrawal data
081For each insertion and withdrawal cycle of a driver or workshop card in the equipment, the recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory:
—
the card holder's surname and first name(s) as stored in the card,
—
the card's number, issuing Member State and expiry date as stored in the card,
—
the insertion date and time,
—
the vehicle odometer value at card insertion,
—
the slot in which the card is inserted,
—
the withdrawal date and time,
—
the vehicle odometer value at card withdrawal,
—
the following information about the previous vehicle used by the driver, as stored in the card:
—
VRN and registering Member State,
—
card withdrawal date and time,
—
a flag indicating whether, at card insertion, the card holder has manually entered activities or not.
082The data memory shall be able to hold these data for at least 365 days.
083When storage capacity is exhausted, new data shall replace oldest data.
12.4. Driver activity data
084The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory whenever there is a change of activity for the driver and/or the co-driver, and/or whenever there is a change of driving status, and/or whenever there is an insertion or withdrawal of a driver or workshop card:
—
the driving status (CREW, SINGLE),
—
the slot (DRIVER, CO-DRIVER),
—
the card status in the relevant slot (INSERTED, NOT INSERTED) (see Note),
—
the activity (DRIVING, AVAILABILITY, WORK, BREAK/REST),
—
the date and time of the change.
Note: INSERTED means that a valid driver or workshop card is inserted in the slot. NOT INSERTED means the opposite, i.e. no valid driver or workshop card is inserted in the slot (e.g. a company card is inserted or no card is inserted).
Note: Activity data manually entered by a driver are not recorded in the data memory.
085The data memory shall be able to hold driver activity data for at least 365 days.
086When storage capacity is exhausted, new data shall replace oldest data.
12.5. Places where daily work periods start and/or end
087The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory whenever a (co-)driver enters the place where a daily work period begins and/or ends:
—
if applicable, the (co-)driver card number and card issuing Member State,
—
the date and time of the entry (or the date/time related to the entry when the entry is made during the manual entry procedure),
—
the type of entry (begin or end, condition of entry),
—
the country and region entered,
—
the vehicle odometer value.
088The data memory shall be able to hold daily work periods start and/or end data for at least 365 days (with the assumption that one driver enters two records per day).
089When storage capacity is exhausted, new data shall replace oldest data.
12.6. Odometer data
090The recording equipment shall record in its data memory the vehicle odometer value and the corresponding date at midnight every calendar day.
091The data memory shall be able to store midnight odometer values for at least 365 calendar days.
092When storage capacity is exhausted, new data shall replace oldest data.
12.7. Detailed speed data
093The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory the instantaneous speed of the vehicle and the corresponding date and time at every second of at least the last 24 hours that the vehicle has been moving.
12.8. Events data
For the purpose of this subparagraph, time shall be recorded with a resolution of one second.
094The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory the following data for each event detected according to the following storage rules:
Event
Storage rules
Data to be recorded per event
Card conflict
—
the 10 most recent events.
—
date and time of beginning of event,
—
date and time of end of event,
—
cards' type, number and issuing Member State of the two cards creating the conflict.
Driving without an appropriate card
—
the longest event for each of the 10 last days of occurrence,
—
the five longest events over the last 365 days.
—
date and time of beginning of event,
—
date and time of end of event,
—
cards' type, number and issuing Member State of any card inserted at beginning and/or end of the event,
—
number of similar events that day.
Card insertion while driving
—
the last event for each of the 10 last days of occurrence.
—
date and time of the event,
—
card's type, number and issuing Member State,
—
number of similar events that day.
Last card session not correctly closed
—
the 10 most recent events.
—
date and time of card insertion,
—
card's type, number and issuing Member State,
—
last session data as read from the card:
—
date and time of card insertion,
—
VRN and Member State of registration.
Over speeding (10)
—
the most serious event for each of the 10 last days of occurrence (i.e. the one with the highest average speed),
—
the five most serious events over the last 365 days.
—
the first event having occurred after the last calibration.
—
date and time of beginning of event,
—
date and time of end of event,
—
maximum speed measured during the event,
—
arithmetic average speed measured during the event,
—
card's type, number and issuing Member State of the driver (if applicable),
—
number of similar events that day.
Power supply interruption (11)
—
the longest event for each of the 10 last days of occurrence,
—
the five longest events over the last 365 days.
—
date and time of beginning of event,
—
date and time of end of event,
—
cards' type, number and issuing Member State of any card inserted at beginning and/or end of the event,
—
number of similar events that day.
Motion data error
—
the longest event for each of the 10 last days of occurrence,
—
the five longest events over the last 365 days.
—
date and time of beginning of event,
—
date and time of end of event,
—
cards' type, number and issuing Member State of any card inserted at beginning and/or end of the event,
—
number of similar events that day.
Security breach attempt
—
the 10 most recent events per type of event.
—
date and time of beginning of event,
—
date and time of end of event (if relevant),
—
cards' type, number and issuing Member State of any card inserted at beginning and/or end of the event,
—
type of event.
12.9. Faults data
For the purpose of this subparagraph, time shall be recorded with a resolution of one second.
096The recording equipment shall attempt to record and store in its data memory the following data for each fault detected according to the following storage rules:
Fault
Storage rules
Data to be recorded per fault
Card fault
—
the 10 most recent driver card faults.
—
date and time of beginning of fault,
—
date and time of end of fault,
—
card's type number and issuing Member State.
Recording equipment faults
—
the 10 most recent faults for each type of fault,
—
the first fault after the last calibration.
—
date and time of beginning of fault,
—
date and time of end of fault,
—
type of fault,
—
cards' type, number and issuing Member State of any card inserted at beginning and/or end of the fault.
12.10. Calibration data
097The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory data relevant to:
—
known calibration parameters at the moment of activation,
—
its very first calibration following its activation,
—
its first calibration in the current vehicle (as identified by its VIN),
—
the five most recent calibrations (If several calibrations happen within one calendar day, only the last one of the day shall be stored).
098The following data shall be recorded for each of these calibrations:
—
purpose of calibration (activation, first installation, installation, periodic inspection),
—
workshop name and address,
—
workshop card number, card issuing Member State and card expiry date,
—
vehicle identification,
—
parameters updated or confirmed: w, k, l, tyre size, speed limiting device setting, odometer (old and new values), date and time (old and new values).
099The motion sensor shall record and store in its memory the following motion sensor installation data:
—
first pairing with a VU (date, time, VU approval number, VU serial number),
—
last pairing with a VU (date, time, VU approval number, VU serial number).
12.11. Time adjustment data
100The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory data relevant to:
—
the most recent time adjustment,
—
the five largest time adjustments, since last calibration,
performed in calibration mode outside the frame of a regular calibration (definition (f)).
101The following data shall be recorded for each of these time adjustments:
—
date and time, old value,
—
date and time, new value,
—
workshop name and address,
—
workshop card number, card issuing Member State and card expiry date.
12.12. Control activity data
102The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory the following data relevant to the 20 most recent control activities:
—
date and time of the control,
—
control card number and card issuing Member State,
—
type of the control (displaying and/or printing and/or VU downloading and/or card downloading).
103In case of downloading, the dates of the oldest and of the most recent days downloaded shall also be recorded.
12.13. Company locks data
104The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory the following data relevant to the 20 most recent company locks:
—
lock-in date and time,
—
lock-out date and time,
—
company card number and card issuing Member State,
—
company name and address.
12.14. Download activity data
105The recording equipment shall record and store in its data memory the following data relevant to the last data memory downloading to external media while in company or in calibration mode:
—
date and time of downloading,
—
company or workshop card number and card issuing Member State,
—
company or workshop name.
12.15. Specific conditions data
105aThe recording equipment shall record in its data memory the following data relevant to specific conditions:
—
date and time of the entry,
—
type of specific condition.
105bThe data memory shall be able to hold specific conditions data for at least 365 days (with the assumption that on average, one condition is opened and closed per day). When storage capacity is exhausted, new data shall replace oldest data.
13. Reading from tachograph cards
106The recording equipment shall be able to read from tachograph cards, where applicable, the necessary data:
—
to identify the card type, the card holder, the previously used vehicle, the date and time of the last card withdrawal and the activity selected at that time,
—
to check that last card session was correctly closed,
—
to compute the driver's continuous driving time, cumulative break time and cumulated driving times for the previous and the current week,
—
to print requested printouts related to data recorded on a driver card,
—
to download a driver card to external media.
107In case of a reading error, the recording equipment shall try again, three times maximum, the same read command, and then if still unsuccessful, declare the card faulty and non-valid.
14. Recording and storing on tachograph cards
108The recording equipment shall set the “card session data“ in the driver or workshop card right after the card insertion.
109The recording equipment shall update data stored on valid driver, workshop and/or control cards with all necessary data relevant to the period while the card is inserted and relevant to the card holder. Data stored on these cards are specified in Chapter IV.
109aThe recording equipment shall update driver activity and location data (as specified in Chapter IV, paragraphs 5.2.5 and 5.2.6), stored on valid driver and/or workshop cards, with activity and location data manually entered by the cardholder.
110Tachograph cards data update shall be such that, when needed and taking into account card actual storage capacity, most recent data replace oldest data.
111In the case of a writing error, the recording equipment shall try again, three times maximum, the same write command, and then if still unsuccessful, declare the card faulty and non valid.
112Before releasing a driver card, and after all relevant data have been stored on the card, the recording equipment shall reset the card session data.
15. Displaying
113The display shall include at least 20 characters.
114The minimum character size shall be 5 mm high and 3,5 mm wide.
114aThe display shall support the Latin 1 and Greek character sets defined by ISO 8859 parts 1 and 7, as specified in Appendix 1 Chapter 4 “Character sets“. The display may use simplified glyphs (e.g. accented characters may be displayed without accent, or lower case letters may be shown as upper case letters).
115The display shall be provided with adequate non-dazzling lighting.
116Indications shall be visible from outside the recording equipment.
117The recording equipment shall be able to display:
—
default data,
—
data related to warnings,
—
data related to menu access,
—
other data requested by a user.
Additional information may be displayed by the recording equipment, provided that it is clearly distinguishable from information required above.
118The display of the recording equipment shall use the pictograms or pictogram combinations listed in Appendix 3. Additional pictograms or pictogram combinations may also be provided by the display, if clearly distinguishable from the aforementioned pictogram or pictogram combinations.
119The display shall always be ON when the vehicle is moving.
120The recording equipment may include a manual or automatic feature to turn the display OFF when the vehicle is not moving.
Displaying format is specified in Appendix 5.
15.1. Default display
121When no other information needs to be displayed, the recording equipment shall display, by default, the following:
—
the local time (as a result of UTC time + offset as set by the driver),
—
the mode of operation,
—
the current activity of the driver and the current activity of the co-driver,
—
information related to the driver:
—
if his current activity is DRIVING, his current continuous driving time and his current cumulative break time,
—
if his current activity is not DRIVING, the current duration of this activity (since it was selected) and his current cumulative break time,
—
information related to the co-driver:
—
the current duration of his activity (since it was selected).
122Display of data related to each driver shall be clear, plain and unambiguous. In the case where the information related to the driver and the co-driver cannot be displayed at the same time, the recording equipment shall display by default the information related to the driver and shall allow the user to display the information related to the co-driver.
123In the case where the display width does not allow to display by default the mode of operation, the recording equipment shall briefly display the new mode of operation when it changes.
124The recording equipment shall briefly display the card holder name at card insertion.
124aWhen an “OUT OF SCOPE“ condition is opened, then the default display must show using the relevant pictogram that the condition is opened (It is acceptable that the driver's current activity may not be shown at the same time).
15.2. Warning display
125The recording equipment shall display warning information using primarily the pictograms of Appendix 3, completed where needed by an additional numerically coded information. A literal description of the warning may also be added in the driver's preferred language.
15.3. Menu access
126The recording equipment shall provide necessary commands through an appropriate menu structure.
15.4. Other displays
127It shall be possible to display selectively on request:
—
the UTC date and time,
—
the mode of operation (if not provided by default),
—
the continuous driving time and cumulative break time of the driver,
—
the continuous driving time and cumulative break time of the co-driver,
—
the cumulated driving time of the driver for the previous and the current week,
—
the cumulated driving time of the co-driver for the previous and the current week,
—
the content of any of the six printouts under the same formats as the printouts themselves.
128Printout content display shall be sequential, line by line. If the display width is less than 24 characters the user shall be provided with the complete information through an appropriate mean (several lines, scrolling, …). Printout lines devoted to hand-written information may be omitted for display.
16. Printing
129The recording equipment shall be able to print information from its data memory and/or from tachograph cards in accordance with the six following printouts:
—
driver activities from card daily printout,
—
driver activities from Vehicle Unit daily printout,
—
events and faults from card printout,
—
events and faults from Vehicle Unit printout,
—
technical data printout,
—
over speeding printout.
The detailed format and content of these printouts are specified in Appendix 4.
Additional data may be provided at the end of the printouts
Additional printouts may also be provided by the recording equipment, if clearly distinguishable from the six aforementioned printouts.
130The “driver activities from card daily printout“ and “events and faults from card printout“ shall be available only when a driver card or a workshop card is inserted in the recording equipment. The recording equipment shall update data stored on the relevant card before starting printing.
131In order to produce the “driver activities from card daily printout“ or the “events and faults from card printout“, the recording equipment shall:
—
either automatically select the driver card or the workshop card if one only of these cards is inserted,
—
or provide a command to select the source card or select the card in the driver slot if two of these cards are inserted in the recording equipment.
132The printer shall be able to print 24 characters per line.
133The minimum character size shall be 2,1 mm high and 1,5 mm wide.
133aThe printer shall support the Latin 1 and Greek character sets defined by ISO 8859 parts 1 and 7, as specified in Appendix 1 Chapter 4 “Character sets“.
134Printers shall be so designed as to produce these printouts with a degree of definition likely to avoid any ambiguity when they are read.
135Printouts shall retain their dimensions and recordings under normal conditions of humidity (10 to 90 %) and temperature.
136The paper for use by the recording equipment shall bear the relevant type approval mark and the indication of the type(s) of recording equipment with which it may be used. Printouts shall remain clearly legible and identifiable under normal conditions of storage, in terms of light intensity, humidity and temperature, for at least one year.
137It shall also be possible to add handwritten notes, such as the driver's signature, to these documents.
138The recording equipment shall manage “paper out“ events while printing by, once paper has been re-loaded, restarting printing from printout beginning or by continuing printing and providing an unambiguous reference to previously printed part.
17. Warnings
139The recording equipment shall warn the driver when detecting any event and/or fault.
140Warning of a power supply interruption event may be delayed until the power supply is reconnected.
141The recording equipment shall warn the driver 15 minutes before and at the time of exceeding 4 h 30 min. continuous driving time.
142Warnings shall be visual. Audible warnings may also be provided in addition to visual warnings.
143Visual warnings shall be clearly recognisable by the user, shall be situated in the driver's field of vision and shall be clearly legible both by day and by night.
144Visual warnings may be built into the recording equipment and/or remote from the recording equipment.
145In the latter case it shall bear a “T“ symbol and shall be amber or orange.
146Warnings shall have a duration of at least 30 seconds, unless acknowledged by the user by hitting any key of the recording equipment. This first acknowledgement shall not erase warning cause display referred to in next paragraph.
147Warning cause shall be displayed on the recording equipment and remain visible until acknowledged by the user using a specific key or command of the recording equipment.
148Additional warnings may be provided, as long as they do not confuse drivers in relation to previously defined ones.
18. Data downloading to external media
149The recording equipment shall be able to download on request data from its data memory or from a driver card to external storage media via the calibration/downloading connector. The recording equipment shall update data stored on the relevant card before starting downloading.
150In addition and as an optional feature, the recording equipment may, in any mode of operation, download data through another connector to a company authenticated through this channel. In such a case, company mode data access rights shall apply to this download.
151Downloading shall not alter or delete any stored data.
The calibration/downloading connector electrical interface is specified in Appendix 6.
Downloading protocols are specified in Appendix 7.
19. Output data to additional external devices
152When the recording equipment does not include speed and/or odometer display functions, the recording equipment shall provide output signal(s) to allow for displaying the speed of the vehicle (speedometer) and/or the total distance travelled by the vehicle (odometer).
153The vehicle unit shall also be able to output the following data using an appropriate dedicated serial link independent from an optional CAN bus connection (ISO 11898 Road vehicles — Interchange of digital information — Controller Area Network (CAN) for high speed communication), to allow their processing by other electronic units installed in the vehicle:
—
current UTC date and time,
—
speed of the vehicle,
—
total distance travelled by the vehicle (odometer),
—
currently selected driver and co-driver activity,
—
information if any tachograph card is currently inserted in the driver slot and in the co-driver slot and (if applicable) information about the corresponding cards identification (card number and issuing Member State).
Other data may also be output in addition to this minimum list.
When the ignition of the vehicle is ON, these data shall be permanently broadcast. When the ignition of the vehicle is OFF, at least any change of driver or co-driver activity and/or any insertion or withdrawal of a tachograph card shall generate a corresponding data output. In the event that data output has been withheld whilst the ignition of the vehicle is OFF, that data shall be made available once the ignition of the vehicle is ON again.
20. Calibration
154The calibration function shall allow:
—
to automatically pair the motion sensor with the VU,
—
to digitally adapt the constant of the recording equipment (k) to the characteristic coefficient of the vehicle (w) (vehicles with two or more axle ratios shall be fitted with a switch device whereby these various ratios will automatically be brought into line with the ratio for which the equipment has been adapted to the vehicle),
—
to adjust (without limitation) the current time,
—
to adjust the current odometer value,
—
to update motion sensor identification data stored in the data memory,
—
to update or confirm other parameters known to the recording equipment: vehicle identification, w, l, tyre size and speed limiting device setting if applicable.
155Pairing the motion sensor to the VU shall consist, at least, in:
—
updating motion sensor installation data held by the motion sensor (as needed),
—
copying from the motion sensor to the VU data memory necessary motion sensor identification data.
156The calibration function shall be able to input necessary data through the calibration/downloading connector in accordance with the calibration protocol defined in Appendix 8. The calibration function may also input necessary data through other connectors.
21. Time adjustment
157The time adjustment function shall allow for adjusting the current time in amounts of one minute maximum at intervals of not less than seven days.
158The time adjustment function shall allow for adjusting the current time without limitation, in calibration mode.
22. Performance characteristics
159The Vehicle Unit shall be fully operational in the temperature range − 20 °C to 70 °C, and the motion sensor in the temperature range − 40 °C to 135 °C. Data memory content shall be preserved at temperatures down to − 40 °C.
160The recording equipment shall be fully operational in the humidity range 10 % to 90 %.
161The recording equipment shall be protected against over-voltage, inversion of its power supply polarity, and short circuits.
162The recording equipment shall conform to Commission Directive 95/54/EC of 31 October 1995 (12) adapting to technical progress Council Directive 72/245/EEC (13), related to electromagnetic compatibility, and shall be protected against electrostatic discharges and transients.
23. Materials
163All the constituent parts of the recording equipment shall be made of materials of sufficient stability and mechanical strength and with stable electrical and magnetic characteristics.
164For normal conditions of use, all the internal parts of the equipment shall be protected against damp and dust.
165The Vehicle Unit shall meet the protection grade IP 40 and the motion sensor shall meet the protection grade IP 64, as per standard IEC 529.
166The recording equipment shall conform to applicable technical specifications related to ergonomic design.
167The recording equipment shall be protected against accidental damage.
24. Markings
168If the recording equipment displays the vehicle odometer value and speed, the following details shall appear on its display:
—
near the figure indicating the distance, the unit of measurement of distance, indicated by the abbreviation “km“,
—
near the figure showing the speed, the entry “km/h“.
The recording equipment may also be switched to display the speed in miles per hour, in which case the unit of measurement of speed shall be shown by the abbreviation “mph“.
169A descriptive plaque shall be affixed to each separate component of the recording equipment and shall show the following details:
—
name and address of the manufacturer of the equipment,
—
manufacturer's part number and year of manufacture of the equipment,
—
equipment serial number,
—
approval mark for the equipment type.
170When physical space is not sufficient to show all abovementioned details, the descriptive plaque shall show at least: the manufacturer's name or logo, and the equipment's part number.
IV. CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TACHOGRAPH CARDS
1. Visible data
The front page will contain:
171the words “Driver card“ or “Control card“ or “Workshop card“ or “Company card“ printed in large type in the official language or languages of the Member State issuing the card, according to the type of the card;
172the same words in the other official languages of the Community, printed to form the background of the card:
ES
TARJETA DEL CONDUCTOR
TARJETA DE CONTROL
TARJETA DEL CENTRO DE ENSAYO
TARJETA DE LA EMPRESA
DK
FØRERKORT
KONTROLKORT
VÆRKSTEDSKORT
VIRKSOMHEDSKORT
DE
FAHRERKARTE
KONTROLLKARTE
WERKSTATTKARTE
UNTERNEHMENSKARTE
EL
ΚΑΡΤΑ ΟΔΗΟΥ
ΚΑΡΤΑ ΕΛΕΓΧΟΥ
ΚΑΡΤΑ ΚΕΝΤΡΟΥ ΔΟΚΙΜΩΝ
ΚΑΡΤΑ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΗΣ
EN
DRIVER CARD
CONTROL CARD
WORKSHOP CARD
COMPANY CARD
FR
CARTE DE CONDUCTEUR
CARTE DE CONTROLEUR
CARTE D'ATELIER
CARTE D'ENTREPRISE
GA
CÁRTA TIOMÁNAÍ
CÁRTA STIÚRTHA
CÁRTA CEARDLAINNE
CÁRTA COMHLACHTA
IT
CARTA DEL CONDUCENTE
CARTA DI CONTROLLO
CARTA DELL'OFFICINA
CARTA DELL'AZIENDA
NL
BESTUURDERS KAART
CONTROLEKAART
WERKPLAATSKAART
BEDRIJFSKAART
PT
CARTÃO DE CONDUTOR
CARTÃO DE CONTROLO
CARTÃO DO CENTRO DE ENSAIO
CARTÃO DE EMPRESA
FI
KULJETTAJA KORTTILLA
VALVONTA KORTILLA
TESTAUSASEMA KORTILLA
YRITYSKORTILLA
SV
FÖRARKORT
KONTROLLKORT
VERKSTADSKORT
FÖRETAGSKORT
173the name of the Member State issuing the card (optional);
174the distinguishing sign of the Member State issuing the card, printed in negative in a blue rectangle and encircled by 12 yellow stars. The distinguishing signs shall be as follows:
B
Belgium
DK
Denmark
D
Germany
GR
Greece
E
Spain
F
France
IRL
Ireland
I
Italy
L
Luxembourg
NL
The Netherlands
A
Austria
P
Portugal
FIN
Finland
S
Sweden
UK
The United Kingdom;
175information specific to the card issued, numbered as follows:
Driver card
Control card
Company or workshop card
1.
Surname of the driver
Control body name
Company or workshop card
2.
First name(s) of the driver
Surname of the controller
(if applicable)
Surname of card holder
(if applicable)
3.
Birth date of the driver
First name(s) of the controller
(if applicable)
First name(s) of card holder
(if applicable)
4.(a)
Card start of validity date
(b)
Card expiry date (if any)
(c)
The name of the issuing authority (may be printed on page 2)
(d)
A different number from the one under heading 5, for administrative purposes (optional)
5.(a)
Driving licence number
(at the date of issue of the driver card)
5.(b)
Card number
6.
Photograph of the driver
Photograph of the controller
(optional)
—
7.
Signature of the driver
Signature of the holder (optional)
8.
Normal place of residence, or postal address of the holder (optional)
Postal address of control body
Postal address of company or workshop
176dates shall be written using a “dd/mm/yyyy“ or “dd.mm.yyyy“ format (day, month, year);
the reverse page will contain:
177an explanation of the numbered items which appear on the front page of the card;
178with the specific written agreement of the holder, information which is not related to the administration of the card may also be added, such addition will not alter in any way the use of the model as a tachograph card.
179Tachograph cards shall be printed with the following background predominant colours:
—
driver card: white,
—
control card: blue,
—
workshop card: red,
—
company card: yellow.
180Tachograph cards shall bear at least the following features for protection of the card body against counterfeiting and tampering:
—
a security design background with fine guilloche patterns and rainbow printing,
—
in the area of the photograph, the security design background and the photograph shall overlap,
—
at least one two-coloured microprint line.
181After consulting the Commission, Member States may add colours or markings, such as national symbols and security features, without prejudice to the other provisions of this Annex.
2. Security
The system security aims at protecting integrity and authenticity of data exchanged between the cards and the recording equipment, protecting the integrity and authenticity of data downloaded from the cards, allowing certain write operations onto the cards to recording equipment only, ruling out any possibility of falsification of data stored in the cards, preventing tampering and detecting any attempt of that kind.
182In order to achieve the system security, the tachograph cards shall meet the security requirements defined in the tachograph cards generic security target (Appendix 10).
183Tachograph cards shall be readable by other equipment such as personal computers.
3. Standards
184The tachograph cards shall comply with the following standards:
—
ISO/IEC 7810 Identification cards — Physical characteristics,
—
ISO/IEC 7816 Identification cards — Integrated circuits with contacts:
—
Part 1: Physical characteristics,
—
Part 2: Dimensions and location of the contacts,
—
Part 3: Electronic signals and transmission protocols,
—
Part 4: Inter-industry commands for interchange,
—
Part 8: Security related inter-industry commands,
—
ISO/IEC 10373 Identification cards — Test methods.
4. Environmental and electrical specifications
185The tachograph cards shall be capable of operating correctly in all the climatic conditions normally encountered in Community territory and at least in the temperature range − 25 °C to + 70 °C with occasional peaks of up to + 85 °C, “occasional“ meaning not more than 4 hours each time and not over 100 times during the lifetime of the card.
186The tachograph cards shall be capable of operating correctly in the humidity range 10 % to 90 %.
187The tachograph cards shall be capable of operating correctly for a five-year period if used within the environmental and electrical specifications.
188During operation, the tachograph cards shall conform to Commission Directive 95/54/EC of 31 October 1995 (14), related to electromagnetic compatibility, and shall be protected against electrostatic discharges.
5. Data storage
For the purpose of this paragraph,
—
times are recorded with a resolution of one minute, unless otherwise specified,
—
odometer values are recorded with a resolution of one kilometre,
—
speeds are recorded with a resolution of 1 km/h.
The tachograph cards functions, commands and logical structures, fulfilling data storage requirements are specified in Appendix 2.
189This paragraph specifies minimum storage capacity for the various application data files. The tachograph cards shall be able to indicate to the recording equipment the actual storage capacity of these data files.
Any additional data that may be stored on tachograph cards, related to other applications eventually borne by the card, shall be stored in accordance with Directive 95/46/EC of 24 October 1995 on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data (15).
5.1. Card identification and security data
5.1.1. Application identification
190The tachograph cards shall be able to store the following application identification data:
—
tachograph application identification,
—
type of tachograph card identification.
5.1.2. Chip identification
191The tachograph cards shall be able to store the following integrated circuit (IC) identification data:
—
IC serial number,
—
IC manufacturing references.
5.1.3. IC card identification
192The tachograph cards shall be able to store the following smart card identification data:
—
card serial number (including manufacturing references),
—
card type approval number,
—
card personaliser identification (ID),
—
embedder ID,
—
IC identifier.
5.1.4. Security elements
193The tachograph cards shall be able to store the following security elements data:
—
European public key,
—
Member State certificate,
—
card certificate,
—
card private key.
5.2. Driver card
5.2.1. Card identification
194The driver card shall be able to store the following card identification data:
—
card number,
—
issuing Member State, issuing authority name, issue date,
—
card beginning of validity date, card expiry date.
5.2.2. Card holder identification
195The driver card shall be able to store the following card holder identification data:
—
surname of the holder,
—
first name(s) of the holder,
—
date of birth,
—
preferred language.
5.2.3. Driving licence information
196The driver card shall be able to store the following driving licence data:
—
issuing Member State, issuing authority name,
—
driving licence number (at the date of the issue of the card).
5.2.4. Vehicles used data
197The driver card shall be able to store, for each calendar day where the card has been used, and for each period of use of a given vehicle that day (a period of use includes all consecutive insertion/withdrawal cycle of the card in the vehicle, as seen from the card point of view), the following data:
—
date and time of first use of the vehicle (i.e. first card insertion for this period of use of the vehicle, or 00.00 if the period of use is on-going at that time),
—
vehicle odometer value at that time,
—
date and time of last use of the vehicle, (i.e. last card withdrawal for this period of use of the vehicle, or 23.59 if the period of use is on-going at that time),
—
vehicle odometer value at that time,
—
VRN and registering Member State of the vehicle.
198The driver card shall be able to store at least 84 such records.
5.2.5. Driver activity data
199The driver card shall be able to store, for each calendar day where the card has been used or for which the driver has entered activities manually, the following data:
—
the date,
—
a daily presence counter (increased by one for each of these calendar days),
—
the total distance travelled by the driver during this day,
—
a driver status at 00.00,
—
whenever the driver has changed of activity, and/or has changed of driving status, and/or has inserted or withdrawn his card:
—
the driving status (CREW, SINGLE),
—
the slot (DRIVER, CO-DRIVER),
—
the card status (INSERTED, NOT INSERTED),
—
the activity (DRIVING, AVAILABILITY, WORK, BREAK/REST),
—
the time of the change.
200The driver card memory shall be able to hold driver activity data for at least 28 days (the average activity of a driver is defined as 93 activity changes per day).
201The data listed under requirements 197 and 199 shall be stored in a way allowing the retrieval of activities in the order of their occurrence, even in case of a time overlap situation.
5.2.6. Places where daily work periods start and/or end
202The driver card shall be able to store the following data related to places where daily work periods begin and/or end, entered by the driver:
—
the date and time of the entry (or the date/time related to the entry if the entry is made during the manual entry procedure),
—
the type of entry (begin or end, condition of entry),
—
the country and region entered,
—
the vehicle odometer value.
203The driver card memory shall be able to hold at least 42 pairs of such records.
5.2.7. Events data
For the purpose of this subparagraph, time shall be stored with a resolution of one second.
204The driver card shall be able to store data related to the following events detected by the recording equipment while the card was inserted:
—
time overlap (where this card is the cause of the event),
—
card insertion while driving (where this card is the subject of the event),
—
last card session not correctly closed (where this card is the subject of the event),
—
power supply interruption,
—
motion data error,
—
security breach attempts.
205The driver card shall be able to store the following data for these events:
—
event code,
—
date and time of beginning of the event (or of card insertion if the event was on-going at that time),
—
date and time of end of the event (or of card withdrawal if the event was on-going at that time),
—
VRN and registering Member State of vehicle in which the event happened.
Note: For the “time overlap“ event:
—
date and time of beginning of the event shall correspond to the date and time of the card withdrawal from the previous vehicle,
—
date and time of end of the event shall correspond to the date and time of card insertion in current vehicle,
—
vehicle data shall correspond to the current vehicle raising the event.
Note: For the “last card session not correctly closed“ event:
—
date and time of beginning of event shall correspond to the card insertion date and time of the session not correctly closed,
—
date and time of end of event shall correspond to the card insertion date and time of the session during which the event was detected (current session),
—
vehicle data shall correspond to the vehicle in which the session was not correctly closed.
206The driver card shall be able to store data for the six most recent events of each type (i.e. 36 events).
5.2.8. Faults data
For the purpose of this subparagraph, time shall be recorded with a resolution of one second.
207The driver card shall be able to store data related to the following faults detected by the recording equipment while the card was inserted:
—
card fault (where this card is the subject of the event),
—
recording equipment fault.
208The driver card shall be able to store the following data for these faults:
—
fault code,
—
date and time of beginning of the fault (or of card insertion if the fault was on-going at that time),
—
date and time of end of the fault (or of card withdrawal if the fault was on-going at that time),
—
VRN and registering Member State of vehicle in which the fault happened.
209The driver card shall be able to store data for the twelve most recent faults of each type (i.e. 24 faults).
5.2.9. Control activity data
210The driver card shall be able to store the following data related to control activities:
—
date and time of the control,
—
control card number and card issuing Member State,
—
type of the control (displaying and/or printing and/or VU downloading and/or card downloading (see note)),
—
period downloaded, in case of downloading,
—
VRN and registering Member State of the vehicle in which the control happened.
Note: security requirements imply that card downloading will only be recorded if performed through a recording equipment.
211The driver card shall be able to hold one such record.
5.2.10. Card session data
212The driver card shall be able to store data related to the vehicle which opened its current session:
—
date and time the session was opened (i.e. card insertion) with a resolution of one second,
—
VRN and registering Member State.
5.2.11. Specific conditions data
212aThe driver card shall be able to store the following data related to specific conditions entered while the card was inserted (whatever the slot):
—
date and time of the entry,
—
type of specific condition.
212bThe driver card shall be able to hold 56 such records.
5.3. Workshop card
5.3.1. Security elements
213The workshop card shall be able to store a personal identification number (PIN code).
214The workshop card shall be able to store the cryptographic keys needed for pairing motion sensors to vehicle units.
5.3.2. Card identification
215The workshop card shall be able to store the following card identification data:
—
card number,
—
issuing Member State, issuing authority name, issue date,
—
card beginning of validity date, card expiry date.
5.3.3. Card holder identification
216The workshop card shall be able to store the following card holder identification data:
—
workshop name,
—
workshop address,
—
surname of the holder,
—
first name(s) of the holder,
—
preferred language.
5.3.4. Vehicles used data
217The workshop card shall be able to store vehicles used data records in the same manner as a driver card.
218The workshop card shall be able to store at least 4 such records.
5.3.5. Driver activity data
219The workshop card shall be able to store driver activity data in the same manner as a driver card.
220The workshop card shall be able to hold driver activity data for at least one day of average driver activity.
5.3.6. Daily work periods start and/or end data
221The workshop card shall be able to store daily works period start and/or end data records in the same manner as a driver card.
222The workshop card shall be able to hold at least three pairs of such records.
5.3.7. Events and faults data
223The workshop card shall be able to store events and faults data records in the same manner as a driver card.
224The workshop card shall be able to store data for the three most recent events of each type (i.e. 18 events) and the six most recent faults of each type (i.e. 12 faults).
5.3.8. Control activity data
225The workshop card shall be able to store a control activity data record in the same manner as a driver card.
5.3.9. Calibration and time adjustment data
226The workshop card shall be able to hold records of calibrations and/or time adjustments performed while the card is inserted in a recording equipment.
227Each calibration record shall be able to hold the following data:
—
purpose of calibration (first installation, installation, periodic inspection),
—
vehicle identification,
—
parameters updated or confirmed (w, k, l, tyre size, speed limiting device setting, odometer (new and old values), date and time (new and old values),
—
recording equipment identification (VU part number, VU serial number, motion sensor serial number).
228The workshop card shall be able to store at least 88 such records.
229The workshop card shall hold a counter indicating the total number of calibrations performed with the card.
230The workshop card shall hold a counter indicating the number of calibrations performed since its last download.
5.3.10. Specific conditions data
230aThe workshop card shall be able to store data relevant to specific conditions in the same manner as the driver card. The workshop card shall be able to store two such records.
5.4. Control card
5.4.1. Card identification
231The control card shall be able to store the following card identification data:
—
card number,
—
issuing Member State, issuing authority name, issue date,
—
card beginning of validity date, card expiry date (if any).
5.4.2. Card holder identification
232The control card shall be able to store the following card holder identification data:
—
control body name,
—
control body address,
—
surname of the holder,
—
first name(s) of the holder,
—
preferred language.
5.4.3. Control activity data
233The control card shall be able to store the following control activity data:
—
date and time of the control,
—
type of the control (displaying and/or printing and/or VU downloading and/or card downloading),
—
period downloaded (if any),
—
VRN and Member State registering authority of the controlled vehicle,
—
card number and card issuing Member State of the driver card controlled.
234The control card shall be able to hold at least 230 such records.
5.5. Company card
5.5.1. Card identification
235The company card shall be able to store the following card identification data:
—
card number,
—
issuing Member State, issuing authority name, issue date,
—
card beginning of validity date, card expiry date (if any).
5.5.2. Card holder identification
236The company card shall be able to store the following card holder identification data:
—
company name,
—
company address.
5.5.3. Company activity data
237The company card shall be able to store the following company activity data:
—
date and time of the activity,
—
type of the activity (VU locking in and/or out, and/or VU downloading and/or card downloading),
—
period downloaded (if any),
—
VRN and Member State registering authority of vehicle,
—
card number and card issuing Member State (in case of card downloading).
238The company card shall be able to hold at least 230 such records.
V. INSTALLATION OF RECORDING EQUIPMENT
1. Installation
239New recording equipment shall be delivered non-activated to fitters or vehicle manufacturers, with all calibration parameters, as listed in Chapter III(20), set to appropriate and valid default values. Where no particular value is appropriate, literal parameters shall be set to strings of “?“ and numeric parameters shall be set to “0“.
240Before its activation, the recording equipment shall give access to the calibration function even if not in calibration mode.
241Before its activation, the recording equipment shall neither record nor store data referred by points III.12.3. to III.12.9. and III.12.12 to III.12.14. inclusive.
242During installation, vehicle manufacturers shall pre-set all known parameters.
243Vehicle manufacturers or fitters shall activate the installed recording equipment before the vehicle leaves the premises where the installation took place.
244The activation of the recording equipment shall be triggered automatically by the first insertion of a workshop card in either of its card interface devices.
245Specific pairing operations required between the motion sensor and the vehicle unit, if any, shall take place automatically before or during activation.
246After its activation, the recording equipment shall fully enforce functions and data access rights.
247The recording and storing functions of the recording equipment shall be fully operational after its activation.
248Installation shall be followed by a calibration. The first calibration will include entry of VRN and will take place within 2 weeks of this installation or of VRN allocation whichever comes last.
248aThe recording equipment must be positioned in the vehicle in such a way as to allow the driver to access the necessary functions from his seat.
2. Installation plaque
249After the recording equipment has been checked on installation, an installation plaque which is clearly visible and easily accessible shall be affixed on, in or beside the recording equipment. After every inspection by an approved fitter or workshop, a new plaque shall be affixed in place of the previous one.
250The plaque shall bear at least the following details:
—
name, address or trade name of the approved fitter or workshop,
—
characteristic coefficient of the vehicle, in the form “w = … imp/km“,
—
constant of the recording equipment, in the form “k = … imp/km“,
—
effective circumference of the wheel tyres in the form “l = … mm“,
—
tyre size,
—
the date on which the characteristic coefficient of the vehicle was determined and the effective circumference of the wheel tyres measured,
—
the vehicle identification number.
3. Sealing
251The following part shall be sealed:
—
any connection which, if disconnected, would cause undetectable alterations to be made or undetectable data loss,
—
the installation plaque, unless it is attached in such a way that it cannot be removed without the markings thereon being destroyed.
252The seals mentioned above may be removed:
—
in case of emergency,
—
to install, to adjust or to repair a speed limitation device or any other device contributing to road safety, provided that the recording equipment continues to function reliably and correctly and is resealed by an approved fitter or workshop (in accordance with Chapter VI) immediately after fitting the speed limitation device or any other device contributing to road safety or within seven days in other cases.
253On each occasion that these seals are broken a written statement giving the reasons for such action shall be prepared and made available to the competent authority.
VI. CHECKS, INSPECTIONS AND REPAIRS
Requirements on the circumstances in which seals may be removed, as referred to in Article 12.5 of Regulation (EEC) No 3821/85 as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 2135/98, are defined in Chapter V(3) of this annex.
1. Approval of fitters or workshops
The Member States will approve, regularly control and certify the bodies to carry out:
—
installations,
—
checks,
—
inspections,
—
repairs.
In the framework of Article 12(1) of this Regulation, workshop cards will be issued only to fitters and/or workshops approved for the activation and/or the calibration of recording equipment in conformity with this annex and, unless duly justified:
—
who are not eligible for a company card,
—
and whose other professional activities do not present a potential compromise of the overall security of the system as defined in Appendix 10.
2. Check of new or repaired instruments
254Every individual device, whether new or repaired, shall be checked in respect of its proper operation and the accuracy of its reading and recordings, within the limits laid down in Chapter III.2.1. and III.2.2 by means of sealing in accordance with Chapter V.3. and calibration.
3. Installation inspection
255When being fitted to a vehicle, the whole installation (including the recording equipment) shall comply with the provisions relating to maximum tolerances laid down in Chapter III.2.1 and III.2.2.
4. Periodic inspections
256Periodic inspections of the equipment fitted to the vehicles shall take place after any repair of the equipment, or after any alteration of the characteristic coefficient of the vehicle or of the effective circumference of the tyres, or after equipment UTC time is wrong by more than 20 minutes, or when the VRN has changed, and at least once within two years (24 months) of the last inspection.
257These inspections shall include the following checks:
—
that the recording equipment is working properly, including the data storage in tachograph cards function,
—
that compliance with the provisions of Chapter III.2.1 and III.2.2 on the maximum tolerances on installation is ensured,
—
that the recording equipment carries the type approval mark,
—
that the installation plaque is affixed,
—
that the seals on the equipment and on the other parts of the installation are intact,
—
the tyre size and the actual circumference of the wheel tyres.
258These inspections shall include a calibration.
5. Measurement of errors
259The measurement of errors on installation and during use shall be carried out under the following conditions, which are to be regarded as constituting standard test conditions:
—
vehicle unladen, in normal running order,
—
tyre pressures in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
—
tyre wear, within the limits allowed by national law,
—
vehicle movement:
—
the vehicle shall advance under its own engine power in a straight line on level ground and at a speed of 50 ± 5 km/h. The measuring distance shall be at least 1 000 m,
—
provided that it is of comparable accuracy, alternative methods, such as a suitable test bench, may also be used for the test.
6. Repairs
260Workshops shall be able to download data from the recording equipment to give the data back to the appropriate transport company.
261Approved workshops shall issue to transport companies a certificate of data un-downloadability where the malfunction of the recording equipment prevents previously recorded data to be downloaded, even after repair by this workshop. The workshops will keep a copy of each issued certificate for at least one year.
VII. CARD ISSUING
The card issuing processes set-up by the Member States shall conform to the following:
262The card number of the first issue of a tachograph card to an applicant shall have a consecutive index (if applicable) and a replacement index and a renewal index set to “0“.
263The card numbers of all non-personal tachograph cards issued to a single control body or a single workshop or a single transport company shall have the same first 13 digits, and shall all have a different consecutive index.
264A tachograph card issued in replacement of an existing tachograph card shall have the same card number as the replaced one except the replacement index which shall be raised by “1“ (in the order 0, …, 9, A, …, Z).
265A tachograph card issued in replacement of an existing tachograph card shall have the same card expiry date as the replaced one.
266A tachograph card issued in renewal of an existing tachograph card shall have the same card number as the renewed one except the replacement index which shall be reset to “0“ and the renewal index which shall be raised by “1“ (in the order 0, …, 9, A, …, Z).
267The exchange of an existing tachograph card, in order to modify administrative data, shall follow the rules of the renewal if within the same Member State, or the rules of a first issue if performed by another Member State.
268The “card holder surname“ for non-personal workshop or control cards shall be filled with workshop or control body name.
VIII. TYPE APPROVAL OF RECORDING EQUIPMENT AND TACHOGRAPH CARDS
1. General points
For the purpose of this chapter, the words “recording equipment“ mean “recording equipment or its components“. No type approval is required for the cable(s) linking the motion sensor to the VU. The paper, for use by the recording equipment, shall be considered as a component of the recording equipment.
269Recording equipment shall be submitted for approval complete with any integrated additional devices.
270Type approval of recording equipment and of tachograph cards shall include security related tests, functional tests and interoperability tests. Positive results to each of these tests are stated by an appropriate certificate.
271Member States type approval authorities will not grant a type approval certificate in accordance with Article 5 of this Regulation, as long as they do not hold:
—
a security certificate,
—
a functional certificate,
—
and an interoperability certificate,
for the recording equipment or the tachograph card, subject of the request for type approval.
272Any modification in software or hardware of the equipment or in the nature of materials used for its manufacture shall, before being used, be notified to the authority which granted type-approval for the equipment. This authority shall confirm to the manufacturer the extension of the type approval, or may require an update or a confirmation of the relevant functional, security and/or interoperability certificates.
273Procedures to upgrade in situ recording equipment software shall be approved by the authority which granted type approval for the recording equipment. Software upgrade must not alter nor delete any driver activity data stored in the recording equipment. Software may be upgraded only under the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer.
2. Security certificate
274The security certificate is delivered in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 10 to this Annex.
3. Functional certificate
275Each candidate for type approval shall provide the Member State's type approval authority with all the material and documentation that the authority deems necessary.
276A functional certificate shall be delivered to the manufacturer only after all functional tests specified in Appendix 9, at least, have been successfully passed.
277The type approval authority delivers the functional certificate. This certificate shall indicate, in addition to the name of its beneficiary and the identification of the model, a detailed list of the tests performed and the results obtained.
4. Interoperability certificate
278Interoperability tests are carried out by a single laboratory under the authority and responsibility of the European Commission.
279The laboratory shall register interoperability test requests introduced by manufacturers in the chronological order of their arrival.
280Requests will be officially registered only when the laboratory is in possession of:
—
the entire set of material and documents necessary for such interoperability tests,
—
the corresponding security certificate,
—
the corresponding functional certificate,
The date of the registration of the request shall be notified to the manufacturer.
281No interoperability tests shall be carried out by the laboratory, for a recording equipment or a tachograph card that have not been granted a security certificate and a functional certificate.
282Any manufacturer requesting interoperability tests shall commit to leave to the laboratory in charge of these tests the entire set of material and documents which he provided to carry out the tests.
283The interoperability tests shall be carried out, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 5 of Appendix 9 of this Annex, with respectively all the types of recording equipment or tachograph cards:
—
for which type approval is still valid, or
—
for which type approval is pending and that have a valid interoperability certificate.
284The interoperability certificate shall be delivered by the laboratory to the manufacturer only after all required interoperability tests have been successfully passed.
285If the interoperability tests are not successful with one or more of the recording equipment or tachograph card(s), as requested by requirement 283, the interoperability certificate shall not be delivered, until the requesting manufacturer has realised the necessary modifications and has succeeded with the interoperability tests. The laboratory shall identify the cause of the problem with the help of the manufacturers concerned by this interoperability fault and shall attempt to help the requesting manufacturer in finding a technical solution. In the case where the manufacturer has modified its product, it is the manufacturer's responsibility to ascertain from the relevant authorities that the security certificate and the functional certificates are still valid.
286The interoperability certificate is valid for six months. It is revoked at the end of this period if the manufacturer has not received a corresponding type approval certificate. It is forwarded by the manufacturer to the type approval authority of the Member State who has delivered the functional certificate.
287Any element that could be at the origin of an interoperability fault shall not be used for profit or to lead to a dominant position.
5. Type approval certificate
288The type approval authority of the Member State may deliver the type approval certificate as soon as it holds the three required certificates.
289The type approval certificate shall be copied by the type approval authority to the laboratory in charge of the interoperability tests at the time of deliverance to the manufacturer.
290The laboratory competent for interoperability tests shall run a public web site on which will be updated the list of recording equipment or tachograph cards models:
—
for which a request for interoperability tests have been registered,
—
having received an interoperability certificate (even provisional),
—
having received a type approval certificate.
6. Exceptional procedure: first interoperability certificates
291Until four months after a first couple of recording equipment and tachograph cards (driver, workshop, control and company cards) have been certified to be interoperable, any interoperability certificate delivered (including this very first one), regarding requests registered during this period, shall be considered provisional.
292If at the end of this period, all products concerned are mutually interoperable, all corresponding interoperability certificates shall become definitive.
293If during this period, interoperability faults are found, the laboratory in charge of interoperability tests shall identify the causes of the problems with the help of all manufacturers involved and shall invite them to realise the necessary modifications.
294If at the end of this period, interoperability problems still remain, the laboratory in charge of interoperability tests, with the collaboration of the manufacturers concerned and with the type approval authorities who delivered the corresponding functional certificates shall find out the causes of the interoperability faults and establish which modifications should be made by each of the manufacturers concerned. The search for technical solutions shall last for a maximum of two months, after which, if no common solution is found, the Commission, after having consulted the laboratory in charge of interoperability tests, shall decide which equipment(s) and cards get a definitive interoperability certificate and state the reasons why.
295Any request for interoperability tests, registered by the laboratory between the end of the four-month period after the first provisional interoperability certificate has been delivered and the date of the decision by the Commission referred to in requirement 294, shall be postponed until the initial interoperability problems have been solved. Those requests are then processed in the chronological order of their registration.
Appendix 1
DATA DICTIONARY
CONTENTS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.
2.10.
2.11.
2.12.
2.13.
2.14.
2.15.
2.16.
2.17.
2.18.
2.19.
2.20.
2.21.
2.22.
2.23.
2.24.
2.25.
2.26.
2.27.
2.28.
2.29.
2.30.
2.31.
2.32.
2.33.
2.34.
2.35.
2.36.
2.37.
2.38.
2.39.
2.40.
2.41.
2.42.
2.43.
2.44.
2.45.
2.46.
2.47.
2.48.
2.49.
2.50.
2.51.
2.52.
2.53.
2.54.
2.55.
2.56.
2.57.
2.58.
2.59.
2.60.
2.61.
2.62.
2.63.
2.64.
2.65.
2.66.
2.67.
2.68.
2.69.
2.70.
2.71.
2.72.
2.73.
2.74.
2.75.
2.76.
2.77.
2.78.
2.79.
2.80.
2.81.
2.82.
2.83.
2.84.
2.85.
2.86.
2.87.
2.88.
2.89.
2.90.
2.91.
2.92.
2.93.
2.94.
2.95.
2.96.
2.97.
2.98.
2.99.
2.100.
2.101.
2.102.
2.103.
2.104.
2.105.
2.106.
2.107.
2.108.
2.109.
2.110.
2.111.
2.112.
2.113.
2.114.
2.115.
2.116.
2.117.
2.118.
2.119.
2.120.
2.121.
2.122.
2.123.
2.124.
2.125.
2.126.
2.127.
2.128.
2.129.
2.130.
2.131.
2.132.
2.133.
2.134.
2.135.
2.136.
2.137.
2.138.
2.139.
2.140.
2.141.
2.142.
2.143.
2.144.
2.145.
2.146.
2.147.
2.148.
2.149.
2.150.
2.151.
2.152.
2.153.
2.154.
2.155.
2.156.
2.157.
2.158.
2.159.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
4.
5.
1. INTRODUCTION
This appendix specifies data formats, data elements, and data structures for use within the recording equipment and tachograph cards.
1.1. Approach for definitions of data types
This appendix uses Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1) to define data types. This enables simple and structured data to be defined without implying any specific transfer syntax (encoding rules) which will be application and environment dependent.
ASN.1 type naming conventions are done in accordance with ISO/IEC 8824-1. This implies that:
—
where possible, the meaning of the data type is implied through the names being selected,
—
where a data type is a composition of other data types, the data type name is still a single sequence of alphabetical characters commencing with a capital letter, however capitals are used within the name to impart the corresponding meaning,
—
in general, the data types names are related to the name of the data types from which they are constructed, the equipment in which data is stored and the function related to the data.
If an ASN.1 type is already defined as part of another standard and if it is relevant for usage in the recording equipment, then this ASN.1 type will be defined in this appendix.
To enable several types of encoding rules, some ASN.1 types in this appendix are constrained by value range identifiers. The value range identifiers are defined in paragraph 3.
1.2. References
The following references are used in this Appendix:
ISO 639
Code for the representation of names of languages. First Edition: 1988
EN 726-3
Identification cards systems — Telecommunications integrated circuit(s) cards and terminals — Part 3: Application independent card requirements. December 1994
ISO 3779
Road vehicles — Vehicle identification number (VIN) — Content and structure. Edition 3: 1983
ISO/IEC 7816-5
Information technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 5: Numbering system and registration procedure for application identifiers. First edition: 1994 + Amendment 1: 1996
ISO/IEC 8824-1
Information technology — Abstract Syntax Notation 1 (ASN.1): Specification of basic notation. Edition 2: 1998
ISO/IEC 8825-2
Information technology — ASN.1 encoding rules: Specification of Packed Encoding Rules (PER). Edition 2: 1998
ISO/IEC 8859-1
Information technology — 8 bit single-byte coded graphic character sets — Part 1: Latin alphabet No 1. First edition: 1998
ISO/IEC 8859-7
Information technology — 8 bit single-byte coded graphic character sets — Part 7: Latin/Greek alphabet. First edition: 1987
ISO 16844-3
Road vehicles — Tachograph systems — Motion Sensor Interface. WD 3-20/05/99.
2. DATA TYPE DEFINITIONS
For any of the following data types, the default value for an “unknown“ or a “not applicable“ content will consist in filling the data element with ′FF′-Bytes.
2.1. ActivityChangeInfo
This data type enables to code, within a two bytes word, a slot status at 00.00 and/or a driver status at 00.00 and/or changes of activity and/or changes of driving status and/or changes of card status for a driver or a co-driver. This data type is related to requirements 084, 109a, 199 and 219.
ActivityChangeInfo ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(2))
Value assignment — Octet Aligned: ′scpaattttttttttt′B (16 bits)
For Data Memory recordings (or slot status):
′s′B
Slot:
′0′B: DRIVER,
′1′B: CO-DRIVER,
′c′B
Driving status:
′0′B: SINGLE,
′1′B: CREW,
′p′B
Driver (or workshop) card status in the relevant slot:
′0′B: INSERTED, a card is inserted,
′1′B: NOT INSERTED, no card is inserted (or a card is withdrawn),
′aa′B
Activity:
′00′B: BREAK/REST,
′01′B: AVAILABILITY,
′10′B: WORK,
′11′B: DRIVING,
′ttttttttttt′B
Time of the change: Number of minutes since 00h00 on the given day.
For Driver (or Workshop) card recordings (and driver status):
′s′B
Slot (not relevant when ′p′ = 1 except note below):
′0′B: DRIVER,
′1′B: 2. CO-DRIVER,
′c′B
Driving status (case ′p′ = 0) or
Following activity status (case ′p′ = 1):
′0′B: SINGLE,
′0′B: UNKNOWN
′1′B: CREW,
′1′B: KNOWN (= manually entered)
′p′B
Card status:
′0′B: INSERTED, the card is inserted in a recording equipment,
′1′B: NOT INSERTED, the card is not inserted (or the card is withdrawn),
′aa′B
Activity (not relevant when ′p′ = 1 and ′c′ = 0 except note below):
′00′B: BREAK/REST,
′01′B: AVAILABILITY,
′10′B: WORK,
′11′B: DRIVING,
′ttttttttttt′B
Time of the change: Number of minutes since 00h00 on the given day.
Note for the case “card withdrawal“:
When the card is withdrawn:
—
′s′ is relevant and indicates the slot from which the card is withdrawn,
—
′c′ must be set to 0,
—
′p′ must be set to 1,
—
′aa′ must code the current activity selected at that time,
As a result of a manual entry, the bits ′c′ and ′aa′ of the word (stored in a card) may be overwritten later to reflect the entry.
2.2. Address
An address.
address ::= SEQUENCE {
codePage
INTEGER (0..255),
address
OCTET STRING (SIZE(35))
}
codePage specifies the part of the ISO/IEC 8859 used to code the address,
address is an address coded in accordance with ISO/IEC 8859-codePage.
2.3. BCDString
BCDString is applied for Binary Code Decimal (BCD) representation. This data type is used to represent one decimal digit in one semi octet (4 bits). BCDString is based on the ISO/IEC 8824-1 ′CharacterStringType′.
BCDString ::= CHARACTER STRING (WITH COMPONENTS {
identification ( WITH COMPONENTS {
fixed PRESENT }) })
BCDString uses an “hstring“ notation. The leftmost hexadecimal digit shall be the most significant semi octet of the first octet. To produce a multiple of octets, zero trailing semi octets shall be inserted, as needed, from the leftmost semi octet position in the first octet.
Permitted digits are: 0, 1, 9.
2.4. CalibrationPurpose
Code explaining why a set of calibration parameters was recorded. This data type is related to requirements 097 and 098.
CalibrationPurpose ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(1)).
Value assignment:
′00′H
reserved value,
′01′H
activation: recording of calibration parameters known, at the moment of the VU activation,
′02′H
first installation: first calibration of the VU after its activation,
′03′H
installation: first calibration of the VU in the current vehicle,
′04′H
periodic inspection.
2.5. CardActivityDailyRecord
Information, stored in a card, related to the driver activities for a particular calendar day. This data type is related to requirements 199 and 219.
CardActivityDailyRecord ::= SÉQUENCE {
activityPreviousRecordLength
INTEGER(0..CardActivityLengthRange),
activityRecordDate
TimeReal,
activityDailyPresenceCounter
DailyPresenceCounter,
activityDayDistance
Distance,
activityChangeInfo
SET SIZE(1..1440) OF ActivityChangeInfo
}
activityPreviousRecordLength is the total length in bytes of the previous daily record. The maximum value is given by the length of the OCTET STRING containing these records (see CardActivityLengthRange paragraph 3). When this record is the oldest daily record, the value of activityPreviousRecordLength must be set to 0.
activityRecordLength is the total length in bytes of this record. The maximum value is given by the length of the OCTET STRING containing these records.
activityRecordDate is the date of the record.
activityDailyPresenceCounter is the daily presence counter for the card this day.
activityDayDistance is the total distance travelled this day.
activityChangeInfo is the set of ActivityChangeInfo data for the driver this day. It may contain at maximum 1 440 values (one activity change per minute). This set always includes the activityChangeInfo coding the driver status at 00.00.
2.6. CardActivityLengthRange
Number of bytes in a driver or a workshop card, available to store driver activity records.
CardActivityLengthRange ::= INTEGER(0..216-1)
Value assignment: see paragraph 3.
2.7. CardApprovalNumber
Type approval number of the card.
CardApprovalNumber ::= IA5String(SIZE(8))
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.8. CardCertificate
Certificate of the public key of a card.
CardCertificate ::= Certificate.
2.9. CardChipIdentification
Information, stored in a card, related to the identification of the card's Integrated Circuit (IC) (requirement 191).
CardChipIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
icSerialNumber
OCTET STRING (SIZE(4))
icManufacturingReferences
OCTET STRING (SIZE(4))
}
icSerialNumber is the IC serial number as defined in EN 726-3.
icManufacturingReferences is the IC manufacturer identifier and fabrication elements as defined in EN 726-3.
2.10. CardConsecutiveIndex
A card consecutive index (definition h)).
CardConsecutiveIndex ::= IA5String(SIZE(1))
Value assignment: (see this Annex Chapter VII)
Order for increase: ′0, , 9, A, , Z, a, , z′.
2.11. CardControlActivityDataRecord
Information, stored in a driver or workshop card, related to the last control the driver has been subject to (requirements 210 and 225).
CardControlActivityDataRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
controlType
controlType
controlTime
TimeReal,
controlCardNumber
FullCardNumber,
controlVehicleRegistration
VehicleRegistrationIdentification,
controlDownloadPeriodBegin
TimeReal,
controlDownloadPeriodEnd
TimeReal,
}
controlType is the type of the control.
controlTime is the date and time of the control.
controlCardNumber is the FullCardNumber of the control officer having performed the control.
controlVehicleRegistration is the VRN and registering Member State of the vehicle in which the control happened.
controlDownloadPeriodBegin and controlDownloadPeriodEnd is the period downloaded, in case of downloading.
2.12. CardCurrentUse
Information about the actual usage of the card (requirement 212).
CardCurrentUse ::= SEQUENCE {
sessionOpenTime
TimeReal,
sessionOpenVehicle
VehicleRegistrationIdentification
}
sessionOpenTime is the time when the card is inserted for the current usage. This element is set to zero at card removal.
sessionOpenVehicle is the identification of the currently used vehicle, set at card insertion. This element is set to zero at card removal.
2.13. CardDriverActivity
Information, stored in a driver or a workshop card, related to the activities of the driver (requirements 199 and 219).
CardDriverActivity ::= SEQUENCE {
activityPointerOldestDayRecord
INTEGER(0..CardActivityLengthRange-1),
activityPointerNewestRecord
INTEGER(0..CardActivityLengthRange-1),
activityDailyRecords
OCTET STRING (SIZE(CardActivityLengthRange))
}
activityPointerOldestDayRecord is the specification of the begin of the storage place (number of bytes from the beginning of the string) of the oldest complete day record in the activityDailyRecords string. The maximum value is given by the length of the string.
activityPointerNewestRecord is the specification of the begin of the storage place (number of bytes from the beginning of the string) of the most recent day record in the activityDailyRecords string. The maximum value is given by the length of the string.
activityDailyRecords is the space available to store the driver activity data (data structure: CardActivityDailyRecord) for each calendar day where the card has been used.
Value assignment: this octet string is cyclically filled with records of CardActivityDailyRecord. At the first use storing is started at the first byte of the string. All new records are appended at the end of the previous one. When the string is full, storing continues at the first byte of the string independently of a break being inside a data element. Before placing new activity data in the string (enlarging current activityDailyRecord, or placing a new activityDailyRecord) that replaces older activity data, activityPointerOldestDayRecord must be updated to reflect the new location of the oldest complete day record, and activityPreviousRecordLength of this (new) oldest complete day record must be reset to 0.
2.14. CardDrivingLicenceInformation
Information, stored in a driver card, related to the card holder driver licence data (requirement 196).
CardDrivingLicenceInformation ::= SEQUENCE {
drivingLicenceIssuingAuthority
Name,
drivingLicenceIssuingNation
NationNumeric
drivingLicenceNumber
IA5String(SIZE(16))
}
drivingLicenceIssuingAuthority is the authority responsible for issuing the driving licence.
drivingLicenceIssuingNation is the nationality of the authority that issued the driving licence.
drivingLicenceNumber is the number of the driving licence.
2.15. CardEventData
Information, stored in a driver or workshop card, related to the events associated with the card holder (requirements 204 and 223).
CardEventData ::= SEQUENCE SIZE(6) OF {
cardEventRecords
SET SIZE(NoOfEventsPerType) OF CardEventRecord
}
CardEventData is a sequence, ordered by ascending value of EventFaultType, of cardEventRecords (except security breach attempts related records which are gathered in the last set of the sequence).
cardEventRecords is a set of event records of a given event type (or category for security breach attempts events).
2.16. CardEventRecord
Information, stored in a driver or a workshop card, related to an event associated to the card holder (requirements 205 and 223).
CardEventRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
eventType
EventFaultType,
eventBeginTime
TimeReal,
eventEndTime
TimeReal,
eventVehicleRegistration
VehicleRegistrationIdentification
}
eventType is the type of the event.
eventBeginTime is the date and time of beginning of event.
eventEndTime is the date and time of end of event.
eventVehicleRegistration is the VRN and registering Member State of vehicle in which the event happened.
2.17. CardFaultData
Information, stored in a driver or a workshop card, related to the faults associated to the card holder (requirements 207 and 223).
CardFaultData ::= SEQUENCE SIZE(2) OF {
cardFaultRecords
SET SIZE(NoOfFaultsPerType) OF CardFaultRecord
}
CardFaultData is a sequence of Recording Equipment faults set of records followed by card faults set of records.
cardFaultRecords is a set of fault records of a given fault category (Recording Equipment or card).
2.18. CardFaultRecord
Information, stored in a driver or a workshop card, related to a fault associated to the card holder (requirement 208 and 223).
CardFaultRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
faultType
EventFaultType,
faultBeginTime
TimeReal,
faultEndTime
TimeReal,
faultVehicleRegistration
VehicleRegistrationIdentification
}
faultType is the type of the fault.
faultBeginTime is the date and time of beginning of fault.
faultEndTime is the date and time of end of fault.
faultVehicleRegistration is the VRN and registering Member State of vehicle in which the fault happened.
2.19. CardIccIdentification
Information, stored in a card, related to the identification of the integrated circuit (IC) card (requirement 192).
CardIccIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
clockStop
OCTET STRING (SIZE(1)),
cardExtendedSerialNumber
ExtendedSerialNumber,
cardApprovalNumber
CardApprovalNumber
cardPersonaliserID
OCTET STRING (SIZE(1)),
embedderIcAssemblerId
OCTET STRING (SIZE(5)),
icIdentifier
OCTET STRING (SIZE(2))
}
clockStop is the Clockstop mode as defined in EN 726-3.
cardExtendedSerialNumber is the IC card serial number and IC card manufacturing reference as defined in EN 726-3 and as further specified by the ExtendedSerialNumber data type.
cardApprovalNumber is the type approval number of the card.
cardPersonaliserID is the card personaliser ID as defined in EN 726-3.
embedderIcAssemblerId is the embedder/IC assembler identifier as defined in EN 726-3.
icIdentifier is the Identifier of the IC on the card and its IC manufacturer as defined in EN 726-3.
2.20. CardIdentification
Information, stored in a card, related to the identification of the card (requirements 194, 215, 231, 235).
CardIdentification ::= SEQUENCE
cardIssuingMemberState
NationNumeric,
cardNumber
CardNumber,
cardIssuingAuthorityName
Name,
cardIssueDate
TimeReal,
cardValidityBegin
TimeReal,
cardExpiryDate
TimeReal,
}
cardIssuingMemberState is the code of the Member State issuing the card.
cardNumber is the card number of the card.
cardIssuingAuthorityName is the name of the authority having issued the Card.
cardIssueDate is the issue date of the Card to the current holder.
cardValidityBegin is the first date of validity of the card.
cardExpiryDate is the date when the validity of the card ends.
2.21. CardNumber
A card number as defined by definition g).
CardNumber ::= CHOICE {
SEQUENCE {
driverIdentification
IA5String(SIZE(14)),
cardReplacementIndex
CardReplacementIndex,
cardRenewalIndex
CardRenewalIndex
}
SEQUENCE {
ownerIdentification
IA5String(SIZE(13)),
cardConsecutiveIndex
CardConsecutiveIndex,
cardReplacementIndex
CardReplacementIndex,
cardRenewalIndex
CardRenewalIndex
}
}
driverIdentification is the unique identification of a driver in a Member State.
ownerIdentification is the unique identification of a company or a workshop or a control body within a Member State.
cardConsecutiveIndex is the card consecutive index.
cardReplacementIndex is the card replacement index.
cardRenewalIndex is the card renewal index.
The first sequence of the choice is suitable to code a driver card number, the second sequence of the choice is suitable to code workshop, control, and company card numbers.
2.22. CardPlaceDailyWorkPeriod
Information, stored in a driver or a workshop card, related to the places where daily work periods begin and/or end (requirements 202 and 221).
CardPlaceDailyWorkPeriod ::= SEQUENCE {
placePointerNewestRecord
INTEGER(0..NoOfCardPlaceRecords-1),
placeRecords
SET SIZE(NoOfCardPlaceRecords) OF PlaceRecord
}
placePointerNewestRecord is the index of the last updated place record.
Value assignment: Number corresponding to the numerator of the place record, beginning with “0“ for the first occurrence of the place records in the structure.
placeRecords is the set of records containing the information related to the places entered.
2.23. CardPrivateKey
The private key of a card.
CardPrivateKey ::= RSAKeyPrivateExponent.
2.24. CardPublicKey
The public key of a card.
CardPublicKey ::= PublicKey.
2.25. CardRenewalIndex
A card renewal index (definition i)).
CardRenewalIndex ::= IA5String(SIZE(1)).
Value assignment: (see this Annex Chapter VII).
′0′ First issue.
Order for increase: ′0, , 9, A, , Z′.
2.26. CardReplacementIndex
A card replacement index (definition j)).
CardReplacementIndex ::= IA5String(SIZE(1))
Value assignment: (see this Annex Chapter VII).
′0′ Original card.
Order for increase: ′0, , 9, A, , Z′.
2.27. CardSlotNumber
Code to distinguish between the two slots of a vehicle unit.
CardSlotNumber ::= INTEGER {
driverSlot
(0),
co-driverSlot
(1)
}
Value assignment: not further specified.
2.28. CardSlotsStatus
Code indicating the type of cards inserted in the two slots of the vehicle unit.
CardSlotsStatus ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(1))
Value assignment — Octet Aligned: ′ccccdddd′B:
′cccc′B
Identification of the type of card inserted in the co-driver slot,
′dddd′B
Identification of the type of card inserted in the driver slot,
with the following identification codes:
′0000′B
no card is inserted,
′0001′B
a driver card is inserted,
′0010′B
a workshop card is inserted,
′0011′B
a control card is inserted,
′0100′B
a company card is inserted.
2.29. CardStructureVersion
Code indicating the version of the implemented structure in a tachograph card.
CardStructureVersion ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(2))
Value assignment: ′aabb′H:
′aa′H
Index for changes of the structure,
′bb′H
Index for changes concerning the use of the data elements defined for the structure given by the high byte.
2.30. CardVehicleRecord
Information, stored in a driver or workshop card, related to a period of use of a vehicle during a calendar day (requirements 197 and 217).
CardVehicleRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
vehicleOdometerBegin
OdometerShort,
vehicleOdometerEnd
OdometerShort,
vehicleFirstUse
TimeReal,
vehicleLastUse
TimeReal,
vehicleRegistration
VehicleRegistrationIdentification,
vuDataBlockCounter
VuDataBlockCounter
}
vehicleOdometerBegin is the vehicle odometer value at the beginning of the period of use of the vehicle.
vehicleOdometerEnd is the vehicle odometer value at the end of the period of use of the vehicle.
vehicleFirstUse is the date and time of the beginning of the period of use of the vehicle.
vehicleLastUse is the date and time of the end of the period of use of the vehicle.
vehicleRegistration is the VRN and the registering Member State of the vehicle.
vuDataBlockCounter is the value of the VuDataBlockCounter at last extraction of the period of use of the vehicle.
2.31. CardVehiclesUsed
Information, stored in a driver or workshop card, related to the vehicles used by the card holder (requirements 197 and 217).
CardVehiclesUsed := SEQUENCE {
vehiclePointerNewestRecord
INTEGER(0..NoOfCardVehicleRecords-1),
cardVehicleRecords
SIZE(NoOfCardVehicleRecords) OF CardVehicleRecord
}
vehiclePointerNewestRecord is the index of the last updated vehicle record.
Value assignment: Number corresponding to the numerator of the vehicle record, beginning with ′0′ for the first occurrence of the vehicle records in the structure.
cardVehicleRecords is the set of records containing information on vehicles used.
2.32. Certificate
The certificate of a public key issued by a Certification Authority.
Certificate ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(194))
Value assignment: digital signature with partial recovery of a CertificateContent according to Appendix 11 “common security mechanisms“: Signature (128 bytes) || Public Key remainder (58 Byte) || Certification Authority Reference (8 bytes).
2.33. CertificateContent
The (clear) content of the certificate of a public key according to Appendix 11 common security mechanisms.
CertificateContent ::= SEQUENCE {
certificateProfileIdentifier
INTEGER(0..255),
certificationAuthorityReference
KeyIdentifier,
certificateHolderAuthorisation
CertificateHolderAuthorisation,
certificateEndOfValidity
TimeReal,
certificateHolderReference
KeyIdentifier,
publicKey
PublicKey
}
certificateProfileIdentifier is the version of the corresponding certificate.
Value assignment:: ′01h′ for this version.
CertificationAuthorityReference identifies the Certification Authority issuing the certificate. It also references the Public Key of this Certification Authority.
certificateHolderAuthorisation identifies the rights of the certificate holder.
certificateEndOfValidity is the date when the certificate expires administratively.
certificateHolderReference identifies the certificate holder. It also references his Public Key.
publicKey is the public key that is certified by this certificate.
2.34. CertificateHolderAuthorisation
Identification of the rights of a certificate holder.
CertificateHolderAuthorisation ::= SEQUENCE {
tachographApplicationID
OCTET STRING(SIZE(6))
equipmentType
EquipmentType
}
tachographApplicationID is the application identifier for the tachograph application.
Value assignment: ′FFh′ ′54h′ ′41h′ ′43h′ ′48h′ ′4Fh′. This AID is a proprietary non-registered application identifier in accordance with ISO/IEC 7816-5.
equipmentType is the identification of the type of equipment to which the certificate is intended.
Value assignment: in accordance with EquipmentType data type. 0 if certificate is the one of a Member State.
2.35. CertificateRequestID
Unique identification of a certificate request. It can also be used as a Vehicle Unit Public Key Identifier if the serial number of the vehicle Unit to which the key is intended is not known at certificate generation time.
CertificateRequestID ::= SEQUENCE {
requestSerialNumber
INTEGER(0..232-1)
requestMonthYear
BCDString(SIZE(2))
crIdentifier
OCTET STRING(SIZE(1))
manufacturerCode
ManufacturerCode
}
requestSerialNumber is a serial number for the certificate request, unique for the manufacturer and the month below.
requestMonthYear is the identification of the month and the year of the certificate request.
Value assignment: BCD coding of month (two digits) and year (two last digits).
crIdentifier: is an identifier to distinguish a certificate request from an extended serial number.
Value assignment: ′FFh′.
manufacturerCode: is the numerical code of the manufacturer requesting the certificate.
2.36. CertificationAuthorityKID
Identifier of the Public Key of a Certification Authority (a Member State or the European Certification Authority).
CertificationAuthorityKID ::= SEQUENCE {
nationNumeric
NationNumeric
nationAlpha
NationAlpha
keySerialNumber
NTEGER(0..255)
additionalInfo
OCTET STRING(SIZE(2))
caIdentifier
OCTET STRING(SIZE(1))
}
nationNumeric is the numerical nation code of the Certification Authority.
nationAlpha is the alphanumerical nation code of the Certification Authority.
keySerialNumber is a serial number to distinguish the different keys of the Certification Authority in the case keys are changed.
additionalInfo is a two byte field for additional coding (Certification Authority specific).
caIdentifier is an identifier to distinguish a Certification Authority Key Identifier from other Key Identifiers.
Value assignment: ′01h′.
2.37. CompanyActivityData
Information, stored in a company card, related to activities performed with the card (requirement 237).
CompanyActivityData ::= SEQUENCE {
companyPointerNewestRecord
INTEGER(0..NoOfCompanyActivityRecords-1),
companyActivityRecords
SET SIZE(NoOfCompanyActivityRecords) OF
companyActivityRecord
SEQUENCE {
companyActivityType
CompanyActivityType,
companyActivityTime
TimeReal,
cardNumberInformation
FullCardNumber,
vehicleRegistrationInformation
VehicleRegistrationIdentification,
downloadPeriodBegin
TimeReal,
downloadPeriodEnd
TimeReal,
}
}
companyPointerNewestRecord is the index of the last updated companyActivityRecord.
Value assignment: Number corresponding to the numerator of the company activity record, beginning with ′0′ for the first occurrence of the company activity record in the structure.
companyActivityRecords is the set of all company activity records.
companyActivityRecord is the sequence of information related to one company activity.
companyActivityType is the type of the company activity.
companyActivityTime is the date and time of the company activity.
cardNumberInformation is the card number and the card issuing Member State of the card downloaded, if any.
vehicleRegistrationInformation is the VRN and registering Member State of the vehicle downloaded or locked in or out.
downloadPeriodBegin and downloadPeriodEnd is the period downloaded from the VU, if any.
2.38. CompanyActivityType
Code indicating an activity carried out by a company using its company card.
CompanyActivityType ::= INTEGER {
card downloading (1),
(1),
VU downloading (2),
(2),
VU lock-in (3),
(3),
VU lock-out (4).
(4)
}
2.39. CompanyCardApplicationIdentification
Information, stored in a company card related to the identification of the application of the card (requirement 190).
CompanyCardApplicationIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
typeOfTachographCardId
EquipmentType,
cardStructureVersion
CardStructureVersion,
noOfCompanyActivityRecords
NoOfCompanyActivityRecords
}
typeOfTachographCardId is specifying the implemented type of card.
cardStructureVersion is specifying the version of the structure that is implemented in the card.
noOfCompanyActivityRecords is the number of company activity records the card can store.
2.40. CompanyCardHolderIdentification
Information, stored in a company card, related to the cardholder identification (requirement 236).
CompanyCardHolderIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
companyName
Name
companyAddress
Address,
cardHolderPreferredLanguage
Language
}
companyName is the name of the holder company.
companyAddress is the address of the holder company.
cardHolderPreferredLanguage is the preferred language of the card holder.
2.41. ControlCardApplicationIdentification
Information, stored in a control card related to the identification of the application of the card (requirement 190).
ControlCardApplicationIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
typeOfTachographCardId
EquipmentType,
cardStructureVersion
CardStructureVersion,
noOfControlActivityRecords
NoOfControlActivityRecords
}
typeOfTachographCardId is specifying the implemented type of card.
cardStructureVersion is specifying the version of the structure that is implemented in the card.
noOfControlActivityRecords is the number of control activity records the card can store.
2.42. ControlCardControlActivityData
Information, stored in a control card, related to control activity performed with the card (requirement 233).
ControlCardControlActivityData ::= SEQUENCE {
controlPointerNewestRecord
INTEGER(0..NoOfControlActivityRecords-1),
controlActivityRecords
SET SIZE(NoOfControlActivityRecords) OF
controlActivityRecord
SEQUENCE {
controlType
ControlType,
controlTime
TimeReal,
controlledCardNumber
FullCardNumber,
controlledVehicleRegistration
VehicleRegistrationIdentification,
controlDownloadPeriodBegin
TimeReal,
controlDownloadPeriodEnd
TimeReal,
}
}
controlPointerNewestRecord is the index of the last updated control activity record.
Value assignment: Number corresponding to the numerator of the control activity record, beginning with ′0′ for the first occurrence of the control activity record in the structure.
controlActivityRecords is the set of all control activity records.
controlActivityRecord is the sequence of information related to one control.
controlType is the type of the control.
controlTime is the date and time of the control.
controlledCardNumber is the card number and the card issuing Member State of the card controlled.
controlledVehicleRegistration is the VRN and registering Member State of the vehicle in which the control happened.
controlDownloadPeriodBegin and controlDownloadPeriodEnd is the period eventually downloaded.
2.43. ControlCardHolderIdentification
Information, stored in a control card, related to the identification of the cardholder (requirement 232).
ControlCardHolderIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
controlBodyName
Name,
controlBodyAddress
Address,
cardHolderName
HolderName,
cardHolderPreferredLanguage
Language
}
controlBodyName is the name of the control body of the card holder.
controlBodyAddress is the address of the control body of the card holder.
cardHolderName is the name and first name(s) of the holder of the Control Card.
cardHolderPreferredLanguage is the preferred language of the card holder.
2.44. ControlType
Code indicating the activities carried out during a control. This data type is related to requirements 102, 210 and 225.
ControlType ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(1))
Value assignment — Octet aligned: ′cvpdxxxx′B (8 bits)
′c′B
card downloading:
′0′B: card not downloaded during this control activity,
′1′B: card downloaded during this control activity
′v′B
VU downloading:
′0′B: VU not downloaded during this control activity,
′1′B: VU downloaded during this control activity
′p′B
printing:
′0′B: no printing done during this control activity,
′1′B: printing done during this control activity
′d′B
display:
′0′B: no display used during this control activity,
′1′B: display used during this control activity
′xxxx′B
Not used.
2.45. CurrentDateTime
The current date and time of the recording equipment.
CurrentDateTime ::= TimeReal
Value assignment: not further specified.
2.46. DailyPresenceCounter
Counter, stored in a driver or workshop card, increased by one for each calendar day the card has been inserted in a VU. This data type is related to requirements 199 and 219.
DailyPresenceCounter ::= BCDString(SIZE(2))
Value assignment: Consecutive number with maximum value = 9 999, starting again with 0. At the time of first issuing of the card the number is set to 0.
2.47. Datef
Date expressed in a readily printable numeric format.
Datef ::= SEQUENCE {
année
BCDString(SIZE(2)),
mois
BCDString(SIZE(1)),
jour
BCDString(SIZE(1)),
}
Value assignment:
yyyy
Year
mm
Month
dd
Day
′00000000′H denotes explicitly no date.
2.48. Distance
A distance travelled (result of the calculation of the difference between two vehicle's odometer value in kilometres).
Distance ::= INTEGER(0..216-1)
Value assignment: Unsigned binary. Value in km in the operational range 0 to 9 999 km.
2.49. DriverCardApplicationIdentification
Information, stored in a driver card related to the identification of the application of the card (requirement 190).
DriverCardApplicationIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
typeOfTachographCardId
EquipmentType,
cardStructureVersion
CardStructureVersion,
noOfEventsPerType
NoOfEventsPerType,
noOfFaultsPerType
NoOfFaultsPerType,
activityStructureLength
CardActivityLengthRange,
noOfCardVehicleRecords
NoOfCardVehicleRecords,
noOfCardPlaceRecords
NoOfCardPlaceRecords
}
typeOfTachographCardId is specifying the implemented type of card.
cardStructureVersion is specifying the version of the structure that is implemented in the card.
noOfEventsPerType is the number of events per type of event the card can record.
noOfFaultsPerType is the number of faults per type of fault the card can record.
activityStructureLength indicates the number of bytes available for storing activity records.
noOfCardVehicleRecords is the number of vehicle records the card can contain.
noOfCardPlaceRecords is the number of places the card can record.
2.50. DriverCardHolderIdentification
Information, stored in a driver card, related to the identification of the cardholder (requirement 195).
DriverCardHolderIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
cardHolderName
HolderName,
cardHolderBirthDate
Datef,
cardHolderPreferredLanguage
Language
}
cardHolderName is the name and first name(s) of the holder of the Driver Card.
cardHolderBirthDate is the date of birth of the holder of the Driver Card.
cardHolderPreferredLanguage is the preferred language of the card holder.
2.51. EntryTypeDailyWorkPeriod
Code to distinguish between begin and end for an entry of a daily work period place and condition of the entry.
EntryTypeDailyWorkPeriod ::= INTEGER
Begin,
related time = card insertion time or time of entry
(0),
End,
related time = card withdrawal time or time of entry
(1),
Begin,
related time manually entered (start time)
(2),
End,
related time manually entered (end of work period)
(3),
Begin,
related time assumed by VU
(4),
End,
related time assumed by VU
(5)
}
Value assignment: according to ISO/IEC8824-1.
2.52. EquipmentType
Code to distinguish different types of equipment for the tachograph application.
EquipmentType ::=INTEGER(0..255)
- - Reserved
(0),
- - Driver Card
(1),
- - Workshop Card
(2),
- - Control Card
(3),
- - Company Card
(4),
- - Manufacturing Card
(5),
- - Vehicle Unit
(6),
- - Motion Sensor
(7),
- - RFU
(8..255)
Value assignment: According to ISO/IEC 8824-1.
Value 0 is reserved for the purpose of designating a Member State or Europe in the CHA field of certificates.
2.53. EuropeanPublicKey
The European public key.
EuropeanPublicKey ::= PublicKey.
2.54. EventFaultType
Code qualifying an event or a fault.
EventFaultType ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(1)).
Value assignment:
′0x′H
General events,
′00′H
No further details,
′01′H
Insertion of a non-valid card,
′02′H
Card conflict,
′03′H
Time overlap,
′04′H
Driving without an appropriate card,
′05′H
Card insertion while driving,
′06′H
Last card session not correctly closed,
′07′H
Over speeding,
′08′H
Power supply interruption,
′09′H
Motion data error,
′0A′H to ′0F′H
RFU,
′1x′H
Vehicle unit related security breach attempt events,
′10′H
No further details,
′11′H
Motion sensor authentication failure,
′12′H
Tachograph card authentication failure,
′13′H
Unauthorised change of motion sensor,
′14′H
Card data input integrity error
′15′H
Stored user data integrity error,
′16′H
Internal data transfer error,
′17′H
Unauthorised case opening,
′18′H
Hardware sabotage,
′19′H to ′1F′H
RFU,
′2x′H
Sensor related security breach attempt events,
′20′H
No further details,
′21′H
Authentication failure,
′22′H
Stored data integrity error,
′23′H
Internal data transfer error,
′24′H
Unauthorised case opening,
′25′H
Hardware sabotage,
′26′H to ′2F′H
RFU,
′3x′H
Recording equipment faults,
′30′H
No further details,
′31′H
VU internal fault,
′32′H
Printer fault,
′33′H
Display fault,
′34′H
Downloading fault,
′35′H
Sensor fault,
′36′H to ′3F′H
RFU
′4x′H
Card faults,
′40′H
No further details,
′41′H to ′4F′H
RFU
′50′H to ′7F′H
RFU,
′80′H to ′FF′H
Manufacturer specific.
2.55. EventFaultRecordPurpose
Code explaining why an event or a fault has been recorded.
EventFaultRecordPurpose ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(1)).
Value assignment:
′00′H
one of the 10 most recent (or last) events or faults
′01′H
the longest event for one of the last 10 days of occurrence
′02′H
one of the 5 longest events over the last 365 days
′03′H
the last event for one of the last 10 days of occurrence
′04′H
the most serious event for one of the last 10 days of occurrence
′05′H
one of the 5 most serious events over the last 365 days
′06′H
the first event or fault having occurred after the last calibration
′07′H
an active/on-going event or fault
′08′H to ′7F′H
RFU
′80′H to ′FF′H
manufacturer specific.
2.56. ExtendedSerialNumber
Unique identification of an equipment. It can also be used as an equipment Public Key Identifier.
ExtendedSerialNumber ::= SEQUENCE {
serialNumber INTEGER(0..232-1)
monthYear BCDString(SIZE(2))
type OCTET STRING(SIZE(1))
manufacturerCode ManufacturerCode
}
ExtendedSerialNumber ::= SÉQUENCE {
serialNumber
ENTIER(0..232-1)
monthYear
BCDString[LONGUEUR(2)]
type
OCTET STRING(SIZE(1)
manufacturerCode
ManufacturerCode
}
serialNumber is a serial number for the equipment, unique for the manufacturer, the equipment's type and the month below.
monthYear is the identification of the month and the year of manufacturing (or of serial number assignment).
Value assignment: BCD coding of Month (two digits) and Year (two last digits).
type is an identifier of the type of equipment.
Value assignment: manufacturer specific, with FFh' reserved value.
manufacturerCode: is the numerical code of the manufacturer of the equipment.
2.57. FullCardNumber
Code fully identifying a tachograph card.
FullCardNumber ::= SEQUENCE {
cardType
EquipmentType,
cardIssuingMemberState
NationNumeric,
cardNumber
CardNumber
}
cardType is the type of the tachograph card.
cardIssuingMemberState is the code of the Member State having issued the card.
cardNumber is the card number.
2.58. HighResOdometer
Odometer value of the vehicle: Accumulated distance travelled by the vehicle during its operation.
HighResOdometer ::= INTEGER(0..232-1)
Value assignment: Unsigned binary. Value in 1/200 km in the operating range 0 to 21 055 406 km.
2.59. HighResTripDistance
A distance travelled during all or part of a journey.
HighResTripDistance ::= INTEGER(0..232-1)
Value assignment: Unsigned binary. Value in 1/200 km in the operating range 0 to 21 055 406 km.
2.60. HolderName
The surname and first name(s) of a card holder.
HolderName ::= SEQUENCE {
holderSurname
Name,
holderFirstNames
Name,
}
holderSurname is the surname (family name) of the holder. This surname does not include titles.
Value assignment: When a card is not personal, holderSurname contains the same information as companyName or workshopName or controlBodyName.
holderFirstNames is the first name(s) and initials of the holder.
2.61. K-ConstantOfRecordingEquipment
Constant of the recording equipment (definition m)).
K-ConstantOfRecordingEquipment ::= INTEGER(0..216-1)
Value assignment: Pulses per kilometre in the operating range 0 to 64 255 pulses/km.
2.62. KeyIdentifier
A unique identifier of a Public Key used to reference and select the key. It also identifies the holder of the key.
KeyIdentifier ::= CHOICE {
extendedSerialNumber
ExtendedSerialNumber,
certificateRequestID
CertificateRequestID,
certificationAuthorityKID
CertificationAuthorityKID
}
The first choice is suitable to reference the public key of a Vehicle Unit or of a tachograph card.
The second choice is suitable to reference the public key of a Vehicle Unit (in the case the serial number of the Vehicle Unit cannot be known at certificate generation time).
The third choice is suitable to reference the public key of a Member State.
2.63. L-TyreCircumference
Effective circumference of the wheel tyres (definition u)).
L-TyreCircumference ::= INTEGER(0..216-1)
Value assignment: Unsigned binary, value in 1/8 mm in the operating range 0 to 8 031 mm.
2.64. Language
Code identifying a language.
Language ::= IA5String(SIZE(2))
Value assignment: Two-letter lower-case coding according to ISO 639.
2.65. LastCardDownload
Date and time, stored on a driver card, of last card download (for other purposes than control). This date is updateable by a VU or any card reader.
LastCardDownload ::= TimeReal
Value assignment: not further specified.
2.66. ManualInputFlag
Code identifying whether a cardholder has manually entered driver activities at card insertion or not (requirement 081).
ManualInputFlag ::= INTEGER {
noEntry
(0)
manualEntries
(1)
}
Value assignment: not further specified.
2.67. ManufacturerCode
Code identifying a manufacturer.
ManufacturerCode ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment:
′00′H
No information available
′01′H
Reserved value
′02′H .. ′0F′H
Reserved for Future Use
′10′H
ACTIA
′11′H .. ′17′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′A′
′18′H .. ′1F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′B′
′20′H .. ′27′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′C′
′28′H .. ′2F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′D′
′30′H .. ′37′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′E′
′38′H .. ′3F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′F′
′40′H
Giesecke & Devrient GmbH
′41′H
GEM plus
′42′H .. ′47′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′G′
′48′H .. ′4F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′H′
′50′H .. ′57′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′I′
′58′H .. ′5F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′J′
′60′H .. ′67′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′K′
′68′H .. ′6F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′L′
′70′H .. ′77′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′M′
′78′H .. ′7F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′N′
′80′H
OSCARD
′81′H .. ′87′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′O′
′88′H .. ′8F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′P′
′90′H .. ′97′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′Q′
′98′H .. ′9F′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′R′
′A0′H
SETEC
′A1′H
SIEMENS VDO
′A2′H
STONERIDGE
′A3′H .. ′A7′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′S′
′AA′H
TACHOCONTROL
′AB′H .. ′AF′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′T′
′B0′H .. ′B7′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′U′
′B8′H .. ′BF′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′V′
′C0′H .. ′C7′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with W′
′C8′H .. ′CF′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′X′
′D0′H .. ′D7′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′Y′
′D8′H .. ′DF′H
Reserved for manufacturers which name begins with ′Z′
2.68. MemberStateCertificate
The certificate of the public key of a Member State issued by the European certification authority.
MemberStateCertificate ::= Certificate
2.69. MemberStatePublicKey
The public key of a Member State.
MemberStatePublicKey ::= PublicKey.
2.70. Name
A name.
Name ::= SEQUENCE {
codePage
INTEGER (0..255),
name
OCTET STRING (SIZE(35))
}
codePage specifies the part of the ISO/IEC 8859 used to code the name,
name is a name coded in accordance with ISO/IEC 8859-codePage.
2.71. NationAlpha
Alphabetic reference to a country, in accordance with the conventional coding of countries on car bumper stickers, and/or as used on internationally harmonised vehicle insurance papers (green card).
NationAlpha ::= IA5String(SIZE(3))
Value assignment:
′ ′
No information available
′A′
Austria
′AL′
Albania
′AND′
Andorra
′ARM′
Armenia
′AZ′
Azerbaijan
′B′
Belgium
′BG′
Bulgaria
′BIH′
Bosnia and Herzegovina
′BY′
Belarus
′CH′
Switzerland
′CY′
Cyprus
′CZ′
Czech Republic
′D′
Germany
′DK′
Denmark
′E′
Spain
′EST′
Estonia
′F′
France
′FIN′
Finland
′FL′
Liechtenstein
′FR′
Faeroe Islands
′UK′
United Kingdom, Alderney, Guernsey, Jersey, Isle of Man, Gibraltar
′GE′
Georgia
′GR′
Greece
′H′
Hungary
′HR′
Croatia
′I′
Italy
′IRL′
Ireland
′IS′
Iceland
′KZ′
Kazakhstan
′L′
Luxembourg
′LT′
Lithuania
′LV′
Latvia
′M′
Malta
′MC′
Monaco
′MD′
Republic of Moldova
′MK′
Macedonia
′N′
Norway
′NL′
The Netherlands
′P′
Portugal
′PL′
Poland
′RO′
Romania
′RSM′
San Marino
′RUS′
Russian Federation
′S′
Sweden
′SK′
Slovakia
′SLO′
Slovenia
′TM′
Turkmenistan
′TR′
Turkey
′UA′
Ukraine
′V′
Vatican City
′YU′
Yugoslavia
′UNK′
Unknown
′EC′
European Community
′EUR′
Rest of Europe
′WLD′
Rest of the world.
2.72. NationNumeric
Numerical reference to a country.
NationNumeric ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment:
- -
No information available
(00)H,
- -
No information available
(00)H,
- -
Austria
(01)H,
- -
Albania
(02)H,
- -
Andorra
(03)H,
- -
Armenia
(04)H,
- -
Azerbaijan
(05)H,
- -
Belgium
(06)H,
- -
Bulgaria
(07)H,
- -
Bosnia and Herzegovina
(08)H,
- -
Belarus
(09)H,
- -
Switzerland
(0A)H,
- -
Cyprus
(0B)H,
- -
Czech Republic
(0C)H,
- -
Germany
(0D)H,
- -
Denmark
(0E)H,
- -
Spain
(0F)H,
- -
Estonia
(10)H,
- -
France
(11)H,
- -
Finland
(12)H,
- -
Liechtenstein
(13)H,
- -
Faeroe Islands
(14)H,
- -
United Kingdom
(15)H,
- -
Georgia
(16)H,
- -
Greece
(17)H,
- -
Hungary
(18)H,
- -
Croatia
(19)H,
- -
Italy
(1A)H,
- -
Ireland
(1B)H,
- -
Iceland
(1C)H,
- -
Kazakhstan
(1D)H,
- -
Luxembourg
(1E)H,
- -
Lithuania
(1F)H,
- -
Latvia
(20)H,
- -
Malta
(21)H,
- -
Monaco
(22)H,
- -
Republic of Moldova
(23)H,
- -
Macedonia
(24)H,
- -
Norway
(25)H,
- -
Netherlands
(26)H,
- -
Portugal
(27)H,
- -
Poland
(28)H,
- -
Romania
(29)H,
- -
San Marino
(2A)H,
- -
Russian Federation
(2B)H,
- -
Sweden
(2C)H,
- -
Slovakia
(2D)H,
- -
Slovenia
(2E)H,
- -
Turkmenistan
(2F)H,
- -
Turkey
(30)H,
- -
Ukraine
(31)H,
- -
Vatican City
(32)H,
- -
Yugoslavia
(33)H,
- -
RFU
(34..FC)H,
- -
European Community
(FD)H,
- -
Rest of Europe
(FE)H,
- -
Rest of the world
(FF)H
2.73. NoOfCalibrationRecords
Number of calibration records, a workshop card can store.
NoOfCalibrationRecords ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment: see paragraph 3.
2.74. NoOfCalibrationsSinceDownload
Counter indicating the number of calibrations performed with a workshop card since its last download (requirement 230).
NoOfCalibrationsSinceDownload ::= INTEGER(0..216-1),
Value assignment: Not specified further.
2.75. NoOfCardPlaceRecords
Number of place records a driver or workshop card can store.
NoOfCardPlaceRecords ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment: see paragraph 3.
2.76. NoOfCardVehicleRecords
Number of vehicles used records a driver or workshop card can store.
NoOfCardVehicleRecords ::= INTEGER(0..216-1)
Value assignment: see paragraph 3.
2.77. NoOfCompanyActivityRecords
Number of company activity records, a company card can store.
NoOfCompanyActivityRecords ::= INTEGER(0..216-1)
Value assignment: see paragraph 3.
2.78. NoOfControlActivityRecords
Number of control activity records, a control card can store.
NoOfControlActivityRecords ::= INTEGER(0..216-1)
Value assignment: see paragraph 3.
2.79. NoOfEventsPerType
Number of events per type of event a card can store.
NoOfEventsPerType ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment: see paragraph 3.
2.80. NoOfFaultsPerType
Number of faults per type of fault a card can store.
NoOfFaultsPerType ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment: see paragraph 3.
2.81. OdometerValueMidnight
The vehicle's odometer value at midnight on a given day (requirement 090).
OdometerValueMidnight ::= OdometerShort
Value assignment: not further specified.
2.82. OdometerShort
Odometer value of the vehicle in a short form.
OdometerShort ::= INTEGER(0..224-1)
Value assignment: Unsigned binary. Value in km in the operating range 0 to 9 999 999 km.
2.83. OverspeedNumber
Number of over speeding events since the last over speeding control.
OverspeedNumber ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment: 0 means that no over speeding event has occurred since the last over speeding control, 1 means that one over speeding event has occurred since the last over speeding control 255 means that 255 or more over speeding events have occurred since the last over speeding control.
2.84. PlaceRecord
Information related to a place where a daily work period begins or ends (requirements 087, 202, 221).
PlaceRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
entryTime
TimeReal,
entryTypeDailyWorkPeriod
EntryTypeDailyWorkPeriod,
dailyWorkPeriodCountry
NationNumeric,
dailyWorkPeriodRegion
RegionNumeric,
vehicleOdometerValue
OdometerShort
}
entryTime is a date and time related to the entry.
entryTypeDailyWorkPeriod is the type of entry.
dailyWorkPeriodCountry is the country entered.
dailyWorkPeriodRegion is the region entered.
vehicleOdometerValue is the odometer value at the time of place entry.
2.85. PreviousVehicleInfo
Information related to the vehicle previously used by a driver when inserting his card in a vehicle unit (requirement 081).
PreviousVehicleInfo ::= SEQUENCE {
vehicleRegistrationIdentification
VehicleRegistrationIdentification,
cardWithdrawalTime
TimeReal
}
vehicleRegistrationIdentification is the VRN and the registering Member State of the vehicle.
cardWithdrawalTime is the card withdrawal date and time.
2.86. PublicKey
A public RSA key.
PublicKey ::= SEQUENCE {
rsaKeyModulus
RSAKeyModulus,
rsaKeyPublicExponent
RSAKeyPublicExponent
}
rsaKeyModulus is the Modulus of the key pair.
rsaKeyPublicExponent is the public exponent of the key pair.
2.87. RegionAlpha
Alphabetic reference to a region within a specified country.
RegionAlpha ::= IA5STRING(SIZE(3))
Value assignment:
′ ′
No information available
Spain:
′AN′
Andalucía
′AR′
Aragón
′AST′
Asturias
′C′
Cantabria
′CAT′
Cataluña
′CL′
Castilla-León
′CM′
Castilla-La-Mancha
′CV′
Valencia
′EXT′
Extremadura
′G′
Galicia
′IB′
Baleares
′IC′
Canarias
′LR′
La Rioja
′M′
Madrid
′MU′
Murcia
′NA′
Navarra
′PV′
País Vasco.
2.88. RegionNumeric
Numerical reference to a region within a specified country.
RegionNumeric ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(1))
Value assignment:
′00′H
No information available
Spain:
′01′H
Andalucía
′02′H
Aragón
′03′H
Asturias
′04′H
Cantabria
′05′H
Cataluña
′06′H
Castilla-León
′07′H
Castilla-La-Mancha
′08′H
Valencia
′09′H
Extremadura
′0A′H
Galicia
′0B′H
Baleares
′0C′H
Canarias
′0D′H
La Rioja
′0E′H
Madrid
′0F′H
Murcia
′10′H
Navarra
′11′H
País Vasco.
2.89. RSAKeyModulus
The modulus of a RSA key pair.
RSAKeyModulus ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(128))
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.90. RSAKeyPrivateExponent
The private exponent of a RSA key pair.
RSAKeyPrivateExponent ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(128))
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.91. RSAKeyPublicExponent
The public exponent of a RSA key pair.
RSAKeyPublicExponent ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(8))
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.92. SensorApprovalNumber
Type approval number of the sensor.
SensorApprovalNumber ::= IA5String(SIZE(8))
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.93. SensorIdentification
Information, stored in a motion sensor, related to the identification of the motion sensor (requirement 077).
SensorIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
sensorSerialNumber
SensorSerialNumber,
sensorApprovalNumber
SensorApprovalNumber,
sensorSCIdentifier
SensorSCIdentifier,
sensorOSIdentifier
SensorOSIdentifier
}
sensorSerialNumber is the extended serial number of the motion sensor (includes part number and manufacturer code).
sensorApprovalNumber is the approval number of the motion sensor.
sensorSCIdentifier is the identifier of the security component of the motion sensor.
sensorOSIdentifier is the identifier of the operating system of the motion sensor.
2.94. SensorInstallation
Information, stored in a motion sensor, related to the installation of the motion sensor (requirement 099).
SensorInstallation ::= SEQUENCE {
sensorPairingDateFirst
SensorPairingDate,
firstVuApprovalNumber
VuApprovalNumber,
firstVuSerialNumber
VuSerialNumber,
sensorPairingDateCurrent
SensorPairingDate,
currentVuApprovalNumber
VuApprovalNumber,
currentVUSerialNumber
VuSerialNumber
}
sensorPairingDateFirst is the date of the first pairing of the motion sensor with a vehicle unit.
firstVuApprovalNumber is the approval number of the first vehicle unit paired with the motion sensor.
firstVuSerialNumber is the serial number of the first vehicle unit paired with the motion sensor.
sensorPairingDateCurrent is the date of the current pairing of the motion sensor with the vehicle unit.
currentVuApprovalNumber is the approval number of the vehicle unit currently paired with the motion sensor.
currentVUSerialNumber is the serial number of the vehicle unit currently paired with the motion sensor.
2.95. SensorInstallationSecData
Information, stored in a workshop card, related to the security data needed for pairing motion sensors to vehicle units (requirement 214).
SensorInstallationSecData ::= TDesSessionKey
Value assignment: in accordance with ISO 16844-3.
2.96. SensorOSIdentifier
Identifier of the operating system of the motion sensor.
SensorOSIdentifier ::= IA5String(SIZE(2))
Value assignment: manufacturer specific.
2.97. SensorPaired
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to the identification of the motion sensor paired with the vehicle unit (requirement 079).
SensorPaired ::= SEQUENCE {
sensorSerialNumber
SensorSerialNumber,
sensorApprovalNumber
SensorApprovalNumber,
sensorPairingDateFirst
SensorPairingDate
}
sensorSerialNumber is the serial number of the motion sensor currently paired with the vehicle unit.
sensorApprovalNumber is the approval number of the motion sensor currently paired with the vehicle unit.
sensorPairingDateFirst is the date of the first pairing with a vehicle unit of the motion sensor currently paired with the vehicle unit.
2.98. SensorPairingDate
Date of a pairing of the motion sensor with a vehicle unit.
SensorPairingDate ::= TimeReal
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.99. SensorSerialNumber
Serial number of the motion sensor.
SensorSerialNumber ::= ExtendedSerialNumber:
2.100. SensorSCIdentifier
Identifier of the security component of the motion sensor.
SensorSCIdentifier ::= IA5String(SIZE(8))
Value assignment: component manufacturer specific.
2.101. Signature
A digital signature.
Signature ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(128))
Value assignment: in accordance with Appendix 11, “Common security mechanisms“.
2.102. SimilarEventsNumber
The number of similar events for one given day (requirement 094).
SimilarEventsNumber ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment: 0 is not used, 1 means that only one event of that type have occurred and have been stored on that day, 2 means that 2 events of that type have occurred on that day (one only has been stored), 255 means that 255 or more events of that type have occurred on that day.
2.103. SpecificConditionType
Code identifying a specific condition (requirements 050b, 105a, 212a and 230a).
SpecificConditionType ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment:
′00′H
RFU
′01′H
Out of scope — Begin
′02′H
Out of scope — End
′03′H
Ferry/Train crossing
′04′H .. ′FF′H
RFU.
2.104. SpecificConditionRecord
Information, stored in a driver card, a workshop card or a vehicle unit, related to a specific condition (requirements 105a, 212a and 230a).
SpecificConditionRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
entryTime
TimeReal,
specificConditionType
SpecificConditionType
}
entryTime is the date and time of the entry.
specificConditionType is the code identifying the specific condition.
2.105. Speed
Speed of the vehicle (km/h).
Speed ::= INTEGER(0..255)
Value assignment: kilometre per hour in the operational range 0 to 220 km/h.
2.106. SpeedAuthorised
Maximum authorised Speed of the vehicle (definition bb)).
SpeedAuthorised ::= Speed.
2.107. SpeedAverage
Average speed in a previously defined duration (km/h).
SpeedAverage ::= Speed.
2.108. SpeedMax
Maximum speed measured in a previously defined duration.
SpeedMax ::= Speed.
2.109. TDesSessionKey
A triple DES session key.
TDesSessionKey ::= SEQUENCE {
tDesKeyA
OCTET STRING (SIZE(8))
tDesKeyB
OCTET STRING (SIZE(8))
}
Value assignment: not further specified.
2.110. TimeReal
Code for a combined date and time field, where the date and time are expressed as seconds past 00h.00m.00s. on 1 January 1970 GMT.
TimeReal{INTEGER:TimeRealRange} ::= INTEGER(0..TimeRealRange)
Value assignment — Octet Aligned: Number of seconds since midnight 1 January 1970 GMT.
The max possible date/time is in the year 2106.
2.111. TyreSize
Designation of tyre dimensions.
TyreSize ::= IA5String(SIZE(15))
Value assignment: in accordance with Directive 92/23 (EEC) 31.3.1992, OJ L 129, p. 95.
2.112. VehicleIdentificationNumber
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) referring to the vehicle as a whole, normally chassis serial number or frame number.
VehicleIdentificationNumber ::= IA5String(SIZE(17))
Value assignment: As defined in ISO 3779.
2.113. VehicleRegistrationIdentification
Identification of a vehicle, unique for Europe (VRN and Member State).
VehicleRegistrationIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
vehicleRegistrationNation
NationNumeric,
vehicleRegistrationNumber
ehicleRegistrationNumber
}
vehicleRegistrationNation is the nation where the vehicle is registered.
vehicleRegistrationNumber is the registration number of the vehicle (VRN).
2.114. VehicleRegistrationNumber
Registration number of the vehicle (VRN). The registration number is assigned by the vehicle licensing authority.
VehicleRegistrationNumber ::= SEQUENCE {
codePage
INTEGER (0..255),
vehicleRegNumber
OCTET STRING (SIZE(13))
}
codePage specifies the part of the ISO/IEC 8859 used to code the vehicleRegNumber,
vehicleRegNumber is a VRN coded in accordance with ISO/IEC 8859-codePage.
Value assignment: Country specific.
2.115. VuActivityDailyData
Information, stored in a VU, related to changes of activity and/or changes of driving status and/or changes of card status for a given calendar day (requirement 084) and to slots status at 00.00 that day.
VuActivityDailyData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfActivityChanges
NTEGER SIZE(0..1440),
activityChangeInfos
SET SIZE(noOfActivityChanges) OF ActivityChangeInfo
}
noOfActivityChanges is the number of ActivityChangeInfo words in the activityChangeInfos set.
activityChangeInfos is the set of ActivityChangeInfo words stored in the VU for the day. It always includes two ActivityChangeInfo words giving the status of the two slots at 00.00 that day.
2.116. VuApprovalNumber
Type approval number of the vehicle unit.
VuApprovalNumber ::= IA5String(SIZE(8))
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.117. VuCalibrationData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to the calibrations of the recording equipment (requirement 098).
VuCalibrationData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfVuCalibrationRecords
INTEGER(0..255),
vuCalibrationRecords
SET SIZE(noOfVuCalibrationRecords) OF VuCalibrationRecord
}
noOfVuCalibrationRecords is the number of records contained in the vuCalibrationRecords set.
vuCalibrationRecords is the set of calibration records.
2.118. VuCalibrationRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related a calibration of the recording equipment (requirement 098).
VuCalibrationRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
calibrationPurpose
CalibrationPurpose,
workshopName
Name,
workshopAddress
Address,
workshopCardNumber
FullCardNumber,
workshopCardExpiryDate
TimeReal,
vehicleIdentificationNumber
VehicleIdentificationNumber,
vehicleRegistrationIdentification
VehicleRegistrationIdentification,
wVehicleCharacteristicConstant
W-VehicleCharacteristicConstant,
kConstantOfRecordingEquipment
K-ConstantOfRecordingEquipment,
lTyreCircumference
L-TyreCircumference,
tyreSize
TyreSize,
authorisedSpeed
SpeedAuthorised,
oldOdometerValue
OdometerShort,
newOdometerValue
OdometerShort,
oldTimeValue
Temps réel
newTimeValue
TimeReal,
nextCalibrationDate
TimeReal,
}
calibrationPurpose is the purpose of the calibration.
workshopName, workshopAddress are the workshop name and address.
workshopCardNumber identifies the workshop card used during the calibration.
workshopCardExpiryDate is the card expiry date.
vehicleIdentificationNumber is the VIN.
vehicleRegistrationIdentification contains the VRN and registering Member State.
wVehicleCharacteristicConstant is the characteristic coefficient of the vehicle.
kConstantOfRecordingEquipment is the constant of the recording equipment.
lTyreCircumference is the effective circumference of the wheel tyres.
tyreSize is the designation of the dimension of the tyres mounted on the vehicle.
authorisedSpeed is the authorised speed of the vehicle.
oldOdometerValue, newOdometerValue are the old and new values of the odometer.
oldTimeValue, newTimeValue are the old and new values of date and time.
nextCalibrationDate is the date of the next calibration of the type specified in CalibrationPurpose to be carried out by the authorised inspection authority.
2.119. VuCardIWData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to insertion and withdrawal cycles of driver cards or of workshop cards in the vehicle unit (requirement 081).
VuCardIWData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfIWRecords
INTEGER(0..216-1),
vuCardIWRecords
SET SIZE(noOfIWRecords) OF VuCardIWRecord
}
noOfIWRecords is the number of records in the set vuCardIWRecords.
vuCardIWRecords is a set of records related to card insertion withdrawal cycles.
2.120. VuCardIWRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to an insertion and withdrawal cycle of a driver card or of a workshop card in the vehicle unit (requirement 081).
VuCardIWRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
cardHolderName
HolderName,
fullCardNumber
FullCardNumber,
cardExpiryDate
TimeReal,
cardInsertionTime
TimeReal,
vehicleOdometerValueAtInsertion
OdometerShort,
cardSlotNumber
CardSlotNumber,
cardWithdrawalTime
TimeReal,
vehicleOdometerValueAtWithdrawal
OdometerShort,
previousVehicleInfo
PreviousVehicleInfo
manualInputFlag
ManualInputFlag
}
cardHolderName is the driver or workshop card holder's surname and first names as stored in the card.
fullCardNumber is the type of card, its issuing Member State and its card number as stored in the card.
cardExpiryDate is the card's expiry date as stored in the card.
cardInsertionTime is the insertion date and time.
vehicleOdometerValueAtInsertion is the vehicle odometer value at card insertion.
cardSlotNumber is the slot in which the card is inserted.
cardWithdrawalTime is the withdrawal date and time.
vehicleOdometerValueAtWithdrawal is the vehicle odometer value at card withdrawal.
previousVehicleInfo contains information about the previous vehicle used by the driver, as stored in the card.
manualInputFlag is a flag identifying if the cardholder has manually entered driver activities at card insertion.
2.121. VuCertificate
Certificate of the public key of a vehicle unit.
VuCertificate ::= Certificate
2.122. VuCompanyLocksData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to company locks (requirement 104).
VuCompanyLocksData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfLocks
INTEGER(0..20),
vuCompanyLocksRecords
SET SIZE(noOfLocks) OF VuCompanyLocksRecord
}
noOfLocks is the number of locks listed in vuCompanyLocksRecords.
vuCompanyLocksRecords is the set of company locks records.
2.123. VuCompanyLocksRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to one company lock (requirement 104).
VuCompanyLocksRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
lockInTime
TimeReal,
lockOutTime
TimeReal,
companyName
Name,
companyAddress
Address,
companyCardNumber
FullCardNumber
}
lockInTime, lockOutTime are the date and time of lock-in and lock-out.
companyName, companyAddress are the company name and address related with the lock-in.
companyCardNumber identifies the card used at lock-in.
2.124. VuControlActivityData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to controls performed using this VU (requirement 102).
VuControlActivityData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfControls
INTEGER(0..20),
vuControlActivityRecords
SET SIZE(noOfControls) OF VuControlActivityRecord
}
noOfControls is the number of controls listed in vuControlActivityRecords.
vuControlActivityRecords is the set of control activity records.
2.125. VuControlActivityRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to a control performed using this VU (requirement 102).
VuControlActivityRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
controlType
ControlType,
controlTime
TimeReal,
controlCardNumber
FullCardNumber,
downloadPeriodBeginTime
TimeReal,
downloadPeriodEndTime
TimeReal,
}
controlType is the type of the control.
controlTime is the date and time of the control.
ControlCardNumber identifies the control card used for the control.
downloadPeriodBeginTime is the begin time of the downloaded period, in case of downloading.
downloadPeriodEndTime is the end time of the downloaded period, in case of downloading.
2.126. VuDataBlockCounter
Counter, stored in a card, identifying sequentially the insertion withdrawal cycles of the card in vehicle units.
VuDataBlockCounter ::= BCDString(SIZE(2))
Value assignment: Consecutive Number with max, value 9 999, starting again with 0.
2.127. VuDetailedSpeedBlock
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to the vehicle's detailed speed for a minute during which the vehicle has been moving (requirement 093).
VuDetailedSpeedBlock ::= SEQUENCE {
speedBlockBeginDate
TimeReal,
speedsPerSecond
SEQUENCE SIZE(60) OF Speed
}
speedBlockBeginDate is the date and time of the first speed value within the block.
speedsPerSecond is the chronological sequence of measured speeds every seconds for the minute starting at speedBlockBeginDate (included).
2.128. VuDetailedSpeedData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to the detailed speed of the vehicle.
VuDetailedSpeedData ::= SEQUENCE
noOfSpeedBlocks
NTEGER(0.216-1),
vuDetailedSpeedBlocks
SET SIZE(noOfSpeedBlocks) OF VuDetailedSpeedBlock
}
noOfSpeedBlocks is the number of speed blocks in the vuDetailedSpeedBlocks set.
vuDetailedSpeedBlocks is the set of detailed speed blocks.
2.129. VuDownloadablePeriod
Oldest and latest dates for which a vehicle unit holds data related to drivers activities (requirements 081, 084 or 087).
VuDownloadablePeriod ::= SEQUENCE {
minDownloadableTime
TimeReal
maxDownloadableTime
TimeReal
}
minDownloadableTime is the oldest card insertion or activity change or place entry date and time stored in the VU.
maxDownloadableTime is the latest card withdrawal or activity change or place entry date and time stored in the VU.
2.130. VuDownloadActivityData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to its last download (requirement 105).
VuDownloadActivityData ::= SEQUENCE {
downloadingTime
TimeReal,
fullCardNumber
FullCardNumber,
companyOrWorkshopName
Name
}
downloadingTime is the date and time of downloading.
fullCardNumber identifies the card used to authorise the download.
companyOrWorkshopName is the company or workshop name.
2.131. VuEventData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to events (requirement 094 except over speeding event).
VuEventData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfVuEvents
INTEGER(0..255),
vuEventRecords
SET SIZE(noOfVuEvents) OF VuEventRecord
}
noOfVuEvents is the number of events listed in the vuEventRecords set.
vuEventRecords is a set of events records.
2.132. VuEventRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to an event (requirement 094 except over speeding event).
VuEventRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
eventType
EventFaultType,
eventRecordPurpose
EventFaultRecordPurpose,
eventBeginTime
TimeReal,
eventEndTime
TimeReal,
cardNumberDriverSlotBegin
FullCardNumber,
cardNumberCodriverSlotBegin
FullCardNumber,
cardNumberDriverSlotEnd
FullCardNumber,
cardNumberCodriverSlotEnd
FullCardNumber,
similarEventsNumber
SimilarEventsNumber
}
eventType is the type of the event.
eventRecordPurpose is the purpose for which this event has been recorded.
eventBeginTime is the date and time of beginning of event.
eventEndTime is the date and time of end of event.
cardNumberDriverSlotBegin identifies the card inserted in the driver slot at the beginning of the event.
cardNumberCodriverSlotBegin identifies the card inserted in the co-driver slot at the beginning of the event.
cardNumberDriverSlotEnd identifies the card inserted in the driver slot at the end of the event.
cardNumberCodriverSlotEnd identifies the card inserted in the co-driver slot at the end of the event.
similarEventsNumber is the number of similar events that day.
This sequence can be used for all events other than over speeding events.
2.133. VuFaultData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to faults (requirement 096).
VuFaultData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfVuFaults
INTEGER(0..255),
vuFaultRecords
SET SIZE(noOfVuFaults) OF VuFaultRecord
}
noOfVuFaults is the number of faults listed in the vuFaultRecords set.
vuFaultRecords is a set of faults records.
2.134. VuFaultRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to a fault (requirement 096).
VuFaultRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
faultType
EventFaultType,
faultRecordPurpose
EventFaultRecordPurpose,
faultBeginTime
TimeReal,
faultEndTime
TimeReal,
cardNumberDriverSlotBegin
FullCardNumber,
cardNumberCodriverSlotBegin
FullCardNumber,
cardNumberDriverSlotEnd
FullCardNumber,
cardNumberCodriverSlotEnd
FullCardNumber,
}
faultType is the type of recording equipment fault.
faultRecordPurpose is the purpose for which this fault has been recorded.
faultBeginTime is the date and time of beginning of fault.
faultEndTime is the date and time of end of fault.
cardNumberDriverSlotBegin identifies the card inserted in the driver slot at the beginning of the fault.
cardNumberCodriverSlotBegin identifies the card inserted in the co-driver slot at the beginning of the fault.
cardNumberDriverSlotEnd identifies the card inserted in the driver slot at the end of the fault.
cardNumberCodriverSlotEnd identifies the card inserted in the co-driver slot at the end of the fault.
2.135. VuIdentification
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to the identification of the vehicle unit (requirement 075).
VuIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
vuManufacturerName
VuManufacturerName,
vuManufacturerAddress
VuManufacturerAddress,
vuPartNumber
VuPartNumber,
vuSerialNumber
VuSerialNumber,
vuSoftwareIdentification
VuSoftwareIdentification,
vuManufacturingDate
VuManufacturingDate,
vuApprovalNumber
VuApprovalNumber
}
vuManufacturerName is the name of the manufacturer of the vehicle unit.
vuManufacturerAddress is the address of the manufacturer of the vehicle unit.
vuPartNumber is the part number of the vehicle unit.
vuSerialNumber is the serial number of the vehicle unit.
vuSoftwareIdentification identifies the software implemented in the vehicle unit.
vuManufacturingDate is the manufacturing date of the vehicle unit.
vuApprovalNumber is the type approval number of the vehicle unit.
2.136. VuManufacturerAddress
Address of the manufacturer of the vehicle unit.
VuManufacturerAddress ::= Address
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.137. VuManufacturerName
Name of the manufacturer of the vehicle unit.
VuManufacturerName ::= Name
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.138. VuManufacturingDate
Date of manufacture of the vehicle unit.
VuManufacturingDate ::= TimeReal
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.139. VuOverSpeedingControlData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to over speeding events since the last over speeding control (requirement 095).
VuOverSpeedingControlData ::= SEQUENCE {
lastOverspeedControlTime
TimeReal,
firstOverspeedSince
TimeReal,l
numberOfOverspeedSince
OverspeedNumber
}
lastOverspeedControlTime is the date and time of the last over speeding control.
firstOverspeedSince is the date and time of the first over speeding following this over speeding control.
numberOfOverspeedSince is the number of over speeding events since the last over speeding control.
2.140. VuOverSpeedingEventData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to over speeding events (requirement 094).
VuOverSpeedingEventData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfVuOverSpeedingEvents
INTEGER(0..255),
vuOverSpeedingEventRecords
SET SIZE(noOfVuOverSpeedingEvents) OF VuOverSpeedingEventRecord
}
noOfVuOverSpeedingEvents is the number of events listed in the vuOverSpeedingEventRecords set.
vuOverSpeedingEventRecords is a set of over speeding events records.
2.141. VuOverSpeedingEventRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to over speeding events (requirement 094).
VuOverSpeedingEventRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
eventType
EventFaultType,
eventRecordPurpose
EventFaultRecordPurpose,
eventBeginTime
TimeReal,
eventEndTime
Temps réel
maxSpeedValue
SpeedMax,
averageSpeedValue
SpeedAverage,
cardNumberDriverSlotBegin
FullCardNumber,
similarEventsNumber
SimilarEventsNumber
}
eventType is the type of the event.
eventRecordPurpose is the purpose for which this event has been recorded.
eventBeginTime is the date and time of beginning of event.
eventEndTime is the date and time of end of event.
maxSpeedValue is the maximum speed measured during the event.
averageSpeedValue is the arithmetic average speed measured during the event.
cardNumberDriverSlotBegin identifies the card inserted in the driver slot at the beginning of the event.
similarEventsNumber is the number of similar events that day.
2.142. VuPartNumber
Part number of the vehicle unit.
VuPartNumber ::= IA5String(SIZE(16))
Value assignment: VU manufacturer specific.
2.143. VuPlaceDailyWorkPeriodData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to places where drivers begin or end a daily work periods (requirement 087).
VuPlaceDailyWorkPeriodData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfPlaceRecords
INTEGER(0..255),
vuPlaceDailyWorkPeriodRecords
SET SIZE(noOfPlaceRecords) OF VuPlaceDailyWorkPeriodRecord
}
noOfPlaceRecords is the number of records listed in the vuPlaceDailyWorkPeriodRecords set.
vuPlaceDailyWorkPeriodRecords is a set of place related records.
2.144. VuPlaceDailyWorkPeriodRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to a place where a driver begins or ends a daily work period (requirement 087).
VuPlaceDailyWorkPeriodRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
fullCardNumber
FullCardNumber,
placeRecord
PlaceRecord
}
fullCardNumber is the driver's card type, card issuing Member State and card number.
placeRecord contains the information related to the place entered.
2.145. VuPrivateKey
The private key of a vehicle unit.
VuPrivateKey ::= RSAKeyPrivateExponent
2.146. VuPublicKey
The public key of a vehicle unit.
VuPublicKey ::= PublicKey
2.147. VuSerialNumber
Serial number of the vehicle unit (requirement 075).
VuSerialNumber ::= ExtendedSerialNumber
2.148. VuSoftInstallationDate
Date of installation of the vehicle unit software version.
VuSoftInstallationDate ::= TimeReal
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.149. VuSoftwareIdentification
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to the software installed.
VuSoftwareIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
vuSoftwareVersion
VuSoftwareVersion,
vuSoftInstallationDate
VuSoftInstallationDate
}
vuSoftwareVersion is the software version number of the Vehicle Unit.
vuSoftInstallationDate is the software version installation date.
2.150. VuSoftwareVersion
Software version number of the vehicle unit.
VuSoftwareVersion ::= IA5String(SIZE(4))
Value assignment: Unspecified.
2.151. VuSpecificConditionData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to specific conditions.
VuSpecificConditionData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfSpecificConditionRecords
INTEGER(0..216-1)
specificConditionRecords
SET SIZE (noOfSpecificConditionRecords) OF SpecificConditionRecord
}
noOfSpecificConditionRecords is the number of records listed in the specificConditionRecords set.
specificConditionRecords is a set of specific conditions related records.
2.152. VuTimeAdjustmentData
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to time adjustments performed outside the frame of a regular calibration (requirement 101).
VuTimeAdjustmentData ::= SEQUENCE {
noOfVuTimeAdjRecords
INTEGER(0..6),
vuTimeAdjustmentRecords
SET SIZE(noOfVuTimeAdjRecords) OF VuTimeAdjustmentRecords
}
noOfVuTimeAdjRecords is the number of records in vuTimeAdjustmentRecords.
vuTimeAdjustmentRecords is a set of time adjustment records.
2.153. VuTimeAdjustmentRecord
Information, stored in a vehicle unit, related to a time adjustment performed outside the frame of a regular calibration (requirement 101).
VuTimeAdjustmentRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
oldTimeValue
TimeReal,
newTimeValue
TimeReal,
workshopName
Name,
workshopAddress
Address,
workshopCardNumber
FullCardNumber
}
oldTimeValue, newTimeValue are the old and new values of date and time.
workshopName, workshopAddress are the workshop name and address.
workshopCardNumber identifies the workshop card used to perform the time adjustment.
2.154. W-VehicleCharacteristicConstant
Characteristic coefficient of the vehicle (definition k)).
W-VehicleCharacteristicConstant ::= INTEGER(0..216-1))
Value assignment: Impulses per kilometre in the operating range 0 to 64 255 pulses/km.
2.155. WorkshopCardApplicationIdentification
Information, stored in a workshop card related to the identification of the application of the card (requirement 190).
WorkshopCardApplicationIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
typeOfTachographCardId
EquipmentType,
cardStructureVersion
CardStructureVersion,
noOfEventsPerType
NoOfEventsPerType,
noOfFaultsPerType
NoOfFaultsPerType,
activityStructureLength
CardActivityLengthRange,
noOfCardVehicleRecords
NoOfCardVehicleRecords,
noOfCardPlaceRecords
NoOfCardPlaceRecords,
noOfCalibrationRecords
NoOfCalibrationRecords
}
typeOfTachographCardId is specifying the implemented type of card.
cardStructureVersion is specifying the the version of the structure that is implemented in the card.
noOfEventsPerType is the number of events per type of event the card can record.
noOfFaultsPerType is the number of faults per type of fault the card can record.
activityStructureLength indicates the number of bytes available for storing activity records.
noOfCardVehicleRecords is the number of vehicle records the card can contain.
noOfCardPlaceRecords is the number of places the card can record.
noOfCalibrationRecords is the number of calibration records the card can store.
2.156. WorkshopCardCalibrationData
Information, stored in a workshop card, related to workshop activity performed with the card (requirements 227 and 229).
WorkshopCardCalibrationData ::= SEQUENCE {
calibrationTotalNumber
INTEGER(0..216-1),
calibrationPointerNewestRecord
INTEGER(0..NoOfCalibrationRecords-1),
calibrationRecords
SET SIZE(NoOfCalibrationRecords) OF WorkshopCardCalibrationRecord
}
calibrationTotalNumber is the total number of calibrations performed with the card.
calibrationPointerNewestRecord is the index of the last updated calibration record.
Value assignment: Number corresponding to the numerator of the calibration record, beginning with “0“ for the first occurrence of the calibration records in the structure.
calibrationRecords is the set of records containing calibration and/or time adjustment information.
2.157. WorkshopCardCalibrationRecord
Information, stored in a workshop card, related to a calibration performed with the card (requirement 227).
WorkshopCardCalibrationRecord ::= SEQUENCE {
calibrationPurpose
CalibrationPurpose,
vehicleIdentificationNumber
VehicleIdentificationNumber,
vehicleRegistration
VehicleRegistrationIdentification,
wVehicleCharacteristicConstant
W-VehicleCharacteristicConstant,
kConstantOfRecordingEquipment
K-ConstantOfRecordingEquipment,
lTyreCircumference
L-TyreCircumference,
tyreSize
TyreSize,
authorisedSpeed
SpeedAuthorised,
oldOdometerValue
OdometerShort,
newOdometerValue
OdometerShort,
oldTimeValue
Temps réel
newTimeValue
TimeReal,
nextCalibrationDate
TimeReal,
vuPartNumber
VuPartNumber,
vuSerialNumber
VuSerialNumber,
sensorSerialNumber
SensorSerialNumber
}
calibrationPurpose is the purpose of the calibration.
vehicleIdentificationNumber is the VIN.
vehicleRegistration contains the VRN and registering Member State.
wVehicleCharacteristicConstant is the characteristic coefficient of the vehicle.
kConstantOfRecordingEquipment is the constant of the recording equipment.
lTyreCircumference is the effective circumference of the wheel tyres.
tyreSize is the designation of the dimensions of the tyres mounted on the vehicle.
authorisedSpeed is the maximum authorised speed of the vehicle.
oldOdometerValue, newOdometerValue are the old and new values of the odometer.
oldTimeValue, newTimeValue are the old and new values of date and time.
nextCalibrationDate is the date of the next calibration of the type specified in CalibrationPurpose to be carried out by the authorised inspection authority.
vuPartNumber, vuSerialNumber and sensorSerialNumber are the data elements for recording equipment identification.
2.158. WorkshopCardHolderIdentification
Information, stored in a workshop card, related to the identification of the cardholder (requirement 216).
WorkshopCardHolderIdentification ::= SEQUENCE {
workshopName
Name,
workshopAddress
Address,
cardHolderName
HolderName
cardHolderPreferredLanguage
Language
}
workshopName is name of the workshop of the card holder.
workshopAddress is the address of the workshop of the card holder.
cardHolderName is the name and first name(s) of the holder (e.g. the name of the mechanic).
cardHolderPreferredLanguage is the preferred language of the card holder.
2.159. WorkshopCardPIN
Personal identification number of the Workshop Card (requirement 213).
WorkshopCardPIN ::= IA5String(SIZE(8))
Value assignment: The PIN known to the cardholder, right padded with “FF“ bytes up to 8 bytes.
3. VALUE AND SIZE RANGE DEFINITIONS
Definition of variable values used for definitions in paragraph 2.
TimeRealRange ::= 232-1
3.1. Definitions for the Driver Card:
Name of the variable value
Minimum
Maximum
CardActivityLengthRange
5 544 bytes
(28 days 93 activity changes per day)
13 776 bytes
(28 days 240 activity changes per day)
NoOfCardPlaceRecords
84
112
NoOfCardVehicleRecords
84
200
NoOfEventsPerType
6
12
NoOfFaultsPerType
12
24
3.2. Definitions for the Workshop Card:
Name of the variable value
Minimum
Maximum
CardActivityLengthRange
198 bytes
(1 day 93 activity changes)
492 bytes
(1 day 240 activity changes)
NoOfCardPlaceRecords
6
8
NoOfCardVehicleRecords
4
8
NoOfEventsPerType
3
3
NoOfFaultsPerType
6
6
NoOfCalibrationRecords
88
255
3.3. Definitions for the Control Card:
Name of the variable value
Minimum
Maximum
NoOfControlActivityRecords
230
520
3.4. Definitions for the Company Card:
Name of the variable value
Minimum
Maximum
NoOfCompanyActivityRecords
230
520
4. CHARACTER SETS
IA5Strings use the ASCII characters as defined by ISO/IEC 8824-1. For readability and for easy referencing the value assignment is given below. The ISO/IEC 8824-1 supersedes this informative note in case of discrepancy.
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
`a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ∼
Other character strings (Address, Name, VehicleRegistrationNumber) use, in addition, the characters defined by the codes 192 to 255 of ISO/IEC 8859-1 (Latin1 character set) or ISO/IEC 8859-7 (Greek character set).
5. ENCODING
When encoded with ASN.1 encoding rules, all data types defined shall be encoded according to ISO/IEC 8825-2, aligned variant.
Appendix 2
TACHOGRAPH CARDS SPECIFICATION
Contents
1.
1.1.
1.2.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.6.1.
3.6.1.1.
3.6.1.2.
3.6.2.
3.6.2.1.
3.6.2.2.
3.6.3.
3.6.3.1.
3.6.3.2.
3.6.4.
3.6.5.
3.6.6.
3.6.7.
3.6.8.
3.6.9.
3.6.10.
3.6.11.
3.6.12.
3.6.13.
3.6.14.
4.
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Abbreviations
For the purpose of this appendix, the following abbreviations apply:
AC
access conditions
AID
application identifier
ALW
always
APDU
application protocol data unit (structure of a command)
ATR
answer to reset
AUT
authenticated
C6, C7
contacts No 6 and 7 of the card as described in ISO/IEC 7816-2
cc
clock cycles
CHV
card holder verification information
CLA
class byte of an APDU command
DF
dedicated file. A DF can contain other files (EF or DF)
EF
elementary file
ENC
encrypted: access is possible only by encoding data
etu
elementary time unit
IC
integrated circuit
ICC
integrated circuit card
ID
identifier
IFD
interface device
IFS
information field size
IFSC
information field size for the card
IFSD
information field size device (for the terminal)
INS
instruction byte of an APDU command
Lc
length of the input data for a APDU command
Le
length of the expected data (output data for a command)
MF
master file (root DF)
P1-P2
parameter bytes
NAD
node address used in T=1 protocol
NEV
never
PIN
personal identification number
PRO SM
protected with secure messaging
PTS
protocol transmission selection
RFU
reserved for future use
RST
reset (of the card)
SM
secure messaging
SW1-SW2
status bytes
TS
initial ATR character
VPP
programming voltage
XXh
value XX in hexadecimal notation
||
concatenation symbol 03||04=0304.
1.2. References
The following references are used in this Appendix:
EN 726-3
Identification cards systems — Telecommunications integrated circuit(s) cards and terminals — Part 3: Application independent card requirements. December 1994.
ISO/IEC 7816-2
Information technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 2: Dimensions and location of the contacts. First edition: 1999.
ISO/IEC 7816-3
Information technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 3: Electronic signals and transmission protocol. Edition 2: 1997.
ISO/IEC 7816-4
Information technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 4: Interindustry commands for interexchange. First edition: 1995 + Amendment 1: 1997.
ISO/IEC 7816-6
Information technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 6: Interindustry data elements. First Edition: 1996 + Cor 1: 1998.
ISO/IEC 7816-8
Information technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 8: Security related interindustry commands. First Edition: 1999.
ISO/IEC 9797
Information technology — Security techniques — Data integrity mechanism using a cryptographic check function employing a block cipher algorithm. Edition 2: 1994.
2. ELECTRICAL AND PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
TCS_200All electronic signals shall be in accordance with ISO/IEC 7816-3 unless specified otherwise.
TCS_201The location and dimensions of the card contacts shall comply with the ISO/IEC 7816-2.
2.1. Supply voltage and current consumption
TCS_202The card shall work according to specifications within the consumption limits specified in ISO/IEC 7816-3.
TCS_203The card shall work with Vcc = 3 V (+/− 0,3 V) o Vcc = 5 V (+/− 0,5 V).
Voltage selection shall be performed according to ISO/IEC 7816-3.
2.2. Programming voltage Vpp
TCS_204The card shall not require a programming voltage at pin C6. It is expected that pin C6 is not connected in an IFD. Contact C6 may be connected to Vcc in the card but shall not be connected to ground. This voltage should not be interpreted in any case.
2.3. Clock generation and frequency
TCS_205The card shall operate within a frequency range of 1 to 5 MHz. Within one card session the clock frequency may vary ± 2 %. The clock frequency is generated by the Vehicle Unit and not the card itself. The duty cycle may vary between 40 and 60 %.
TCS_206Under conditions contained into the card file EFICC, the external clock can be stopped. The first byte of the EFICC file body codes the Clockstop mode conditions (see EN 726-3 for further details):
Low
High
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
0
0
1
Clockstop allowed, no preferred level
0
1
1
Clockstop allowed, high level preferred
1
0
1
Clockstop allowed, low level preferred
0
0
0
Clockstop not allowed
0
1
0
Clockstop only allowed on high level
1
0
0
Clockstop only allowed on low level
Bits 4 to 8 are not used.
2.4. I/O contact
TCS_207The I/O contact C7 is used to receive data from and to transmit data to the IFD. During operation only either the card or the IFD shall be in transmit mode. Should both units be in transmit mode no damage shall occur to the card. Unless transmitting, the card shall enter the reception mode.
2.5. States of the card
TCS_208The card works in two states while the supply voltage is applied:
—
operation state while executing commands or interfacing with Digital Unit,
—
idle state at all other times; in this state all data shall be retained by the card.
3. HARDWARE AND COMMUNICATION
3.1. Introduction
This paragraph describes the minimum functionality required by Tachograph cards and VUs to ensure correct operation and interoperability.
Tachograph cards are as compliant as possible with the available ISO/IEC applicable norms (especially ISO/IEC 7816). However, commands and protocols are fully described in order to specify some restricted usage or some differences if they exist. The commands specified are fully compliant with the referred norms except where indicated.
3.2. Transmission protocol
TCS_300The Transmission protocol shall be compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-3. In particular, the VU shall recognise waiting time extensions sent by the card.
3.2.1. Protocols
TCS_301The card shall provide both protocol T=0 and protocol T=1.
TCS_302T=0 is the default protocol, a PTS command is therefore necessary to change the protocol to T=1.
TCS_303Devices shall support direct convention in both protocols: the direct convention is hence mandatory for the card.
TCS_304The Information Field Size Card byte shall be presented at the ATR in character TA3. This value shall be at least ′F0h′ (= 240 bytes).
The following restrictions apply to the protocols:
TCS_305 T=0
—
The interface device shall support an answer on I/O after the rising edge of the signal on RST from 400 cc.
—
The interface device shall be able to read characters separated with 12 etu.
—
The interface device shall read an erroneous character and its repetition if separated with 13 etu. If an erroneous character is detected, the Error signal on I/O can occur between 1 etu and 2 etu. The device shall support a 1 etu delay.
—
The interface device shall accept a 33 bytes ATR (TS+32)
—
If TC1 is present in the ATR, the Extra Guard Time shall be present for characters sent by the interface device although characters sent by the card can still be separated with 12 etu. This is also true for the ACK character sent by the card after a P3 character emitted by the interface device.
—
The interface device shall take into account a NUL character emitted by the card.
—
The interface device shall accept the complementary mode for ACK.
—
The get-response command cannot be used in chaining mode to get a data which length could exceed 255 bytes.
TCS_306 T=1
—
NAD byte: not used (NAD shall be set to ′00′).
—
S-block ABORT: not used.
—
S-block VPP state error: not used.
—
The total chaining length for a data field will not exceed 255 bytes (to be ensured by the IFD).
—
The Information Field Size Device (IFSD) shall be indicated by the IFD immediately after the ATR: the IFD shall transmit the S-Block IFS request after the ATR and the card shall send back S-Block IFS. The recommended value for IFSD is 254 bytes.
—
The card will not ask for an IFS readjustment.
3.2.2. ATR
TCS_307The device checks ATR bytes, according to ISO/IEC 7816-3. No verification shall be done on ATR Historical Characters.
Example of Basic Biprotocol ATR according to ISO/IEC 7816-3
Character
Value
Remarks
TS
′3Bh′
Indicates direct convention
T0
′85h′
TD1 present; 5 historical bytes are presents
TD1
′80h′
TD2 present; T=0 to be used
TD2
′11h′
TA3 present; T=1 to be used
TA3
′XXh′ (mind. ′F0h′)
Information Field Size Card (IFSC)
TH1 bis TH5
′XXh′
Historical characters
TCK
′XXh′
Check character (exclusive OR)
TCS_308After the Answer To Reset (ATR), the Master File (MF) is implicitly selected and becomes the Current Directory.
3.2.3. PTS
TCS_309The default Protocol is T=0. To set the T=1 protocol, a PTS (also known as PPS) must be sent to the card by the device.
TCS_310As both T=0 and T=1 protocols are mandatory for the card, the basic PTS for protocol switching is mandatory for the card.
The PTS can be used, as indicated in ISO/IEC 7816-3, to switch to higher baud rates than the default one proposed by the card in the ATR if any (TA(1) byte).
Higher baud rates are optional for the card.
TCS_311If no other baud rate than the default one are supported (or if the selected baud rate is not supported), the card shall respond to the PTS correctly according to ISO/IEC 7816-3 by omitting the PPS1 byte.
Examples of basic PTS for protocol selection are the following:
Character
Value
Remarks
PPSS
′FFh′
The initiate character
PPS0
′00h′ or ′01h′
PPS1 to PPS3 are not present; ′00h′ to select T0, ′01h′ to select T1
PK
′XXh′
Check character: ′XXh′ = ′FFh′ if PPS0 = ′00h′
′XXh′ = ′FEh′ if PPS0 = ′01h′
3.3. Access conditions (AC)
Access Conditions (AC) for the UPDATE_BINARY and READ_BINARY commands are defined for each Elementary File.
TCS_312The AC of the current file must be met before accessing the file via these commands.
The definitions of the available access conditions are the following:
— ALW:: The action is always possible and can be executed without any restriction.
— NEV:: The action is never possible.
— AUT:: The right corresponding a successful external authentication must be opened up (done by the EXTERNAL_AUTHENTICATE command).
— PRO SM:: Command must be transmitted with a cryptographic checksum using secure messaging (See Appendix 11).
— AUT and PRO SM: (combined)
On the processing commands (UPDATE_BINARY and READ_BINARY), the following access conditions can be set in the card:
UPDATE_ BINARY
READ_ BINARY
ALW
Yes
Yes
NEV
Yes
Yes
AUT
Yes
Yes
PRO SM
Yes
No
AUT and PRO SM
Yes
No
The PRO SM access condition is not available for the READ_BINARY command. It means that the presence of a cryptographic checksum for a READ command is never mandatory. However, using the value ′OC′ for the class, it is possible to use the READ_BINARY command with secure messaging, as described in paragraph 3.6.2.
3.4. Data encryption
When confidentiality of data to be read from a file needs to be protected, the file is marked as “Encrypted“. Encryption is performed using secure messaging (See Appendix 11).
3.5. Commands and error codes overview
Commands and file organisation are deduced from and complies with ISO/IEC 7816-4.
TCS_313This section describes the following APDU command-response pairs:
Command
INS
SELECT FILE
A4
READ BINARY
B0
UPDATE BINARY
D6
GET CHALLENGE
84
VERIFY
20
GET RESPONSE
C0
PERFORM SECURITY OPERATION:
VERIFY CERTIFICATE
COMPUTE DIGITAL SIGNATURE
VERIFY DIGITAL SIGNATURE
HASH
2A
INTERNAL AUTHENTICATE
88
EXTERNAL AUTHENTICATE
82
MANAGE SECURITY ENVIRONMENT:
SETTING A KEY
22
PERFORM HASH OF FILE
2A
TCS_314The status word SW1 SW2 are returned in any response message and denote the processing state of the command.
SW1
SW2
Meaning
90
00
Normal processing
61
XX
Normal processing. XX = number of response bytes available
62
81
Warning processing. Part of returned data may be corrupted
63
CX
Wrong CHV (PIN). Remaining attempts counter provided by ′X′
64
00
Execution error — State of non-volatile memory unchanged. Integrity error
65
00
Execution error — State of non-volatile memory changed
65
81
Execution error — State of non-volatile memory changed — Memory failure
66
88
Security error:
wrong Cryptographic checksum (during secure messaging) or
wrong certificate (during certificate verification) or
wrong cryptogram (during external authentication) or
wrong signature (during signature verification)
67
00
Wrong length (wrong Lc or Le)
69
00
Forbidden command (no response available in T=0)
69
82
Security status not satisfied
69
83
Authentication method blocked
69
85
Conditions of use not satisfied
69
86
Command not allowed (no current EF)
69
87
Expected secure messaging data objects missing
69
88
Incorrect secure messaging data objects
6A
82
File not found
6A
86
Wrong parameters P1-P2
6A
88
Referenced data not found
6B
00
Wrong parameters (offset outside the EF)
6C
XX
Wrong length, SW2 indicates the exact length. No data field is returned
6D
00
Instruction code not supported or invalid
6E
00
Class not supported
6F
00
Other checking errors
3.6. Commands description
The mandatory commands for the Tachograph cards are described in this chapter.
Additional relevant details, related to cryptographic operations involved, are given in Appendix 11 Common security mechanisms.
All commands are described independently of the used protocol (T=0 or T=1). The APDU bytes CLA, INS, P1, P2, Lc and Le are always indicated. If Lc or Le is not needed for the described command, the associated length, value and description are empty.
TCS_315If both length bytes (Lc and Le) are requested, the described command has to be split in two parts if the IFD is using protocol T=0: the IFD sends the command as described with P3=Lc + data and then sends a GET_RESPONSE (see point 3.6.6) command with P3=Le.
TCS_316If both length bytes are requested, and Le=0 (secure messaging):
—
When using protocol T=1, the card shall answer to Le=0 by sending all available output data.
—
When using protocol T=0, the IFD shall send the first command with P3=Lc + data, the card shall answer (to this implicit Le=0) by the Status bytes ′61La′, where La is the number of response bytes available. The IFD shall then generate a GET RESPONSE command with P3=La to read the data.
3.6.1. Select file
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-4, but has a restricted usage compared to the command defined in the norm.
The SELECT FILE command is used:
—
to select an application DF (selection by name must be used)
—
to select an elementary file corresponding to the submitted file ID
3.6.1.1. Selection by name (AID)
This command allows to select an application DF in the card.
TCS_317This command can be performed from anywhere in the file structure (after the ATR or at anytime).
TCS_318The selection of an application resets the current security environment. After performing the application selection, no current public key is selected anymore and the former session key is no longer available for secure messaging. The AUT access condition is also lost.
TCS_319Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
INS
1
′A4h′
P1
1
′04h′
Selection by name (AID)
P2
1
′0Ch′
No response expected
Lc
1
′NNh′
Number of bytes sent to the card (length of the AID): ′06h′ for the Tachograph application
#6-#(5+NN)
NN
′XX..XXh′
AID: ′FF 54 41 43 48 4F′ for the Tachograph application
No response to the SELECT FILE command is needed (Le absent in T=1, or no response asked in T=0).
TCS_320Response Message (no response asked)
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status Words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if the application corresponding with the AID is not found, the processing state returned is ′6A82′,
—
in T=1, if the byte Le is present, the state returned is ′6700′,
—
in T=0, if a response is asked after the SELECT FILE command, the state returned is ′6900′,
—
if the selected application is considered corrupted (integrity error is detected within the file attributes), the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′.
3.6.1.2. Selection of an elementary file using its file identifier
TCS_321Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
INS
1
′A4h′
P1
1
′02h′
Selection of an EF under the current DF
P2
1
′0Ch′
No response expected
Lc
1
′02h′
Number of bytes sent to the card
#6-#7
2
′XXXXh′
File Identifier
No response to the SELECT FILE command is needed (Le absent in T=1, or no response asked in T=0).
TCS_322Response Message (no response asked)
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status Words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if the file corresponding with the file identifier is not found, the processing state returned is ′6A82′,
—
in T=1, if the byte Le is present, the state returned is ′6700′,
—
in T=0, if a response is asked after the SELECT FILE command, the state returned is ′6900′,
—
if the selected file is considered corrupted (integrity error is detected within the file attributes), the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′.
3.6.2. Read Binary
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-4, but has a restricted usage compared to the command defined in the norm.
The Read Binary command is used to read data from a transparent file.
The response of the card consists of returning the data read, optionally encapsulated in a secure messaging structure.
TCS_323The command can be performed only if the security status satisfies the security attributes defined for the EF for the READ function.
3.6.2.1. Command without secure messaging
This command enables the IFD to read data from the EF currently selected, without secure messaging.
TCS_324Reading data from a file marked as “Encrypted“ shall not be possible through this command.
TCS_325Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
No secure messaging asked
INS
1
′B0h′
P1
1
′XXh′
Offset in bytes from the beginning of the file: most significant byte
P2
1
′XXh′
Offset in bytes from the beginning of the file: least significant byte
Le
1
′XXh′
Length of data expected. number of bytes to be read
Note: bit 8 of P1 must be set to 0.
TCS_326Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
#1-#X
X
′XX..XXh′
Data read
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if no EF is selected, the processing state returned is ′6986′,
—
if the Access Control of the selected file are not satisfied, the command is interrupted with ′6982′,
—
if the Offset is not compatible with the size of the EF (Offset > EF size), the processing state returned is ′6B00′,
—
if the size of the data to be read is not compatible with the size of the EF (Offset + Le > EF size) the processing state returned is ′6700′ or ′6Cxx′, where ′xx′ indicates the exact length,
—
if an integrity error is detected within the file attributes, the card shall consider the file as corrupted and unrecoverable, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′,
—
if an integrity error is detected within the stored data, the card shall return the demanded data, and the processing state returned is ′6281′.
3.6.2.2. Command with secure messaging
This command enables the IDF to read data from the EF currently selected with secure messaging, in order to verify the integrity of the data received and to protect the confidentiality of the data in the case the EF is marked as “Encrypted“.
TCS_327Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′0Ch′
Secure Messaging asked
INS
1
′B0h′
INS
P1
1
′XXh′
P1 (offset in bytes from the beginning of the file): Most Significant Byte
P2
1
′XXh′
P2 (offset in bytes from the beginning of the file): Least Significant Byte
Lc
1
′09h′
Length of input data for secure messaging
#6
1
′97h′
TLE: Tag for expected length specification
#7
1
′01h′
LLE: Length of expected length
#8
1
′NNh′
Expected length specification (original Le): Number of Bytes to be read
#9
1
′8Eh′
TCC: Tag for cryptographic checksum
#10
1
′04h′
LCC: Length of following cryptographic checksum
#11-#14
4
′XX..XXh′
Cryptographic checksum (4 most significant bytes)
Le
1
′00h′
As specified in ISO/IEC 7816-4
TCS_328Response Message if EF is not marked as “Encrypted“ and if Secure Messaging input format is correct:
Byte
Length
Value
Description
#1
1
′81h′
TPV: Tag for plain value data
#2
L
′NNh′ or ′81 NNh′
LPV: length of returned data (= original Le)
L is 2 bytes if LPV >127 bytes
#(2+L)-#(1+L+NN)
NN
′XX..XXh′
Plain Data value
#(2+L+NN)
1
′8Eh′
TCC: Tag for cryptographic checksum
#(3+L+NN)
1
′04h′
LCC: Length of following cryptographic checksum
#(4+L+NN)-#(7+L+NN)
4
′XX..XXh′
Cryptographic checksum (4 most significant bytes)
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status Words (SW1, SW2)
TCS_329Response Message if EF is marked as “Encrypted“ and if Secure Messaging input format is correct:
Byte
Length
Value
Description
#1
1
′87h′
TPI CG: Tag for encrypted data (cryptogram)
#2
L
′MMh′ or ′81 MMh′
LPI CG: length of returned encrypted data (different of original Le of the command due to padding)
L is 2 byte if LPI CG > 127 bytes
#(2+L)-#(1+L+MM)
MM
′01XX..XXh′
Encrypted data: padding indicator and cryptogram
#(2+L+MM)
1
′8Eh′
TCC: tag for cryptographic checksum
#(3+L+MM)
1
′04h′
LCC: length of following cryptographic checksum
#(4+L+MM)-#(7+L+MM)
4
′XX..XXh′
Cryptographic checksum (4 most significant bytes)
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
The encrypted data returned contain a first byte indicating the used padding mode. For the tachograph application, the padding indicator always takes the value '01h', indicating that the used padding mode is the one specified in ISO/IEC 7816-4 (one byte with value ′80h′ followed by some null bytes: ISO/IEC 9797 method 2).
The “regular“ processing states, described for the READ BINARY command with no secure messaging (see point 3.6.2.1), can be returned using the response message structures described above, under a ′99h′ Tag (as described in TCS 335).
Additionally, some errors specifically related to secure messaging can happen. In that case, the processing state is simply returned, with no secure messaging structure involved:
TCS_330Response Message if incorrect Secure Messaging input format
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If no current session key is available, the processing state ′6A88′ is returned. It happens either if the session key has not already been generated or if the session key validity has expired (in this case the IFD must re-run a mutual authentication process to set a new session key).
—
If some expected data objects (as specified above) are missing in the secure messaging format, the processing state ′6987′ is returned: this error happens if an expected tag is missing or if the command body is not properly constructed.
—
If some data objects are incorrect, the processing state returned is ′6988′: this error happens if all the required tags are present but some lengths are different from the ones expected.
—
If the verification of the cryptographic checksum fails, the processing state returned is ′6688′.
3.6.3. Update Binary
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-4, but has a restricted usage compared to the command defined in the norm.
The UPDATE BINARY command message initiates the update (erase + write) of the bits already present in an EF binary with the bits given in the command APDU.
TCS_331The command can be performed only if the security status satisfies the security attributes defined for the EF for the UPDATE function (If the access control of the UPDATE function includes PRO SM, a secure messaging must be added in the command).
3.6.3.1. Command without secure messaging
This command enables the IFD to write data into the EF currently selected, without the card verifying the integrity of data received. This plain mode is allowed only if the related file is not marked as “Encrypted“.
TCS_332Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
No secure messaging asked
INS
1
′D6h′
P1
1
′XXh′
Offset in bytes from the beginning of the file: most significant byte
P2
1
′XXh′
Offset in bytes from the beginning of the file: least significant byte
Lc
1
′NNh′
Lc length of data to Update. Number of bytes to be written
#6-#(5+NN)
NN
′XX..XXh′
Data to be written
Note: bit 8 of P1 must be set to 0.
TCS_333Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if no EF is selected, the processing state returned is ′6986′,
—
if the Access Control of the selected file are not satisfied, the command is interrupted with ′6982′,
—
if the Offset is not compatible with the size of the EF (Offset > EF size), the processing state returned is ′6B00′,
—
if the size of the data to be written is not compatible with the size of the EF (Offset + Le > EF size) the processing state returned is ′6700′,
—
if an integrity error is detected within the file attributes, the card shall consider the file as corrupted and unrecoverable, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6500′,
—
if writing is unsuccessful, the processing state returned is ′6581′.
3.6.3.2. Command with secure messaging
This command enables the IFD to write data into the EF currently selected, with the card verifying the integrity of data received. As no confidentiality is required, the data are not encrypted.
TCS_334Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′0Ch′
Secure messaging. Asked
INS
1
′D6h′
INS
P1
1
′XXh′
Offset in bytes from the beginning of the file: most significant byte
P2
1
′XXh′
Offset in bytes from the beginning of the file: least significant byte
Lc
1
′XXh′
Length of the secured data field
#6
1
′81h′
TPV: tag for plain value data
#7
L
′NNh′ or ′81 NNh′
LPV: length of transmitted data
L is 2 bytes if LPV > 127 bytes
#(7+L)-#(6+L+NN)
NN
′XX..XXh′
Plain data value (data to be written)
#(7+L+NN)
1
′8Eh′
TCC: tag for cryptographic checksum
#(8+L+NN)
1
′04h′
LCC: Length of following cryptographic checksum
#(9+L+NN)-#(12+L+NN)
4
′XX..XXh′
Cryptographic checksum (4 most significant bytes)
Le
1
′00h′
As specified in ISO/IEC 7816-4
TCS_335Response message if correct Secure Messaging input format
Byte
Length
Value
Description
#1
1
′99h′
TSW: tag for status words (to be protected by CC)
#2
1
′02h′
LSW: length of returned status words
#3-#4
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
#5
1
′8Eh′
TCC: tag for cryptographic checksum
#6
1
′04h′
LCC: Length of following cryptographic checksum
#7-#10
4
′XX..XXh′
Cryptographic checksum (4 most significant bytes)
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
The “regular“ processing states, described for the UPDATE BINARY command with no secure messaging (see point 3.6.3.1), can be returned using the response message structure described above.
Additionally, some errors specifically related to secure messaging can happen. In that case, the processing state is simply returned, with no secure messaging structure involved:
TCS_336Response Message if error in secure messaging
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status Words (SW1, SW2)
—
If no current session key is available, the processing state ′6A88′ is returned,
—
if some expected data objects (as specified above) are missing in the secure messaging format, the processing state ′6987′ is returned: this error happens if an expected tag is missing or if the command body is not properly constructed,
—
if some data objects are incorrect, the processing state returned is ′6988′: this error happens if all the required tags are present but some lengths are different from the ones expected,
—
if the verification of the cryptographic checksum fails, the processing state returned is ′6688′.
3.6.4. Get challenge
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-4, but has a restricted usage compared to the command defined in the norm.
The GET CHALLENGE command asks the card to issue a challenge in order to use it in a security related procedure in which a cryptogram or some ciphered data are sent to the card.
TCS_337The Challenge issued by the card is only valid for the next command, which uses a challenge, sent to the card.
TCS_338Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′84h′
INS
P1
1
′00h′
P1
P2
1
′00h′
P2
Le
1
′08h′
Le (Length of challenge expected)
TCS_339Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
#1-#8
8
′XX..XXh′
Challenge
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if Le is different from ′08h′, the processing state is ′6700′,
—
if parameters P1-P2 are incorrect, the processing state is ′6A86′.
3.6.5. Verify
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-4, but has a restricted usage compared to the command defined in the norm.
The Verify command initiates the comparison in the card of the CHV (PIN) data sent from the command with the reference CHV stored in the card.
Note: The PIN entered by the user must be right padded with FFh' bytes up to a length of 8 bytes by the IFD.
TCS_340If the command is successful, the rights corresponding to CHV presentation are opened and the remaining CHV attempt counter is reinitialised.
TCS_341An unsuccessful comparison is recorded in the card in order to limit the number of further attempts of the use of the reference CHV.
TCS_342Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′20h′
INS
P1
1
′00h′
P1
P2
1
′00h′
P2 (the verified CHV is implicitly known)
Lc
1
′08h′
Length of CHV code transmitted
#6-#13
8
′XX..XXh′
CHV
TCS_343Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if the reference CHV is not found, the processing state returned is ′6A88′,
—
if the CHV is blocked, (the remaining attempt counter of the CHV is null), the processing state returned is ′6983′. Once in that state, the CHV can never be successfully presented anymore,
—
if the comparison is unsuccessful, the remaining attempt Counter is decreased and the status ′63CX′ is returned (X > 0, and X equals the remaining CHV attempts counter. X = ′F′, the CHV attempts counter is greater than ′F′),
—
if the reference CHV is considered corrupted, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′.
3.6.6. Get response
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-4.
This command (only necessary and available for T=0 Protocol) is used to transmit prepared data from the card to the interface device (case where a command had included both Lc and Le).
The GET_RESPONSE command has to be issued immediately after the command preparing the data, otherwise, the data are lost. After the execution of the GET_RESPONSE command (except if the error ′61xx′ or ′6Cxx′ occur, see below), the previously prepared data are no longer available.
TCS_344Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
INS
1
′C0h′
P1
1
′00h′
P2
1
′00h′
Le
1
′XXh′
Number of bytes expected
TCS_345Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
#1-#X
X
′XX..XXh′
Data
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′.
—
If no data have been prepared by the card, the processing state returned is ′6900′ or ′6F00′.
—
If Le exceeds the number of available bytes or if Le is null, the processing state returned is ′6Cxx′, where ′xx′ denotes the exact number of available bytes. In that case, the prepared data are still available for a subsequent GET_RESPONSE command.
—
If Le is not null and is smaller than the number of available bytes, the required data are sent normally by the card, and the processing state returned is ′61xx′, where ′xx′ indicates a number of extra bytes still available by a subsequent GET_RESPONSE command.
—
If the command is not supported (protocol T=1), the card returns ′6D00′.
3.6.7. PSO: verify certificate
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-8, but has a restricted usage compared to the command defined in the norm.
The VERIFY CERTIFICATE command is used by the card to obtain a Public Key from the outside and to check its validity.
TCS_346When a VERIFY CERTIFICATE command is successful, the Public Key is stored for a future use in the Security environment. This key shall be explicitly set for the use in security related commands (INTERNAL AUTHENTICATE, EXTERNAL AUTHENTICATE or VERIFY CERTIFICATE) by the MSE command (see point 3.6.10) using its key identifier.
TCS_347In any case, the VERIFY CERTIFICATE command uses the public key previously selected by the MSE command to open the certificate. This public key must be the one of a Member State or of Europe.
TCS_348Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′2Ah′
Perform Security Operation
P1
1
′00h′
P1
P2
1
′AEh′
P2: non BER-TLV coded data (concatenation of data elements)
Lc
1
′CEh′
Lc: Length of the certificate, 194 bytes
#6-#199
194
′XX..XXh′
Certificate: concatenation of data elements (as described in Appendix 11)
TCS_349Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if the certificate verification fails, the processing state returned is ′6688′. The verification and unwrapping process of the certificate is described in Appendix 11,
—
if no Public Key is present in the Security Environment, ′6A88′ is returned,
—
if the selected public key (used to unwrap the certificate) is considered corrupted, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′,
—
if the selected public key (used to unwrap the certificate) has a CHA.LSB (CertificateHolderAuthorisation.equipmentType) different from ′00′ (i.e. is not the one of a Member State or of Europe), the processing state returned is ′6985′.
3.6.8. Internal authenticate
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-4.
Using the INTERNAL AUTHENTICATE command, the IFD can authenticate the card.
The authentication process is described in Appendix 11. It includes the following statements:
TCS_350The INTERNAL AUTHENTICATE command uses the card Private Key (implicitly selected) to sign authentication data including K1 (first element for session key agreement) and RND1, and uses the Public Key currently selected (through the last MSE command) to encrypt the signature and form the authentication token (more details in Appendix 11).
TCS_351Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′88h′
INS
P1
1
′00h′
P1
P2
1
′00h′
P2
Lc
1
′10h′
Length of data sent to the card
#6-#13
8
′XX..XXh′
Challenge used to authenticate the card
#14-#21
8
′XX..XXh′
VU.CHR (see Appendix 11)
Le
1
′80h′
Length of the data expected from the card
TCS_352Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
#1-#128
128
′XX..XXh′
Card authentication token (see Appendix 11)
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if no Public Key is present in the Security Environment, the processing state returned is ′6A88′,
—
if no Private Key is present in the Security Environment, the processing state returned is ′6A88′,
—
if VU.CHR does not match the current public key identifier, the processing state returned is ′6A88′,
—
if the selected private key is considered corrupted, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′.
TCS_353If the INTERNAL_AUTHENTICATE command is successful, the current session key, if existing, is erased and no longer available. In order to have a new session key available, the EXTERNAL_AUTHENTICATE command must be successfully performed.
3.6.9. External authenticate
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-4.
Using the EXTERNAL AUTHENTICATE command, the card can authenticate the IFD.
The authentication process is described in Appendix 11. It includes the following statements:
TCS_354A GET CHALLENGE command must precede the EXTERNAL_AUTHENTICATE command immediately. The card issues a challenge to the outside (RND3).
TCS_355The verification of the cryptogram uses RND3 (challenge issued by the card), the card private key (implicitly selected) and the public key previously selected by the MSE command.
TCS_356The card verifies the cryptogram, and if it is correct, the AUT access condition is opened.
TCS_357The input cryptogram is carries the second element for session key agreement K2.
TCS_358Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′82h′
INS
P1
1
′00h′
P1
P2
1
′00h′
P2 (the public key to be used is implicitly known, and has been previously set by the MSE command)
Lc
1
′80h′
Lc (Length of the data sent to the card)
#6-#133
128
′XX..XXh′
Cryptogram (see Appendix 11)
TCS_359Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (status words (SW1, SW2))
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if no Public Key is present in the Security Environment, ′6A88′ is returned,
—
if the CHA of the currently set public key is not the concatenation of the Tachograph application AID and of a VU equipment Type, the processing state returned is ′6F00′ (see Appendix 11),
—
if no Private Key is present in the Security Environment, the processing state returned is ′6A88′,
—
if the verification of the cryptogram is wrong, the processing state returned is ′6688′,
—
if the command is not immediately preceded with a GET CHALLENGE command, the processing state returned is ′6985′,
—
if the selected private key is considered corrupted, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′.
TCS_360If the EXTERNAL AUTHENTICATE command is successful, and if the first part of the session key is available from a successful INTERNAL AUTHENTICATE recently performed, the session key is set for future commands using secure messaging.
TCS_361If the first session key part is not available from a previous INTERNAL AUTHENTICATE command, the second part of the session key, sent by the IFD, is not stored in the card. This mechanism ensures that the mutual authentication process is done in the order specified in Appendix 11.
3.6.10. Manage security environment
This command is used to set a public key for authentication purpose.
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-8. The use of this command is restricted regarding the related standard.
TCS_362The key referenced in the MSE data field is valid for every file of the Tachograph DF.
TCS_363The key referenced in the MSE data field remains the current public key until the next correct MSE command.
TCS_364If the key referenced is not (already) present into the card, the security environment remains unchanged.
TCS_365Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′22h′
INS
P1
1
′C1h′
P1: referenced key valid for all cryptographic operations
P2
1
′B6h′
P2 (referenced data concerning digital signature)
Lc
1
′0Ah′
Lc: length of subsequent data field
#6
1
′83h′
Tag for referencing a public key in asymmetric cases
#7
1
′08h′
Length of the key reference (key identifier)
#8-#15
08h
′XX..XXh′
Key identifier as specified in Appendix 11
TCS_366Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if the referenced key is not present into the card, the processing state returned is ′6A88′,
—
if some expected data objects are missing in the secure messaging format, the processing state ′6987′ is returned. This can happen if the tag ′83h′ is missing,
—
if some data objects are incorrect, the processing state returned is ′6988′. This can happen if the length of the key identifier is not ′08h′,
—
if the selected key is considered corrupted, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′.
3.6.11. PSO: hash
This command is used to transfer to the card the result of a hash calculation on some data. This command is used for the verification of digital signatures. The hash value is stored in EEPROM for the subsequent command verify digital signature.
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-8. The use of this command is restricted regarding the related standard.
TCS_367Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′2Ah′
Perform security operation
P1
1
′90h′
Return hash code
P2
1
′A0h′
Tag: data field contains DOs relevant for hashing
Lc
1
′16h′
Length Lc of the subsequent data field
#6
1
′90h′
Tag for the hash code
#7
1
′14h′
Length of the hash code
#8-#27
20
′XX..XXh′
Hash code
TCS_368Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if some expected data objects (as specified above) are missing, the processing state ′6987′ is returned. This can happen if one of the tag ′90h′ is missing,
—
if some data objects are incorrect, the processing state returned is ′6988′. This error happens if the required tag is present but with a length different from ′14h′.
3.6.12. Perform hash of file
This command is not compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-8. Thus the CLA byte of this command indicates that there is a proprietary use of the PERFORM SECURITY OPERATION/HASH.
TCS_369The perform hash file command is used to hash the data area of the currently selected transparent EF.
TCS_370The result of the hash operation is stored in the card. It can then be used to get a digital signature of the file, using the PSO-COMPUTE_DIGITAL_SIGNATURE command. This result remains available for the COMPUTE DIGITAL SIGNATURE command until the next successful PERFORM HASH of FILE command.
TCS_371Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′80h′
CLA
INS
1
′2Ah′
Perform security operation
P1
1
′90h′
Tag: hash
P2
1
′00h′
P2: hash the data of the currently selected transparent file
TCS_372Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if no application is selected, the processing state ′6985′ is returned,
—
if the selected EF is considered corrupted (file attributes or stored data integrity errors), the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′,
—
if the selected file is not a transparent file, the processing state returned is ′6986′.
3.6.13. PSO: compute digital signature
This command is used to compute the digital signature of previously computed hash code (see PERFORM HASH of FILE, point 3.6.12).
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-8. The use of this command is restricted regarding the related standard.
TCS_373The card private key is used to compute the digital signature and is implicitly known by the card.
TCS_374The card performs a digital signature using a padding method compliant with PKCS1 (see Appendix 11 for details).
TCS_375Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′2Ah′
Perform security operation
P1
1
′9Eh′
Digital signature to be returned
P2
1
′9Ah′
Tag: data field contains data to be signed. As no data field is included, the data are supposed to be already present in the card (hash of file)
Le
1
′80h′
Length of the expected signature
TCS_376Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
#1-#128
128
′XX..XXh′
Signature of the previously computed hash
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if the implicitly selected private key is considered as corrupted, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′.
3.6.14. PSO: verify digital signature
This command is used to verify the digital signature, provided as an input, in accordance with PKCS1 of a message, whose hash is known to the card. The signature algorithm is implicitly known by the card.
This command is compliant with ISO/IEC 7816-8. The use of this command is restricted regarding the related standard.
TCS_377The Verify Digital Signature command always uses the public key selected by the previous Manage Security Environment command, and the previous hash code entered by a PSO: hash command.
TCS_378Command Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
CLA
1
′00h′
CLA
INS
1
′2Ah′
Perform security operation
P1
1
′00h′
P2
1
′A8h′
Tag: data field contains DOs relevant for verification
Lc
1
′83h′
Length Lc of the subsequent data field
#28
1
′9Eh′
Tag for digital signature
#29-#30
2
′8180h′
Length of digital signature (128 bytes, coded in accordance with ISO/IEC 7816-6)
#31-#158
128
′XX..XXh′
Digital signature content
TCS_379Response Message
Byte
Length
Value
Description
SW
2
′XXXXh′
Status words (SW1, SW2)
—
If the command is successful, the card returns ′9000′,
—
if the verification of the signature fails, the processing state returned is ′6688′. The verification process is described in Appendix 11,
—
if no public key is selected, the processing state returned is ′6A88′,
—
if some expected data objects (as specified above) are missing, the processing state ′6987′ is returned. This can happen if one of the required tag is missing,
—
if no hash code is available to process the command (as a result of a previous PSO: hash command), the processing state returned is ′6985′,
—
if some data objects are incorrect, the processing state returned is ′6988′. This can happen if one of the required data objects length is incorrect,
—
if the selected public key is considered corrupted, the processing state returned is ′6400′ or ′6581′.
4. TACHOGRAPH CARDS STRUCTURE
This paragraph specifies the file structures of the Tachograph cards for storage of accessible data,
It does not specify card manufacturer dependant internal structures, such as e.g. file headers, nor storage and handling of data elements needed for internal use only such as EuropeanPublicKey, CardPrivateKey, TDesSessionKey or WorkshopCardPin.
The useful storage capacity of Tachograph cards shall be of 11 Kbytes minimum. Greater capacities may be used. In such case, the structure of the card remains the same, but the number of records of some elements of the structure is increased. This paragraph specifies minimum and maximum values of these record numbers.
4.1. Driver card structure
TCS_400After its personalisation, the driver card shall have the following permanent file structure and file access conditions:
TCS_401All EFs structures shall be transparent.
TCS_402Read with secure messaging shall be possible for all files under the DF Tachograph.
TCS_403The driver card shall have the following data structure:
TCS_404The following values, used to provide sizes in the table above, are the minimum and maximum record number values the driver card data structure must use:
Min
Max
n1
NoOfEventsPerType
6
12
n2
NoOfFaultsPerType
12
24
n3
NoOfCardVehicleRecords
84
200
n4
NoOfCardPlaceRecords
84
112
n6
CardActivityLengthRange
5 544 bytes
(28 days * 93 activity changes)
13 776 bytes
(28 days * 240 activity changes)
4.2. Workshop card structure
TCS_405After its personalisation, the workshop card shall have the following permanent file structure and file access conditions:
TCS_406All EFs structures shall be transparent.
TCS_407Read with secure messaging shall be possible for all files under the DF Tachograph.
TCS_408The workshop card shall have the following data structure:
TCS_409The following values, used to provide sizes in the table above, are the minimum and maximum record number values the workshop card data structure must use:
Min
Max
n1
NoOfEventsPerType
3
3
n2
NoOfFaultsPerType
6
6
n3
NoOfCardVehicleRecords
4
8
n4
NoOfCardPlaceRecords
6
8
n6
CardActivityLengthRange
88
255
n5
NoOfCalibrationRecords
198 bytes
(1 day * 93 activity changes)
492 bytes
(1 day * 240 activity changes)
4.3. Control card structure
TCS_410After its personalisation, the control card shall have the following permanent file structure and file access conditions:
TCS_411All EFs structures shall be transparent.
TCS_412Read with secure messaging shall be possible for files under the DF Tachograph.
TCS_413The control card shall have the following data structure:
TCS_414The following values, used to provide sizes in the table above, are the minimum and maximum record number values the control card data structure must use:
Min
Max
n7
NoOfControlActivityRecords
230
520
4.4. Company card structure
TCS_415After its personalisation, the company card shall have the following permanent file structure and file access conditions:
TCS_416All EFs structures shall be transparent.
TCS_417Read with secure messaging shall be possible for all files under the DF Tachograph.
TCS_418The company card shall have the following data structure:
TCS_419The following values, used to provide sizes in the table above, are the minimum and maximum record number values the company card data structure must use:
Min
Max
n8
NoOfCompanyActivityRecords
230
520
Appendix 3
PICTOGRAMS
PIC_001The recording equipment may use the following pictograms and pictograms combinations:
1.
BASIC PICTOGRAMS
People
Actions
Modes of operation
Company
Company mode
Controller
Control
Control mode
Driver
Driver
Operational mode
Workshop/test station
Inspection/calibration
Calibration mode
Manufacturer
Activities
Duration
Available
Current availability period
Driving
Continuous driving time
Rest
Current rest period
Work
Current work period
Break
Cumulative break time
Unknown
Equipment
Functions
Driver slot
Co-driver slot
Card
Clock
Display
Displaying
External storage
Downloading
Power supply
Printer/printout
Printing
Sensor
Tyre size
Vehicle/vehicle unit
Specific conditions
Out of scope
Ferry/train crossing
Miscellaneous
Events
Faults
Start of daily work period
End of daily work period
Location
Manual entry of driver activities
Security
Speed
Time
Total/summary
Qualifiers
Daily
Weekly
Two weeks
From or to
2.
PICTOGRAM COMBINATIONS
Miscellaneous
Control place
Location start of daily work period
Location end of daily work period
From time
To time
From vehicle
Out of scope begin
Out of scope end
Cards
Driver card
Company card
Control card
Workshop card
- - -
No card
Driving
Crew driving
Driving time for one week
Driving time for two weeks
Printouts
Driver activities from card daily printout
Driver activities from VU daily printout
Events and faults from card printout
Events and faults from VU printout
Technical data printout
Over speeding printout
Events
Insertion of a non valid card
Card conflict
Time overlap
Driving without an appropriate card
Card insertion while driving
Last card session not correctly closed
Over speeding
Power supply interruption
Motion data error
Security breach
Time adjustment (by workshop)
Over speeding control
Faults
Card fault (driver slot)
Card fault (co-driver slot)
Display fault
Downloading fault
Printer fault
Sensor fault
VU internal fault
Manual entries procedure
Still same daily work period?
End of previous work period?
Confirm or enter location of end of work period
Enter start time
Enter location of start of work period.
Note: Additional pictogram combinations to form printout block or record identifiers are defined in Appendix 4.
Appendix 4
PRINTOUTS
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
1. GENERALITIES
Each printout is built up by chaining various data blocks, possibly identified with a block identifier.
A data block contains one or more records, possibly identified with a record identifier.
PRT_001When a block identifier immediately precedes a record identifier, the record identifier is not printed.
PRT_002In the case where a data item is unknown, or must not be printed for data access rights reasons, spaces are printed instead.
PRT_003If the content of a complete line is unknown, or need not to be printed, then the complete line is omitted.
PRT_004Numerical data fields are printed right aligned, with a space separator for thousands and millions, and without leading zeros.
PRT_005String data fields are printed left aligned and filled up with spaces to data item length, or truncated to data item length when needed (names and addresses).
2. DATA BLOCKS SPECIFICATION
In this chapter the following format notation conventions have been used:
—
characters printed in bold denote plain text to be printed (printing remains in normal characters),
—
normal characters denote variables (pictograms or data) to be replaced by their values for printing,
—
variable names have been padded with underscores to show the data item length available for the variable,
—
dates are specified with a “dd/mm/yyyy“ (day, month, year) format. A “dd.mm.yyyy“ format may also be used,
—
the term “card identification“ denotes the composition of: the type of card through a card pictograms combination, the card issuing Member State code, a forward slash character and the card number with the replacement index and the renewal index separated with a space:
PRT_006Printouts shall use the following data blocks and/or data records, in accordance with the following meanings and formats:
Block or record number
Meaning
1.
2.
Block identifier
Printout pictogram combination (see App. 3), Speed limiting device setting (Over speeding printout only).
3.
Block identifier. P = people pictogram
Card holder surname
Card holder first name(s) (if any)
Card identification
Card expiry date (if any)
In the case where the card is a non-personal card, and holds no card holder surname, the company or workshop or control body name shall be printed instead.
4.
Block identifier
(VIN)
Registering Member State and VRN.
5.
Block identifier
VU manufacturer's name
VU part number.
6.
Block identifier
Workshop name
Workshop card identification
Date of the calibration.
7.
Block identifier
Controller's card identification
Control date, time and type
Type of the control: Up to four pictograms. The type of control can be (a combination) of:
: Card downloading,: VU downloading,: printing,: Displaying.
8.
Block identifier
Enquiry date (calendar day subject of the printout) + Daily card presence counter.
8.1.
8.1a.
Record identifier (start of period)
8.1b.
Unknown period. Start and end time, duration
8.1c.
Activity pictogram, start and end time (included), duration, rest periods of at least one hour are tagged with a star.
8.2.
Record identifier; S = Slot pictogram
Vehicle registering Member State and VRN
Vehicle odometer at card insertion.
8.3.
Activity pictogram, start and end time (included), duration, crew status (crew pictogram if CREW, blanks if SINGLE), rest periods of at least one hour are tagged with a star.
8.3a.
Specific condition. Time of entry, specific condition pictogram (or pictogram combination).
8.4.
Vehicle odometer and distance travelled since last insertion for which odometer is known.
9.
Block identifier
Enquiry date (calendar day subject of the printout)
Vehicle odometer at 00:00 and 24:00.
10.
Block identifier.
10.1.
Record identifier
No Card inserted
Vehicle odometer at beginning of period.
10.2.
Card insertion record identifier
Driver's name
Driver's first name
Driver's Card identification
Driver's card expiry date
Registering MS and VRN of previous vehicle used
Date and time of card withdrawal from previous vehicle
Blank line
Vehicle odometer at card insertion, manual entry of driver activities flag (M if yes, blank if No).
10.3.
Activity pictogram, start and end time (included), duration, crew status (crew pictogram if CREW, blanks if SINGLE), rests of at least one hour are tagged with a star.
10.3a.
Specific condition. Time of entry, specific condition pictogram (or pictogram combination).
10.4.
Vehicle odometer at card withdrawal or at end of “no card“ period and distance travelled since insertion, or since beginning of the “No Card“ period.
11.
Block identifier.
11.1.
Block identifier.
11.2.
Block identifier.
11.3.
Record identifier
Driver's surname
Driver's first name(s)
Driver's card identification.
11.4.
pi = location begin/end pictogram, time, country, region,
Odometer.
11.5.
Total driving duration, distance travelled
Total working and availability duration
Total resting and unknown duration
Total duration of crew activities.
11.6.
Total driving duration, distance travelled
Total working and availability duration
Total resting duration.
11.7.
Total working and availability duration
Total resting duration.
11.8.
Total driving duration, distance travelled
Total driving duration, distance travelled
Total resting duration
Total duration of crew activities
When a daily printout is required for the current day, daily summary information is computed with available data at the time of the printout.
12.
12.1.
Block identifier last 5 “Events and Faults“ from a card
12.2.
Block identifier all recorded “Events“ on a card
12.3.
Block identifier all recorded “Faults“ on a card
12.4.
Record identifier
Event/fault pictogram, record purpose, date time of start,
Additional event/fault code (if any), duration
Registering Member State & VRN of vehicle in which the event or fault occurred.
13.
13.1.
Block identifier last 5 “Events and Faults“ from VU
13.2.
Block identifier all recorded or on-going “Events“ in a VU
13.3.
Block identifier all recorded or on-going “Faults“ in a VU
13.4.
Record identifier
Event/fault pictogram, record purpose, date time of start,
Additional event/fault code (if any), No of similar events this day, duration
Identification of the cards inserted at start or end of the event or fault (up to 4 lines without repeating twice the same card numbers)
Case where no card was inserted
The record purpose (p) is a numerical code explaining why the event or fault was recorded, coded in accordance with the data element EventFaultRecordPurpose.
14.
Block identifier
VU manufacturer name
VU manufacturer address
VU part number
VU approval number
VU serial number
VU year of manufacture
VU software version and installation date.
15.
Block identifier
Sensor serial number
Sensor approval number
Sensor first installation date.
16.
Block identifier
16.1.
Record identifier
Workshop having performed the calibration
Workshop address
Workshop card identification
Workshop card expiry date
Blank line
Calibration date + calibration purpose
VIN
Registering Member State & VRN
Characteristic coefficient of vehicle
Constant of the recording equipment
Effective circumference of wheel tyres
Size of tyres mounted
Speed limiting device setting
Old and new odometer values
The calibration purpose (p) is a numerical code explaining why these calibration parameters were recorded, coded in accordance with the data element CalibrationPurpose.
17.
Block identifier
17.1.
Record identifier
Old date and time
New date and time
Workshop having performed the time adjustment
Workshop address
Workshop card identification
Workshop card expiry date.
18.
Block identifier
Most recent event date time
Most recent fault date time.
19.
Block identifier
Date and time of last OVER SPEEDING CONTROL
Date/time of first over speeding and number of over speeding events since.
20.
20.1.
Block identifier “First over speeding after the last calibration“
20.2.
Block identifier “The 5 most serious over the last 365 days“.
20.3.
Block identifier “The most serious for each of the last 10 days of occurrence“
20.4.
Record identifier
Date time and duration
Max and average speeds, No of similar events this day
Driver's surname
Driver's first name(s)
Driver card identification
20.5.
If no over speeding record exists in a block.
21.
Block identifier
21.1.
Control Place
21.2.
Controller's signature
21.3.
From time
21.4.
To time
21.5.
Driver's signature
“Hand-written information“ Insert enough blank lines above a hand-written item, to be able to actually write the required information or to put a signature.
3. PRINTOUT SPECIFICATIONS
In this chapter the following notation conventions have been used:
Print block or record number N
Print block or record number N repeated as many times as necessary
Print blocks or records X and/or Y as needed, and repeating as many times as necessary
3.1. Driver activities from card daily printout
PRT_007The driver activities from card daily printout shall be in accordance with the following format:
Date and time at which the document is printed
Type of printout
Controller identification (if a control card is inserted in the VU)
Driver identification (from card subject of the printout)
Vehicle identification (vehicle from which printout is taken)
VU identification (VU from which printout is taken)
Last calibration of this VU
Last control the inspected driver has been subject to
Driver activities delimiter
Activities of the driver in order of occurrence
Daily summary delimiter
Places entered in chronological order
Activity totals
Events or faults from card delimiter
Event/Fault records (Last 5 events or faults stored in the card)
Events or faults from VU delimiter
Event/Fault records (Last 5 events or faults stored or on-going in the VU)
Control place
Controller's signature
Driver's signature
3.2. Driver activities from VU daily printout
PRT_008The driver activities from VU daily printout shall be in accordance with the following format:
Date and time at which the document is printed
Type of printout
Card holder identification (for all cards inserted in VU)
Vehicle identification (vehicle from which printout is taken)
VU identification (VU from which printout is taken)
Last calibration of this VU
Last control on this recording equipment
Driver activities delimiter
Driver slot delimiter (slot 1)
Activities in chronological order (driver slot)
Co-driver slot delimiter (slot 2)
Activities in chronological order (co-driver slot)
Daily summary delimiter
Summary of periods without card in driver slot
Places entered in chronological order
Activity totals
Summary of periods without card in co-driver slot
Places entered in chronological order
Activity totals
Summary of activities for a driver both slots included
Places entered by this driver in chronological order
Activity totals for this driver
Events faults delimiter
Event/Fault records (Last 5 events or faults stored or on-going in the VU)
Control place
Controller's signature
From time
(space available for a driver without a card to indicate which periods are relevant to himself)
To time
Driver's signature
3.3. Events and faults from card printout
PRT_009The events and faults from card printout shall be in accordance with the following format:
Date and time at which the document is printed
Type of printout
Controller identification (if a control card is inserted in the VU)
Driver identification (from card subject of the printout)
Vehicle identification (vehicle from which printout is taken)
Events delimiter
Event records (all events stored on the card)
Faults delimiter
Fault records (all faults stored on the card)
Control place
Controller's signature
Driver's signature
3.4. Events and faults from VU printout
PRT_010The events and faults from VU printout shall be in accordance with the following format:
Date and time at which the document is printed
Type of printout
Card holder identification (for all cards inserted in VU)
Vehicle identification (vehicle from which printout is taken)
Events delimiter
Event records (All Events stored or on-going in the VU)
Faults delimiter
Fault records (All Faults stored or on-going in the VU)
Control place
Controller's signature
Driver's signature
3.5. Technical data printout
PRT_011The technical data printout shall be in accordance with the following format:
Date and time at which the document is printed
Type of printout
Card holder identification (for all cards inserted in VU)
Vehicle identification (vehicle from which printout is taken)
VU identification
Sensor identification
Calibration data delimiter
Calibration records (all records available in chronological order)
Time adjustment delimiter
Time adjustment records (all records available from time adjustment and from calibration data records)
Most recent event and Fault recorded in the VU
3.6. Over speeding printout
PRT_012The over speeding printout shall be in accordance with the following format:
Date and time at which the document is printed
Type of printout
Card holder identification (for all cards inserted in VU)
Vehicle identification (vehicle from which printout is taken)
Over speeding control information
Over speeding data identifier
First over speeding after the last calibration
Over speeding data identifier
The 5 most serious over speeding events over the last 365 days
Over speeding data identifier
The most serious over speeding for each of the last 10 days of occurrence
Control place
Controller's signature
Driver's signature.
Appendix 5
DISPLAY
In this appendix the following format notation conventions have been used:
—
characters printed in bold denote plain text to be displayed (display remains in normal character),
—
normal characters denote variables (pictograms or data) to be replaced by their values for displaying:
dd mm yyyy
:
day, month, year,
hh
:
hours,
mm
:
minutes,
D
:
duration pictogram,
EF
:
event or fault pictograms combination,
O
:
mode of operation pictogram.
DIS_001The recording equipment shall display data using the following formats:
Data
Format
Default display
Local time
hh:mm
Mode of operation
O
Information related to the driver
Information related to the co-driver
Out of scope condition opened
Warning display
Exceeding continuous driving time
Event or fault
EF
Other displays
UTC date
UTC dd/mm/yyyy
or
UTC dd.mm.yyyy
time
hh:mm
Driver's continuous driving time and cumulative break time
Co-driver's continuous driving time and cumulative break time
Driver's cumulated driving time for the previous and the current week
Co-driver's cumulated driving time for the previous and the current week
Appendix 6
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
CONTENT
1.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
2.
3.
1. HARDWARE
1.1. Connector
INT_001The downloading/calibration connector shall be a six pin connector, accessible on the front panel without the need to disconnect any part of the recording equipment, and shall comply with the following drawing (all dimensions in millimetres):
The following diagram shows a typical six pin mating plug:
1.2. Contact allocation
INT_002Contacts shall be allocated in accordance with the following table:
Pin
Description
Remark
1
Battery minus
Connected to the battery minus of the vehicle
2
Data communication
K-line (ISO 14 230-1)
3
RxD — Downloading
Data input to recording equipment
4
Input/output signal
Calibration
5
Permanent power output
The voltage range is specified to be that of the vehicle power minus 3V to allow for the voltage drop across the protective circuitry
Output 40 mA
6
TxD — Downloading
Data output from recording equipment
1.3. Block diagram
INT_003The block diagram shall comply with the following:
2. DOWNLOADING INTERFACE
INT_004The downloading interface shall comply to RS232 specifications.
INT_005The downloading interface shall use one start bit, 8 data bits LSB first, one even parity bit and 1 stop bit.
When numerical data composed by more than one byte are transmitted, the most significant byte is transmitted first and the least significant byte last.
INT_006Transmission baud rates shall be adjustable from 9 600 bps to 115 200 bps. Transmission shall be achieved at the highest possible transmission speed, the initial baud rate after a start of communication being set at 9 600 bps.
3. CALIBRATION INTERFACE
INT_007The data communication shall comply to ISO 14 230-1 Road vehicles — Diagnostic systems — Keyword protocol 2000 — Part 1: Physical layer, First edition: 1999.
INT_008The input/output signal shall comply with the following electrical specification:
Parameter
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Remark
Ulow (in)
1,0 V
I = 750 μA
Uhigh (in)
4 V
I = 200 μA
Frequency
4 kHz
Ulow (in)
1,0 V
I = 1 mA
Uhigh (out)
4 V
I = 1 mA
INT_009The input/output signal shall comply with the following timing diagrams:
Sensor signal (out)
Test signal (in)
UTC clock signal (out)
Appendix 7
DATA DOWNLOADING PROTOCOLS
CONTENTS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.2.1.
2.2.2.
2.2.2.1.
2.2.2.2.
2.2.2.3.
2.2.2.4.
2.2.2.5.
2.2.2.6.
2.2.2.7.
2.2.2.8.
2.2.2.9.
2.2.2.10.
2.2.2.11.
2.2.2.12.
2.2.2.13.
2.2.2.14.
2.2.2.15.
2.2.2.16.
2.2.3.
2.2.4.
2.2.5.
2.2.5.1.
2.2.5.2.
2.2.6.
2.2.6.1.
2.2.6.2.
2.2.6.3.
2.2.6.4.
2.2.6.5.
2.3.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
3.4.
3.4.1.
3.4.2.
4.
1. INTRODUCTION
This appendix specifies the procedures to follow in order to perform the different types of data download to an external storage medium, together with the protocols that must be implemented to assure the correct data transfer and the full compatibility of the downloaded data format to allow any controller to inspect these data and be able to control their authenticity and their integrity before analysing them.
1.1. Scope
Data may be downloaded to an ESM:
—
from a vehicle unit by an intelligent dedicated equipment (IDE) connected to the VU,
—
from a tachograph card by an IDE fitted with a card interface device (IFD),
—
from a tachograph card via a vehicle unit by an IDE connected to the VU.
To give the possibility to verify the authenticity and integrity of downloaded data stored on an ESM, data is downloaded with a signature appended in accordance with Appendix 11 Common Security Mechanisms. The source equipment (VU or card) identification and its security certificates (Member State and equipment) are also downloaded. The verifier of the data must possess independently a trusted European public key.
DDP_001Data downloaded during one download session must be stored in the ESM within one file.
1.2. Acronyms and notations
The following acronyms are used in this appendix:
AID
application identifier
ATR
answer to reset
CS
checksum byte
DF
dedicated file
DS_
diagnostic session
EF
elementary file
ESM
external storage medium
FID
file identifier (File ID)
FMT
format byte (first byte of message header)
ICC
integrated circuit card
IDE
intelligent dedicated equipment: The equipment used to perform data downloading to the ESM (e.g. personal computer)
IFD
interface device
KWP
keyword protocol 2000
LEN
length byte (last byte of message header)
PPS
protocol parameter selection
PSO
perform security operation
SID
service identifier
SRC
source byte
TGT
target byte
TLV
tag length value
TREP
transfer response parameter
TRTP
transfer request parameter
VU
vehicle unit.
2. VU DATA DOWNLOADING
2.1. Download procedure
In order to carry on a VU data download, the operator must perform the following operations:
—
insert his tachograph card inside a card slot of the VU (16),
—
connect the IDE to the VU download connector,
—
establish the connection between the IDE and the VU,
—
select on the IDE the data to download and send the request to the VU,
—
close the download session.
2.2. Data download protocol
The protocol is structured on a master-slave basis, with the IDE playing the master role and the VU playing the slave role.
The message structure, types and flow are principally based on the Keyword Protocol 2000 (KWP) (ISO 14230-2 Road vehicles — Diagnostic systems — Keyword protocol 2000 — Part 2: Data link layer).
The application layer is principally based on the current draft to date of ISO 14229-1 (Road vehicles — Diagnostic systems — Part 1: Diagnostic services, version 6 of 22 February 2001).
2.2.1. Message structure
DDP_002All the messages exchanged between the IDE and the VU are formatted with a structure consisting of three parts:
—
header composed by a format byte (FMT), a target byte (TGT), a source byte (SRC) and possibly a length byte (LEN),
—
data field composed by a service identifier byte (SID) and a variable number of data bytes, which can include an optional diagnostic session byte (DS_) or an optional transfer parameter byte (TRTP or TREP).
—
checksum composed by a checksum byte (CS).
Header
Data field
Checksum
FMT
TGT
SRC
LEN
SID
DATA
...
...
...
CS
4 bytes
Max 225 bytes
1 byte
The TGT and SRC byte represent the physical address of the recipient and originator of the message. Values are F0 Hex for the IDE and EE Hex for the VU.
The LEN byte is the length of the data field part.
The checksum byte is the 8 bit sum series modulo 256 of all the bytes of the message excluding the CS itself.
FMT, SID, DS_, TRTP and TREP bytes are defined later in this document.
DDP_003In the case where the data to be carried by the message is longer than the space available in the data field part, the message is actually sent in several submessages. Each submessage bears a header, the same SID, TREP and a 2-byte submessage counter indicating the submessage number within the total message. To enable error checking and abort the IDE acknowledges every submessage. The IDE can accept the submessage, ask for it to be re-transmitted, request the VU to start again or abort the transmission.
DDP_004If the last submessage contains exactly 255 bytes in the data field, a final submessage with an empty (except SID TREP and submessage counter) data field must be appended to show the end of the message.
Example:
Header
SID
TREP
Message
CS
4 Bytes
Longer than 255 Bytes
Will be transmitted as:
Header
SID
TREP
00
01
Submessage 1
CS
4 Bytes
255 Bytes
Header
SID
TREP
00
01
Submessage 2
CS
4 Bytes
255 Bytes
...
Header
SID
TREP
xx
yy
Submessage n
CS
4 Bytes
Less than 255 Bytes
or as:
Header
SID
TREP
00
01
Submessage 1
CS
4 Bytes
255 Bytes
Header
SID
TREP
00
02
Submessage 2
CS
4 Bytes
255 Bytes
...
Header
SID
TREP
xx
yy
Submessage n
CS
4 Bytes
255 Bytes
Header
SID
TREP
xx
yy+1
CS
4 Bytes
4 bytes
2.2.2. Message types
The communication protocol for data download between the VU and the IDE requires the exchange of eight different message types.
The following table summarises these messages.
Message Structure
IDE -> <- VU
Maximum 4 bytes
Header
Maximum 255 bytes
Data
1 byte
CheckSum
FMT
TGT
SRC
LEN
SID
DS_/TRTP
DATA
CS
Start communication request
81
EE
F0
81
E0
Positive response start communication
80
F0
EE
03
C1
8F,EA
9B
Start diagnostic session request
80
EE
F0
02
10
81
F1
Positive response start diagnostic
80
F0
EE
02
50
81
31
Link control service
Verify Baud rate (stage 1)
9 600Bd
80
EE
F0
04
87
01,01,01
EC
19 200Bd
80
EE
F0
04
87
01,01,02
ED
38 400Bd
80
EE
F0
04
87
01,01,03
ED
57 600Bd
80
EE
F0
04
87
01,01,04
EF
115 200Bd
80
EE
F0
04
87
01,01,05
F0
Positive response verify Baud rate
80
F0
EE
02
C7
01
28
Transition baud rate (stage 2)
80
EE
F0
03
87
02,03
ED
Request Upload
80
EE
F0
0A
35
00,00,00,00,00,FF,FF,FF,FF
99
Positive response request upload
80
F0
EE
03
75
00,FF
D5
Transfer data request
Overview
80
F0
EE
02
36
01
97
Activities
80
EE
F0
06
36
02
Date
CS
Events and faults
80
EE
02
F0
36
03
99
Detailed speed
80
EE
F0
02
36
04
9A
Technical data
80
EE
F0
02
36
05
9B
Card download
80
EE
F0
02
36
06
9C
Positive response transfer data
80
F0
EE
Len
76
TREP
Data
CS
Request transfer exit
80
EE
F0
01
37
96
Positive response request transfer exit
80
F0
EE
01
77
D6
Stop communication request
80
EE
F0
01
82
E1
Positive response stop communication
80
F0
EE
01
C2
21
Acknowledge sub message
80
EE
F0
Len
83
Data
CS
Negative responses
General reject
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
10
CS
Service not supported
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
11
CS
Subfunction not supported
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
12
CS
Incorrect message length
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
13
CS
Conditions not correct or request sequence error
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
22
CS
Request out of range
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
31
CS
Upload not accepted
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
50
CS
Response pending
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
78
CS
Data not available
80
F0
EE
03
7F
Sid Req
FA
CS
Notes:
—
Sid Req = the Sid of the corresponding request.
—
TREP = the TRTP of the corresponding request.
—
Dark cells denotes that nothing is transmitted.
—
The term upload (as seen from the IDE) is used for compatibility with ISO 14229. It means the same as download (as seen from the VU).
—
Potential 2-byte submessage counters are not shown in this Table.
2.2.2.1. Start communication request (SID 81)
DDP_005This message is issued by the IDE to establish the communication link with the VU. Initial communications are always performed at 9 600 baud (until baud rate is eventually changed using the appropriate Link control services).
2.2.2.2. Positive response start communication (SID C1)
DDP_006This message is issued by the VU to answer positively to a start communication request. It includes the 2 key bytes ′8F′ ′EA′ indicating that the unit supports protocol with header including target source and length information.
2.2.2.3. Start diagnostic session request (SID 10)
DDP_007The start diagnostic session request message is issued by the IDE in order to request a new diagnostic session with the VU. The sub function 'default session' (81 Hex) indicates a standard diagnostic session is to be opened.
2.2.2.4. Positive response start diagnostic (SID 50)
DDP_008The positive response start diagnostic message is sent by the VU to answer positively to Diagnostic Session Request.
2.2.2.5. Link control service (SID 87)
DDP_052The link control service is used by the IDE to initiate a change in baud rate. This takes place in two steps. In step one the IDE proposes the baud rate change, indicating the new rate. On receipt of a positive message from the VU the IDE sends out confirmation of the baud rate change to the VU (step two). The IDE then changes to the new baud rate. After receipt of the confirmation the VU changes to the new baud rate
2.2.2.6. Link control positive response (SID C7)
DDP_053The link control positive response is issued by the VU to answer positively to Link Control Service request (step one). Note that no response is given to the confirmation request (step two).
2.2.2.7. Request upload (SID 35)
DDP_009The request upload message is issued by the IDE to specify to the VU that a download operation is requested. To meet the requirements of ISO14229 data is included covering address, the size and format details for the data requested. As these are not known to the IDE prior to a download, the memory address is set to 0, format is unencrypted and uncompressed and the memory size is set to the maximum.
2.2.2.8. Positive response request upload (SID 75)
DDP_010The positive response request upload message is sent by the VU to indicate to the IDE that the VU is ready to download data. To meet the requirements of ISO 14229 data is included in this positive response message, indicating to the IDE that further positive response transfer data messages will include 00FF hex bytes maximum.
2.2.2.9. Transfer data request (SID 36)
DDP_011The transfer data request is sent by the IDE to specify to the VU the type of data that are to be downloaded. A one byte transfer request parameter (TRTP) indicates the type of transfer.
There are six types of data transfer:
—
overview (TRTP 01),
—
activities of a specified date (TRTP 02),
—
events and faults (TRTP 03),
—
detailed speed (TRTP 04),
—
technical data (TRTP 05),
—
card download (TRTP 06).
DDP_054It is mandatory for the IDE to request the overview data transfer (TRTP 01) during a download session as this only will ensure that the VU certificates are recorded within the downloaded file (and allow for verification of digital signature).
In the second case (TRTP 02) the transfer data request message includes the indication of the calendar day TimeReal format) to be downloaded.
2.2.2.10. Positive response transfer data (SID 76)
DDP_012The positive response transfer data is sent by the VU in response to the transfer data request. The message contains the requested data, with a transfer response parameter (TREP) corresponding to the TRTP of the request.
DDP_055In the first case (TREP 01), the VU will send data helping the IDE operator to choose the data he wants to download further. The information contained within this message is:
—
security certificates,
—
vehicle identification,
—
VU current date and time,
—
minimum and maximum downloadable date (VU data),
—
indication of cards presence in the VU,
—
previous download to a company,
—
company locks,
—
previous controls.
2.2.2.11. Request transfer exit (SID 37)
DDP_013The request transfer exit message is sent by the IDE to inform the VU that the download session is terminated.
2.2.2.12. Positive response request transfer exit (SID 77)
DDP_014The positive response request transfer exit message is sent by the VU to acknowledge the Request Transfer Exit.
2.2.2.13. Stop communication request (SID 82)
DDP_015The stop communication request message is sent by the IDE to disconnect the communication link with the VU.
2.2.2.14. Positive response stop communication (SID C2)
DDP_016The positive response stop communication message is sent by the VU to acknowledge the stop communication request.
2.2.2.15. Acknowledge submessage (SID 83)
DDP_017The acknowledge sub message is sent by the IDE to confirm receipt of each part of a message that is being transmitted as several submessages. The data field contains the SID received from the VU and a 2-byte code as follows:
—
MsgC +1 Acknowledges correct receipt of submessage number MsgC.
Request from the IDE to the VU to send next submessage,
—
MsgC indicates a problem with the receipt of submessage number MsgC.
Request from the IDE to the VU to send the submessage again,
—
FFFF requests termination of the message.
This can be used by the IDE to end the transmission of the VU message for any reason.
The last submessage of a message (LEN byte < 255) may be acknowledged using any of these codes or not acknowledged.
The VU responses that will consist of several sub messages are:
—
positive response transfer Data (SID 76)
2.2.2.16. Negative Response (SID 7F)
DDP_018The negative response message is sent by the VU in response to the above request messages when the VU cannot satisfy the request. The data fields of the message contains the SID of the response (7F), the SID of the request, and a code specifying the reason of the negative response. The following codes are available:
—
10 general reject
The action cannot be performed for a reason not covered below
—
11 service not supported
The SID of the request is not understood
—
12 sub function not supported
The DS_ or TRTP of the request is not understood, or there are no further sub messages to be transmitted
—
13 incorrect message length
The length of the received message is wrong
—
22 conditions not correct or request sequence error
The required service is not active or the sequence of request messages is not correct
—
31 request out of range
The request parameter record (data field) is not valid
—
50 upload not accepted
The request cannot be performed (VU in a non appropriate mode of operation or internal fault of the VU)
—
78 response pending
The action requested cannot be completed in time and the VU is not ready to accept another request
—
FA data not available
The data object of a data transfer request are not available in the VU (e.g. no card is inserted, )
2.2.3. Message flow
A typical message flow during a normal data download procedure is the following:
IDE
FE
Start communication request
Positive response
Start diagnostic service request
Positive response
Request upload
Positive response
Transfer data request overview
Positive response transfer
Data request #2
Positive response #1
Acknowledge submessage #1
Positive response #2
Acknowledge submessage #2
Positive response #m
Acknowledge submessage #m
Positive response (Data field < 255 Bytes)
Acknowledge submessage (optional)
...
Transfer data request #n
Positive response
Request transfer exit
Positive response
Stop communication request
Positive response
2.2.4. Timing
DDP_019During normal operation the timing parameters shown in the following figure are relevant:
Where:
P1
=
Inter byte time for VU response.
P2
=
Time between end of IDE request and start of VU response, or between end of IDE acknowledge and start of next VU response.
P3
=
Time between end of VU response and start of new IDE request, or between end of VU response and start of IDE acknowledge, or between end of IDE request and start of new IDE request if VU fails to respond.
P4
=
Inter byte time for IDE request.
P5
=
Extended value of P3 for card downloading.
The allowed values for the timing parameters are showed in the following table (KWP extended timing parameters set, used in case of physical addressing for faster communication).
Timing
Parameter
Lower limit
Value (ms)
Upper limit value (ms)
P1
0
20
P2
20
1 000 (17)
P3
10
5 000
P4
5
20
P5
10
20 minutes
2.2.5. Error handling
If an error occurs during the message exchange, the message flow scheme is modified depending on which equipment has detected the error and on the message generating the error.
In Figure 2 and Figure 3 the error handling procedures for the VU and the IDE are respectively shown.
2.2.5.1. Start communication phase
DDP_020If the IDE detects an error during the Start Communication phase, either by timing or by the bit stream, then it will wait for a period P3 min before issuing again the request.
DDP_021If the VU detects an error in the sequence coming from the IDE, it shall send no response and wait for another Start Communication Request message within a period P3 max.
2.2.5.2. Communication phase
Two different error handling areas can be defined:
1.
The VU detects an IDE transmission error.
DDP_022For every received message the VU shall detect timing errors, byte format errors (e.g. start and stop bit violations) and frame errors (wrong number of bytes received, wrong checksum byte).
DDP_023If the VU detects one of the above errors, then it sends no response and ignores the message received.
DDP_024The VU may detect other errors in the format or content of the received message (e.g. message not supported) even if the message satisfies the length and checksum requirements; in such a case, the VU shall respond to the IDE with a Negative Response message specifying the nature of the error.
2.
The IDE detects a VU transmission error.
DDP_025For every received message the IDE shall detect timing errors, byte format errors (e.g. start and stop bit violations) and frame errors (wrong number of bytes received, wrong checksum byte).
DDP_026The IDE shall detect sequence errors, e.g. incorrect sub message counter increments in successive received messages.
DDP_027If the IDE detects an error or there was no response from the VU within a P2max period, the request message will be sent again for a maximum of three transmissions in total. For the purposes of this error detection a submessage acknowledge will be considered as a request to the VU.
DDP_028The IDE shall wait at least for a period of P3min before beginning each transmission; the wait period shall be measured from the last calculated occurrence of a stop bit after the error was detected.
2.2.6. Response message content
This paragraph specifies the content of the data fields of the various positive response messages.
Data elements are defined in Appendix 1 data dictionary.
2.2.6.1. Positive response transfer data overview
DDP_029The data field of the “positive response transfer data overview“ message shall provide the following data in the following order under the SID 76 Hex, the TREP 01 Hex and appropriate sub message splitting and counting:
2.2.6.2. Positive response transfer data activities
DDP_030The data field of the “positive response transfer data activities“ message shall provide the following data in the following order under the SID 76 Hex, the TREP 02 Hex and appropriate sub message splitting and counting:
2.2.6.3. Positive response transfer data events and faults
DDP_031The data field of the “positive response transfer data events and faults“ message shall provide the following data in the following order under the SID 76 Hex, the TREP 03 Hex and appropriate sub message splitting and counting:
2.2.6.4. Positive response transfer data detailed speed
DDP_032The data field of the “positive response transfer data detailed speed“ message shall provide the following data in the following order under the SID 76 Hex, the TREP 04 Hex and appropriate sub message splitting and countering:
2.2.6.5. Positive response transfer data technical data
DDP_033The data field of the “positive response transfer data technical data“ message shall provide the following data in the following order under the SID 76 Hex, the TREP 05 Hex and appropriate sub message splitting and counting:
2.3. ESM File storage
DDP_034When a download session has included a VU data transfer, the IDE shall store within one physical file all data received from the VU during the download session within positive response transfer data messages. Data stored excludes message headers, sub-message counters, empty sub-messages and checksums but include the SID and TREP (of the first sub-message only if several sub-messages).
3. TACHOGRAPH CARDS DOWNLOADING PROTOCOL
3.1. Scope
This paragraph describes the direct card data downloading of a tachograph card to an IDE. The IDE is not part of the secure environment; therefore no authentication between the card and the IDE is performed.
3.2. Definitions
Download session : Each time a download of the ICC data is performed. The session covers the complete procedure from the reset of the ICC by an IFD until the deactivation of the ICC (withdraw of the card or next reset).
Signed data file : A file from the ICC. The file is transferred to the IFD in plain text. On the ICC the file is hashed and signed and the signature is transferred to the IFD.
3.3. Card downloading
DDP_035The download of a tachograph card includes the following steps:
—
download the common information of the card in the EFs ICC and IC. This information is optional and is not secured with a digital signature,
—
Download the EFs Card_Certificate and CA_Certificate. This information is not secured with a digital signature,
It is mandatory to download these files for each download session.
—
download the other application data EFs (within Tachograph DF) except EF Card_Download. This information is secured with a digital signature,
—
it is mandatory to download at least the EFs Application_Identification and ID for each download session,
—
when downloading a driver card it is also mandatory to download the following EFs:
—
Events_Data,
—
Faults_Data,
—
Driver_Activity_Data,
—
Vehicles_Used,
—
Places,
—
Control_Activity_Data,
—
Specific_Conditions.
—
When downloading a driver card, update the LastCardDownload date in EF Card_Download,
—
When downloading a workshop card, reset the calibration counter in EF Card_Download.
3.3.1. Initialisation sequence
DDP_036The IDE shall initiate the sequence as follows:
Card
Direction
IDE/IFD
Meaning/Remarks
Hardware reset
ATR
It is optional to use PPS to switch to a higher baudrate as long as the ICC supports it.
3.3.2. Sequence for unsigned data files
DDP_037The sequence to download the ICC, IC, Card_Certificate and CA_Certificate is as follows:
Card
Direction
IDE/IFD
Meaning/Remarks
Select file
Select file select by file identifiers
OK
Read Binary
If the file contains more data than the buffer size of the reader or the card the command has to be repeated until the complete file is read.
File data
OK
Store data to ESM
according to 3.4, (Data storage format)
Note: Before selecting the Card_Certificate EF, the Tachograph Application must be selected (selection by AID).
3.3.3. Sequence for signed data files
DDP_038The following sequence shall be used for each of the following files that has to be downloaded with their signature:
Card
Direction
IDE/IFD
Meaning/Remarks
Select File
OK
Perform hash of File
Calculates the hash value over the data content of the selected file using the prescribed hash algorithm in accordance with Appendix 11. This command is not an ISO-Command.
Calculate hash of file and store hash value temporarily
OK
Read Binary
If the file contains more data than the buffer of the reader or the card can hold, the command has to be repeated until the complete file is read.
File Data
OK
Store received data to ESM
according to 3.4, (Data storage format)
PSO: Compute digital signature
Perform security operation “compute digital signature“ using the temporarily stored hash value
Signature
OK
Append data to the previous stored data on the ESM
according to 3.4, (Data storage format)
3.3.4. Sequence for resetting the calibration counter
DDP_039The sequence to reset the NoOfCalibrationsSinceDownload counter in the EF Card_Download in a workshop card is the following:
Card
Direction
IDE/IFD
Meaning/Remarks
Select File EF Card_Download
Select by file identifiers
OK
Update Binary
NoOfCalibrationsSinceDownload = ′00 00′
Resets card download number
OK
3.4. Data storage format
3.4.1. Introduction
DDP_040The downloaded data has to be stored according to the following conditions:
—
the data shall be stored transparent. This means that the order of the bytes as well as the order of the bits inside the byte that are transferred from the card has to be preserved during storage,
—
all files of the card downloaded within a download session are stored in one file on the ESM.
3.4.2. File format
DDP_041The file format is a concatenation of several TLV objects.
DDP_042The tag for an EF shall be the FID plus the appendix “00“.
DDP_043The tag of an EF's signature shall be the FID of the file plus the appendix “01“.
DDP_044The length is a two byte value. The value defines the number of bytes in the value field. The value “FF FF“ in the length field is reserved for future use.
DDP_045When a file is not downloaded nothing related to the file shall be stored (no tag and no zero length).
DDP_046A signature shall be stored as the next TLV object directly after the TLV object that contains the data of the file.
Definition
Meaning
Length
FID (2 Bytes) || “00“
Tag for EF (FID)
3 Bytes
FID (2 Bytes) || “01“
Tag for Signature of EF(FID)
3 Bytes
xx xx
Length of value field
2 Bytes
Example of data in a download file on an ESM:
Tag
Length
Value
00 02 00
00 11
Data of EF ICC
C1 00 00
00 C2
Data of EF Card_Certificate
05 05 00
0A 2E
Data of EF Vehicles_Used
05 05 01
00 80
Signature of EF Vehicles_Used
4. DOWNLOADING A TACHOGRAPH CARD VIA A VEHICLE UNIT
DDP_047The VU must allow for downloading the content of a driver card inserted to a connected IDE.
DDP_048The IDE shall send a “transfer data request card download“ message to the VU to initiate this mode (see 2.2.2.9).
DDP_049The VU shall then download the whole card, file by file, in accordance with the card downloading protocol defined in paragraph 3, and forward all data received from the card to the IDE within the appropriate TLV file format (see 3.4.2) and encapsulated within a “positive response transfer data“ message.
DDP_050The IDE shall retrieve card data from the “positive response transfer data“ message (stripping all headers, SIDs, TREPs, submessage counters, and checksums) and store them within one physical file as described in paragraph 2.3.
DDP_051The VU shall then, as applicable, update the Control_Activity_Data or the Card_Download file of the driver card.
Appendix 8
CALIBRATION PROTOCOL
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
4.
4.1.
4.2.
4.2.1.
4.2.2.
4.2.3.
4.3.
4.3.1.
4.3.2.
5.
5.1.
5.1.1.
5.1.2.
5.1.3.
5.2.
5.2.1.
5.2.2.
5.2.3.
6.
6.1.
6.1.1.
6.1.2.
6.1.3.
6.2.
6.2.1
6.2.2.
6.2.3.
7.
7.1.
7.1.1.
7.1.2.
7.1.3.
8.
8.1.
8.2.
1. INTRODUCTION
This appendix describes how data is exchanged between a vehicle unit and a tester via the K-line which forms part of the calibration interface described in Appendix 6. It also describes control of the input/output signal line on the calibration connector.
Establishing K-line communications is described in Section 4 “Communication Services“.
This appendix uses the idea of diagnostic “sessions“ to determine the scope of K-line control under different conditions. The default session is the “StandardDiagnosticSession“ where all data can be read from a vehicle unit but no data can be written to a vehicle unit.
Selection of the diagnostic session is described in Section 5 “Management Services“.
CPR_001The “ECUProgrammingSession“ allows data entry into the vehicle unit. In the case of entry of calibration data (requirements 097 and 098), the vehicle unit must, in addition be in the CALIBRATION mode of operation.
Data transfer via K-line is described in Section 6 “Data Transmission Services“. Formats of data transferred are detailed in Section 8 “dataRecords formats“.
CPR_002The “ECUAdjustmentSession“ allows the selection of the I/O mode of the calibration I/O signal line via the K-line interface. Control of the calibration I/O signal line is described in section 7 “Control of Test Pulses — Input/Output Control functional unit“.
CPR_003Throughout this document the address of the tester is referred to as ′tt′. Although there may be preferred addresses for testers, the VU shall respond correctly to any tester address. The physical address of the VU is 0xEE.
2. TERMS, DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES
The protocols, messages and error codes are principally based on the current draft to date of ISO 14229-1 (Road vehicles — Diagnostic systems — Part 1: Diagnostic services, version 6 of 22 February 2001).
Byte encoding and hexadecimal values are used for the service identifiers, the service requests and responses, and the standard parameters.
The term “tester“ refers to the equipment used to enter programming/calibration data into the VU.
The terms “client“ and “server“ refer to the tester and the VU respectively.
The term ECU means “Electronic Control Unit“ and refers to the VU.
References:
ISO 14230-2
:
Road Vehicles — Diagnostic Systems — Keyword Protocol 2000- Part 2: Data Link Layer. First edition: 1999. Vehicles — Diagnostic Systems.
3. OVERVIEW OF SERVICES
3.1. Services available
The following table provides an overview of the services that will be available in the recording equipment and are defined in this document.
CPR_004The table indicates the services that are available in an enabled diagnostic session.
—
The first column lists the services that are available,
—
the second column includes the section number in this appendix where of service is further defined,
—
the third column assigns the assigns the service identifier values for request messages,
—
the fourth column specifies the services of the “StandardDiagnosticSession“ (SD) which must be implemented in each VU,
—
the fifth column specifies the services of the “ECUAdjustmentSession“ (ECUAS) which must be implemented to allow control of the I/O signal line in the front panel calibration connector of the VU,
—
the sixth column specifies the services of the “ECUProgrammingSession“ (ECUPS) which must be implemented to allow for programming of parameters in the VU.
Table 1
Service Identifier value summary table
Diagnostic Service Name
Section No
SId Req.Value
Diagnostic Sessions
SD
ECUAS
ECUPS
StartCommunication
4.1
81
(18)
(18)
(18)
StopCommunication
4.2
82
(18)
TesterPresent
4.3
3E
(18)
(18)
(18)
StartDiagnosticSession
5.1
10
(18)
(18)
(18)
SecurityAccess
5.2
27
(18)
(18)
(18)
ReadDataByIdentifier
6.1
22
(18)
(18)
(18)
WriteDataByIdentifier
6.2
2E
(18)
InputOutputControlByIdentifier
7.1
2F
(18)
3.2. Response codes
Response codes are defined for each service.
4. COMMUNICATION SERVICES
Some services are necessary to establish and maintain communication. They do not appear on the application layer. The services available are detailed in the following table:
Table 2
Communication services
Service name
Description
StartCommunication
The client requests to start a communication session with a server(s)
StopCommunication
The client requests to stop the current communication session
TesterPresent
The client indicates to the server that it is still present
CPR_005The StartCommunication Service is used for starting a communication. In order to perform any service, communication must be initialised and the communication parameters need to be appropriate for the desired mode.
4.1. StartCommunication Service
CPR_006Upon receiving a StartCommunication indication primitive, the VU shall check if the requested communication link can be initialised under the present conditions. Valid conditions for the initialisation of a communication link are described in document ISO 14230-2.
CPR_007Then the VU shall perform all actions necessary to initialise the communication link and send a StartCommunication response primitive with the positive response parameters selected.
CPR_008If a VU that is already initialised (and has entered any diagnostic session) receives a new StartCommunication request (e.g. due to error recovery in the tester) the request shall be accepted and the VU shall be re-initialised.
CPR_009If the communication link cannot be initialised for any reason, the VU shall continue operating as it was immediately prior to the attempt to initialise the communication link.
CPR_010The StartCommunication Request message must be physically addressed.
CPR_011Initialising the VU for services is performed through a “fast initialisation“ method,
—
there is a bus-idle time prior to any activity,
—
the tester then sends an initialisation pattern,
—
all information which is necessary to establish communication is contained in the response of the VU.
CPR_012After completion of the initialisation,
—
all communication parameters are set to values defined in Table 4 according to the key bytes,
—
the VU is waiting for the first request of the tester,
—
the VU is in the default diagnostic mode, i.e. StandardDiagnosticSession,
—
the calibration I/O signal line is in the default state, i.e. disabled state.
CPR_014The data rate on the K-line shall be 10 400 Baud.
CPR_016The fast initialisation is started by the tester transmitting a wake-up pattern (Wup) on the K-line. The pattern begins after the idle time on K-line with a low time of Tinil. The tester transmits the first bit of the StartCommunication Service after a time of Twup following the first falling edge.
CPR_017The timing values for the fast initialisation and communications in general are detailed in the tables below. There are different possibilities for the idle time:
—
first transmission after power on, Tidle = 300 ms.
—
after completion of a StopCommunication Service, Tidle = P3 min.
—
after stopping communication by time-out P3 max, Tidle = O.
Table 3
Timing values for fast initialisation
Parameter
minimum value
maximum value
Tinil
25 ± 1 ms
24 ms
26 ms
Twup
50 ± 1 ms
49 ms
51 ms
Table 4
Communication timing values
Timing parameter
Parameter description
Lower limit values (ms)
Upper limit values (ms)
minimum
maximum
P1
Inter byte time for VU response
0
20
P2
Time between tester request and VU response or two VU responses
25
250
P3
Time between end of VU responses and start of new tester request
55
5 000
P4
Inter byte time for tester request
5
20
CPR_018The message format for fast initialisation is detailed in the following tables:
Table 5
StartCommunication request message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
81
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
StartCommunication Request Service
81
SCR
#5
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 6
StartCommunication positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
StartCommunication Positive Response Service Id
C1
SCRPR
#6
Key byte 1
EA
KB1
#7
Key byte 2
8F
KB2
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
CPR_019There is no negative response to the StartCommunication Request message, if there is no positive response message to be transmitted then the VU is not initialised, nothing is transmitted and it remains in its normal operation.
4.2. StopCommunication service
4.2.1. Message description
The purpose of this communication layer service is to terminate a communication session.
CPR_020Upon receiving a StopCommunication indication primitive, the VU shall check if the current conditions allow to terminate this communication. In this case the VU shall perform all actions necessary to terminate this communication.
CPR_021If it is possible to terminate the communication, the VU shall issue a StopCommunication response primitive with the Positive Response parameters selected, before the communication is terminated.
CPR_022If the communication cannot be terminated by any reason, the VU shall issue a StopCommunication response primitive with the Negative Response parameter selected.
CPR_023If time -out of P3max is detected by the VU, the communication shall be terminated without any response primitive being issued.
4.2.2. Message format
CPR_024The message formats for the StopCommunication primitives are detailed in the following tables:
Table 7
StopCommunication request message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
01
LEN
#5
StopCommunication Request Service Id
82
SPR
#6
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 8
StopCommunication positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
01
LEN
#5
StopCommunication Positive Response Service
C2
SPRPR
#6
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 9
StopCommunication negative response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
negative Response Service Id
7F
NR
#6
StopCommunication Request Service Identification
82
SPR
#7
responseCode = generalReject
10
RC_GR
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
4.2.3. Parameter definition
This service does not require any parameter definition.
4.3. TesterPresent service
4.3.1. Message description
The TesterPresent service is used by the tester to indicate to the server that it is still present, in order to prevent the server from automatically returning to normal operation and possibly stopping the communication. This service, sent periodically, keeps the diagnostic session/communication active by resetting the P3 timer each time a request for this service is received.
4.3.2. Message format
CPR_079The message formats for the TesterPresent primitives are detailed in the following tables.
Table 10
TesterPresent request message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
02
LEN
#5
TesterPresent Request Service Id
3E
TP
#6
Sub Function = responseRequired = [yes
01
RESPREQ_Y
no]
02
RESPREQ_NO
#7
Checksum
00-FF
CS
CPR_080If the responseRequired parameter is set to “yes“, then the server shall respond with the following positive response message. If set to “no“, then no response is sent by the server.
Table 11
TesterPresent positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
01
LEN
#5
TesterPresent Positive Response Service Id
7E
TPPR
#6
Checksum
00-FF
CS
CPR_081The service shall support the following negative responses codes:
Table 12
TesterPresent negative response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
negative Response Service Id
7F
NR
#6
TesterPresent Request Service Identification
3E
TP
#7
responseCode = [SubFunctionNotSupported-InvalidFormat
12
RC_SFNS_IF
incorrectMessageLength]
13
RC_IML
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
5. MANAGEMENT SERVICES
The services available are detailed in the following table:
Table 13
Management services
Service name
Description
StartDiagnosticSession
The client requests to start a diagnostic session with a VU
SecurityAccess
The client requests access to functions restricted to authorised users
5.1. StartDiagnosticSession service
5.1.1. Message description
CPR_025The service StartDiagnosticSession is used to enable different diagnostic sessions in the server. A diagnostic session enables a specific set of services according to Table 17. A session can enable vehicle manufacturer specific services which are not part of this document. Implementation rules shall conform to the following requirements:
—
there shall be always exactly one diagnostic session active in the VU,
—
the VU shall always start the StandardDiagnosticSession when powered up. If no other diagnostic session is started, then the StandardDiagnosticSession shall be running as long as the VU is powered,
—
if a diagnostic session which is already running has been requested by the tester, then the VU shall send a positive response message,
—
whenever the tester requests a new diagnostic session, the VU shall first send a StartDiagnosticSession positive response message before the new session becomes active in the VU. If the VU is not able to start the requested new diagnostic session, then it shall respond with a StartDiagnosticSession negative response message, and the current session shall continue.
CPR_026The diagnostic session shall only be started if communication has been established between the client and the VU.
CPR_027The timing parameters defined in Table 4 shall be active after a successful StartDiagnosticSession with the diagnosticSession parameter set to “StandardDiagnosticSession“ in the request message if another diagnostic session was previously active.
5.1.2. Message format
CPR_028The message formats for the StartDiagnosticSession primitives are detailed in the following tables:
Table 14
StartDiagnosticSession request message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
02
LEN
#5
StartDiagnosticSession request service Id
10
STDS
#6
diagnosticSession = (one value from Table 17)
xx
DS_…
#7
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 15
StartDiagnosticSession positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
02
LEN
#5
StartDiagnosticSession Positive Response Service Id
50
STDSPR
#6
DiagnosticSession = (same value as in byte #6 Table 14)
xx
DS_…
#7
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 16
StartDiagnosticSession negative response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
Negative response service Id
7F
NR
#6
StartDiagnosticSession request service Id
10
STDS
#7
ResponseCode = (subFunctionNotSupported (19)
12
RC_SFNS
incorrectMessageLength (20)
13
RC_IML
conditionsNotCorrect (21))
22
RC_CNC
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
5.1.3. Parameter definition
CPR_029The parameter diagnosticSession (DS_) is used by the StartDiagnosticSession service to select the specific behaviour of the server(s). The following diagnostic sessions are specified in this document:
Table 17
Definition of diagnosticSession values
Hex
Description
Mnemonic
81
StandardDiagnosticSession
This diagnostic session enables all services specified in Table 1 column 4 “SD“. These services allow reading of data from a server (VU). This diagnostic Session is active after the initialisation has been successfully completed between client (tester) and server (VU). This diagnostic session may be overwritten by other diagnostic sessions specified in this section.
SD
85
ECUProgrammingSession
This diagnostic session enables all services specified in Table 1 column 6 “ECUPS“. These services support the memory programming of a server (VU) This diagnostic session may be overwritten by other diagnostic sessions specified in this section.
ECUPS
87
ECUAdjustmentSession
This diagnostic session enables all services specified in Table 1 column 5 “ECUAS“. These services support the input/output control of a server (VU). This diagnostic session may be overwritten by other diagnostic sessions specified in this section.
ECUAS
5.2. SecurityAccess service
Writing of calibration data or access to the calibration input/output line is not possible unless the VU is in CALIBRATION mode. In addition to insertion of a valid workshop card into the VU, it is necessary to enter the appropriate PIN into the VU before access to the CALIBRATION mode is granted.
The SecurityAccess service provides a means to enter the PIN and to indicate to the tester whether or not the VU is in CALIBRATION mode.
It is acceptable that the PIN may be entered through alternative methods.
5.2.1. Message description
The SecurityAccess service consists of a SecurityAccess “requestSeed“ message, eventually followed by a SecurityAccess “sendKey“ message. The SecurityAccess service must be carried out after the StartDiagnosticSession service.
CPR_033The tester shall use the SecurityAccess "requestSeed" message to check if the vehicle unit is ready to accept a PIN.
CPR_034If the vehicle unit is already in CALIBRATION mode, it shall answer the request by sending a “seed“ of 0x0000 using the service SecurityAccess Positive Response.
CPR_035If the vehicle unit is ready to accept a PIN for verification by a workshop card, it shall answer the request by sending a “seed“ greater than 0x0000 using the service SecurityAccess positive response.
CPR_036If the vehicle unit is not ready to accept a PIN from the tester, either because the workshop card inserted is not valid, or because no workshop card has been inserted, or because the vehicle unit expects the PIN from another method, it shall answer the request with a negative response with a response code set to conditionsNotCorrectOrRequestSequenceError.
CPR_037The tester shall then, eventually, use the SecurityAccess “sendKey“ message to forward a PIN to the Vehicle Unit. To allow time for the card authentication process to take place, the VU shall use the negative response code requestCorrectlyReceived-ResponsePending to extend the time to respond. However, the maximum time to respond shall not exceed five minutes. As soon as the requested service has been completed, the VU shall send a positive response message or negative response message with a response code different from this one. The negative response code requestCorrectlyReceived-ResponsePending may be repeated by the VU until the requested service is completed and the final response message is sent.
CPR_038The vehicle unit shall answer to this request using the service SecurityAccess Positive Response only when in CALIBRATION mode.
CPR_039In the following cases, the vehicle unit shall answer to this request with a Negative Response with a response code set to:
—
subFunctionNot supported: invalid format for the subfunction parameter (accessType),
—
conditionsNotCorrectOrRequestSequenceError: vehicle unit not ready to accept a PIN entry,
—
invalidKey: PIN not valid and number of PIN checks attempts not exceeded,
—
exceededNumberOfAttempts: PIN not valid and number of PIN checks attempts exceeded,
—
generalReject: Correct PIN but mutual authentication with workshop card failed.
5.2.2. Message format — SecurityAccess — requestSeed
CPR_040The message formats for the SecurityAccess “requestSeed“ primitives are detailed in the following tables:
Table 18
SecurityAccess request — requestSeed message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
02
LEN
#5
SecurityAccess request service Id
27
SA
#6
accessType — requestSeed
7D
AT_RSD
#7
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 19
SecurityAccess — requestSeed positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
04
LEN
#5
SecurityAccess positive response service Id
67
SAPR
#6
accessType — requestSeed
7D
AT_RSD
#7
Seed High
00-FF
SEEDH
#8
Seed Low
00-FF
SEEDL
#9
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 20
SecurityAccess negative response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
negativeResponse Service Id
7F
NR
#6
SecurityAccess request service Id
27
SA
#7
responseCode = (conditionsNotCorrectOrRequestSequenceError
22
RC_CNC
incorrectMessageLength)
13
RC_IML
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
5.2.3. Message format — SecurityAccess — sendKey
CPR_041The message formats for the SecurityAccess “sendKey“ primitives are detailed in the following tables:
Table 21
SecurityAccess request — sendKey message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
m+2
LEN
#5
SecurityAccess Request Service Id
27
SA
#6
accessType — sendKey
7E
AT_SK
#7 to #m+6
Key #1 (High)
xx
KEY
…
…
Key #m (low, m must be a minimum of 4, and a maximum of 8)
xx
#m+7
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 22
SecurityAccess — sendKey positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
02
LEN
#5
SecurityAccess positive response service Id
67
SAPR
#6
accessType — sendKey
7E
AT_SK
#7
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 23
SecurityAccess negative response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
NegativeResponse Service Id
7F
NR
#6
SecurityAccess request service Id
27
SA
#7
ResponseCode = (generalReject
10
RC_GR
subFunctionNotSupported
12
RC_SFNS
incorrectMessageLength
13
RC_IML
conditionsNotCorrectOrRequestSequenceError
22
RC_CNC
invalidKey
35
RC_IK
exceededNumberOfAttempts
36
RC_ENA
requestCorrectlyReceived-ResponsePending)
78
RC_RCR_RP
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
6. DATA TRANSMISSION SERVICES
The services available are detailed in the following table:
Table 24
Data transmission services
Service name
Description
ReadDataByIdentifier
The client requests the transmission of the current value of a record with access by recordDataIdentifier
WriteDataByIdentifier
The client requests to write a record accessed by recordDataIdentifier
6.1. ReadDataByIdentifier service
6.1.1. Message description
CPR_050The ReadDataByIdentifier service is used by the client to request data record values from a server. The data are identified by a recordDataIdentifier. It is the VU manufacturer's responsibility that the server conditions are met when performing this service.
6.1.2. Message format
CPR_051The message formats for the ReadDataByIdentifier primitives are detailed in the following tables:
Table 25
ReadDataByIdentifier request message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
ReadDataByIdentifier Request Service Id
22
RDBI
#6 and #7
recordDataIdentifier = (a valor from Table 28)
xxxx
RDI_…
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 26
ReadDataByIdentifier positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
m+3
LEN
#5
ReadDataByIdentifier Positive Response Service Id
62
RDBIPR
#6 and #7
recordDataIdentifier = (the same value as bytes #6 and #7 Table 25)
xxxx
RDI_…
#8 to #m+7
dataRecord() = (data#1
xx
DREC_DATA1
:
:
:
data#m)
xx
DREC_DATAm
#m+8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 27
ReadDataByIdentifier negative response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
NegativeResponse Service Id
7F
NR
#6
ReadDataByIdentifier Request Service Id
22
RDBI
#7
ResponseCode = (requestOutOfRange
31
RC_ROOR
incorrectMessageLength
13
RC_IML
conditionsNotCorrect)
22
RC_CNC
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
6.1.3. Parameter definition
CPR_052The parameter recordDataIdentifier (RDI_) in the ReadDataByIdentifier request message identifies a data record.
CPR_053recordDataIdentifier values defined by this document are shown in the table below.
The recordDataIdentifier table consists of four columns and multiple lines.
—
The first column (Hex) includes the “hex value“ assigned to the recordDataIdentifier specified in the third column.
—
The second column (Data element) specifies the data element of Appendix 1 on which the recordDataIdentifier is based (transcoding is sometimes necessary).
—
The third column (Description) specifies the corresponding recordDataIdentifier name.
—
The fourth column (Mnemonic) specifies the mnemonic of this recordDataIdentifier.
Table 28
Definition of recordDataIdentifier values
Hex
Data element
recordDataIdentifier Name
(see format in Section 8.2)
Mnemonic
F90B
CurrentDateTime
TimeDate
RDI_TD
F912
HighResOdometer
HighResolutionTotalVehicleDistance
RDI_HRTVD
F918
K-ConstantOfRecordingEquipment
Kfactor
RDI_KF
F91C
L-TyreCircumference
LfactorTyreCircumference
RDI_LF
F91D
W-VehicleCharacteristicConstant
WvehicleCharacteristicFactor
RDI_WVCF
F921
TyreSize
TyreSize
RDI_TS
F922
nextCalibrationDate
NextCalibrationDate
RDI_NCD
F92C
SpeedAuthorised
SpeedAuthorised
RDI_SA
F97D
vehicleRegistrationNation
RegisteringMemberState
RDI_RMS
F97E
VehicleRegistrationNumber
VehicleRegistrationNumber
RDI_VRN
F190
VehicleIdentificationNumber
VIN
RDI_VIN
CPR_054The parameter dataRecord (DREC_) is used by the ReadDataByIdentifier positive response message to provide the data record value identified by the recordDataIdentifier to the client (tester). Data formats are specified in Section 8. Additional user optional dataRecords including VU specific input, internal and output data may be implemented, but are not defined in this document.
6.2. WriteDataByIdentifier service
6.2.1. Message description
CPR_056The WriteDataByIdentifier service is used by the client to write data record values to a server. The data are identified by a recordDataIdentifier. It is the VU manufacturer's responsibility that the server conditions are met when performing this service. To update the parameters listed in Table 28 the VU must be in CALIBRATION mode.
6.2.2. Message format
CPR_057The message formats for the WriteDataByIdentifier primitives are detailed in the following tables:
Table 29
WriteDataByIdentifier request message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
m+3
LEN
#5
WriteDataByIdentifier request service Id
2E
WDBI
#6 and #7
recordDataIdentifier = (a value from Table 28)
xxxx
RDI_…
#8 to #m+7
dataRecord() = (data#1
xx
DREC_DATA1
:
:
:
data#m)
xx
DREC_DATAm
#m+8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 30
WriteDataByIdentifier positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
WriteDataByIdentifier positive response service Id
6E
WDBIPR
#6 and #7
recordDataIdentifier = (the same value as bytes #6 and #7 Table 29)
xxxx
RDI_…
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 31
WriteDataByIdentifier negative response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
NegativeResponse Service Id
7F
NR
#6
WriteDataByIdentifier request service Id
2E
WDBI
#7
ResponseCode = (requestOutOfRange
31
RC_ROOR
incorrectMessageLength
13
RC_IML
conditionsNotCorrect)
22
RC_CNC
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
6.2.3. Parameter definition
The parameter recordDataIdentifier (RDI_) is defined in Table 28.
The parameter dataRecord (DREC_) is used by the WriteDataByIdentifier request message to provide the data record values identified by the recordDataIdentifier to the server (VU). Data formats are specified in Section 8.
7. CONTROL OF TEST PULSES — INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL UNIT
The services available are detailed in the following table:
Table 32
Input/Output control functional unit
Service name
Description
InputOutputControlByIdentifier
The client requests the control of an input/output specific to the server
7.1. Message description
7.1.1. Message description
There is a connection via the front connector which allows test pulses to be controlled or monitored using a suitable tester.
CPR_058This calibration I/O signal line can be configured by K-line command using the InputOutputControlByIdentifier service to select the required input or output function for the line. The available states of the line are:
—
disabled,
—
speedSignalInput, where the calibration I/O signal line is used to input a speed signal (test signal) replacing the motion sensor speed signal,
—
realTimeSpeedSignalOutputSensor, where the calibration I/O signal line is used to output the speed signal of the motion sensor,
—
RTCOutput, where the calibration I/O signal line is used to output the UTC clock signal.
CPR_059The vehicle unit must have entered an adjustment session and must be in CALIBRATION mode to configure the state of the line. On exit of the adjustment session or of the CALIBRATION mode the vehicle unit must ensure the calibration I/O signal line is returned to the “disabled“ (default) state.
CPR_060If speed pulses are received at the real time speed signal input line of the VU while the calibration I/O signal line is set to input then the calibration I/O signal line shall be set to output or returned to the disabled state.
CPR_061The sequence shall be:
—
establish communications by StartCommunication Service
—
enter an adjustment session by StartDiagnosticSession Service and be in CALIBRATION mode of operation (the order of these two operations is not important).
—
change the state of the output by InputOutputControlByIdentifier Service.
7.1.2. Message format
CPR_062The message formats for the InputOutputControlByIdentifier primitives are detailed in the following tables:
Table 33
InputOutputControlByIdentifier request message
Byte #
Parameter name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
EE
TGT
#3
Source address byte
tt
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
xx
LEN
#5
InputOutputControlByIdentifier request Sid
2F
IOCBI
#6 and #7
InputOutputIdentifier = (CalibrationInputOutput)
F960
IOI_CIO
#8 or #8 to #9
ControlOptionRecord = (
COR_…
inputOutputControlParameter — one value from Table 36
xx
IOCP_…
controlState — one value from Table 38 (see note below))
xx
CS_…
#9 or #10
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Note: The controlState parameter is present only in some cases (see 7.1.3).
Table 34
InputOutputControlByIdentifier positive response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
xx
LEN
#5
inputOutputControlByIdentifier positive response SId
6F
IOCBIPR
#6 and #7
inputOutputIdentifier = (CalibrationInputOutput)
F960
IOI_CIO
#8 or #8 to #9
controlStatusRecord = (
CSR_
inputOutputControlParameter (same value as byte #8 Table 33)
xx
IOCP_…
controlState (same value as byte #9 Table 33)) (if applicable)
xx
CS_…
#9 or #10
Checksum
00-FF
CS
Table 35
InputOutputControlByIdentifier negative response message
Byte #
Parameter Name
Hex value
Mnemonic
#1
Format byte — physical addressing
80
FMT
#2
Target address byte
tt
TGT
#3
Source address byte
EE
SRC
#4
Additional length byte
03
LEN
#5
negativeResponse Service Id
7F
NR
#6
inputOutputControlByIdentifier request SId
2F
IOCBI
#7
responseCode = (
incorrectMessageLength
13
RC_IML
conditionsNotCorrect
22
RC_CNC
requestOutOfRange
31
RC_ROOR
deviceControlLimitsExceeded)
7A
RC_DCLE
#8
Checksum
00-FF
CS
7.1.3. Parameter definition
CPR_064The parameter inputOutputControlParameter (IOCP_) is defined in the following table:
Table 36
Definition of inputOutputControlParameter values
Hex
Description
Mnemonic
00
ReturnControlToECU
This value shall indicate to the server (VU) that the tester does no longer have control about the calibration I/O signal line.
RCTECU
01
ResetToDefault
This value shall indicate to the server (VU) that it is requested to reset the calibration I/O signal line to its default state.
RTD
03
ShortTermAdjustment
This value shall indicate to the server (VU) that it is requested to adjust the calibration I/O signal line to the value included in the controlState parameter.
STA
CPR_065The parameter controlState is present only when the inputOutputControlParameter is set to ShortTermAdjustment and is defined in the following table:
Table 37
Definition of controlState values
Mode
Hex value
Description
Disable
00
I/O line is disabled (default state)
Enable
01
Enable calibration I/O line as speedSignalInput
Enable
02
Enable calibration I/O line as realTimeSpeedSignalOutputSensor
Enable
03
Enable calibration I/O line as RTCOutput
8. DATARECORDS FORMATS
This section details:
—
general rules that shall be applied to ranges of parameters transmitted by the vehicle unit to the tester,
—
formats that shall be used for data transferred via the Data Transmission Services described in Section 6.
CPR_067All parameters identified shall be supported by the VU.
CPR_068Data transmitted by the VU to the tester in response to a request message shall be of the measured type (i.e. current value of the requested parameter as measured or observed by the VU).
8.1. Transmitted parameter ranges
CPR_069Table 38 defines the ranges used to determine the validity of a transmitted parameter.
CPR_070The values in the range “error indicator“ provide a means for the vehicle unit to immediately indicate that valid parametric data is not currently available due to some type of error in the recording equipment.
CPR_071The values in the range “not available“ provide a means for the vehicle unit to transmit a message which contains a parameter that is not available or not supported in that module. The values in the range “not requested“ provide a means for a device to transmit a command message and identify those parameters where no response is expected from the receiving device.
CPR_072If a component failure prevents the transmission of valid data for a parameter, the error indicator as described in Table 38 should be used in place of that parameter's data. However, if the measured or calculated data has yielded a value that is valid yet exceeds the defined parameter range, the error indicator should not be used. The data should be transmitted using the appropriate minimum or maximum parameter value.
Table 38
dataRecords ranges
Range Name
1 byte
(Hex value)
2 bytes
(Hex value)
4 bytes
(Hex value)
ASCII
Valid signal
00 to FA
0000 to FAFF
00000000 to FAFFFFFF
1 to 254
Parameter specific indicator
FB
FB00 to FBFF
FB000000 to FBFFFFFF
none
Reserved range for future indicator bits
FC to FD
FC00 to FDFF
FC000000 to FDFFFFFF
none
Error indicator
FE
FE00 to FEFF
FE000000 to FEFFFFFF
0
Not available or not requested
FF
FF00 to FFFF
FF000000 to FFFFFFFF
FF
CPR_073For parameters coded in ASCII, the ASCII character “*“ is reserved as a delimiter.
8.2. dataRecords formats
Table 40 to Table 44 below detail the formats that shall be used via the ReadDataByIdentifier and WriteDataByIdentifier Services.
CPR_074Table 40 provides the length, resolution and operating range for each parameter identified by its recordDataIdentifier:
Table 39
Format of dataRecords
Parameter Name
Data length
(bytes)
Resolution
Operating range
TimeDate
8
See details in Table 40
HighResolutionTotalVehicleDistance
4
5 m/bit gain, 0 m offset
0 to + 21 055 406 km
Kfactor
2
0,001 pulse/m/bit gain, offset 0
0 to 64,255 pulse/m
LfactorTyreCircumference
2
0,125 10-3/bit gain, 0 offset
0 to 8 031 m
WvehicleCharacteristicFactor
2
0,001 pulse/m/bit gain, 0 offset
0 to 64,255 pulse/m
TyreSize
15
ASCII
ASCII
NextCalibrationDate
3
See details in Table 41
SpeedAuthorised
2
1/256 km/h/bit gain, 0 offset
0 to 250 996 km/h
RegisteringMemberState
3
ASCII
ASCII
VehicleRegistrationNumber
14
See details in Table 44
VIN
17
ASCII
ASCII
CPR_075Table 40 details the formats of the different bytes of the TimeDate parameter:
Table 40
Detailed format of TimeDate (recordDataIdentifier value # F00B)
Byte
Parameter definition
Resolution
Operating range
1
Seconds
0,25 s/bit gain, 0 s offset
0 to 59,75 s
2
Minutes
1 min/bit gain, 0 min offset
0 to 59 min
3
Hours
1 h/bit gain, 0 h offset
0 to 23 h
4
Month
1 month/bit gain, 0 month offset
1 toa 12 month
5
Day
0,25 day/bit gain, 0 day offset (see Note below Table 41)
0,25 to 31,75 day
6
Year
1 year/bit gain, +1985 year offset (see Note below Table 41)
1985 to 2235 year
7
Local Minute Offset
1 min/bit gain, - 125 min offset
- 59 to 59 min
8
Local Hour Offset
1 h/bit gain, - 125 offset
- 23 to + 23 h
CPR_076Table 41 details the formats of the different bytes of the NextCalibrationDate parameter:
Table 41
Detailed format of NextCalibrationDate (recordDataIdentifier value # F022)
Byte
Parameter definition
Resolution
Operating range
1
Month
1 month/bit gain, 0 month offset
1 to 12 month
2
Day
0,25 day/bit gain, 0 day offset (see Note below)
0,25 to 31,75 day
3
Year
1 Year/bit gain, +1985 year offset (see Note below)
1985 to 2235 year
Note conerning the use of the “Day“ parameter:
1.
A value of 0 for the date is null. The values 1, 2, 3, and 4 are used to identify the first day of the month; 5, 6, 7, and 8 identify the second day of the month; etc.
2.
This parameter does not influence or change the hours parameter above.
Note concerning the use of byte “Year“ parameter:
A value of 0 for the year identifies the year 1985; a value of 1 identifies 1986; etc.
CPR_078Table 42 details the formats of the different bytes of the VehicleRegistrationNumber parameter:
Table 42
Detailed format of VehicleRegistrationNumber (recordDataIdentifier value # F07E)
Byte
Parameter definition
Resolution
Operating range
1
Code Page (as defined in Appendix 1)
ASCII
01 to 0A
2 to 14
Vehicle Registration Number (as defined in Appendix 1)
ASCII
ASCII
Appendix 9
TYPE APPROVAL — LIST OF MINIMUM REQUIRED TESTS
CONTENTS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Type approval
The EEC type approval for a recording equipment (or component) or a tachograph card is based on:
—
a security certification, performed by an ITSEC authority, against a security target fully compliant with Appendix 10 to this Annex,
—
a functional certification performed by a Member State authority certifying that the item tested fulfils the requirements of this Annex in terms of functions performed, measurement accuracy and environmental characteristics,
—
an interoperability certification performed by the competent body certifying that the recording equipment (or tachograph card) is fully interoperable with the necessary tachograph card (or recording equipment) models (see Chapter VIII of this Annex).
This Appendix specifies which tests, as a minimum, must be performed by a Member State authority during the functional tests, and which tests, as a minimum, must be performed by the competent body during the interoperability tests. Procedures to follow to carry out the tests or the type of tests are not specified further.
The security certification aspects are not covered by this Appendix. If some tests requested for type approval are performed during the security evaluation and certification process, then these tests do not need to be performed again. In this case, only the results of these security tests may be inspected. For information, the requirements expected to be tested (or closely related to tests expected to be performed) during the security certification, are marked with a “*“ in this Appendix.
This Appendix considers separately the type approval of the motion sensor and of the vehicle unit, as components of the recording equipment. Interoperability between every model of motion sensor and every model of vehicle unit is not required, therefore the type approval for a motion sensor can be granted only in combination with the type approval of a vehicle unit and vice versa.
1.2. References
The following references are used in this Appendix:
IEC 68-2-1
Environmental testing — Part 2: Tests — Tests A: Cold. 1990 + Amendment 2: 1994.
IEC 68-2-2
Environmental testing — Part 2: Tests — Tests B: Dry heat. 1974 + Amendment 2: 1994.
IEC 68-2-6
Basic environmental testing procedures — Test methods — Test Fc and guidance: Vibration (sinusoidal). 6th edition: 1985.
IEC 68-2-14
Basic environmental testing procedures — Test methods — Test N: Change of temperature. Modification 1: 1986.
IEC 68-2-27
Basic environmental testing procedures — Test methods — Test Ea and guidance: Shock. Edition 3: 1987.
IEC 68-2-30
Basic environmental testing procedures — Test methods — Test Db and guidance: Damp heat, cyclic (12 + 12 — hour cycle). Modification 1: 1985.
IEC 68-2-35
Basic environmental testing procedure — Test methods — Test Fda: Random vibration wide band — Reproductibility High. Modification 1: 1983.
IEC 529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code). Edition 2: 1989.
IEC 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) — Testing and measurement techniques — Electrostatic discharge immunity test: 1995/Amendment 1: 1998.
ISO 7637-1
Road vehicles — Electrical disturbance by conduction and coupling — Part 1: Passenger cars and light commercial vehicles with nominal 12 V supply voltage — Electrical transient conduction along supply lines only. Edition 2: 1990.
ISO 7637-2
Road vehicles — Electrical disturbance by conduction and coupling — Part 1: Passenger cars and light commercial vehicles with nominal 12 V supply voltage — Electrical transient conduction along supply lines only. Edition 2: 1990.
ISO 7637-3
Road vehicles — Electrical disturbance by conduction and coupling — Part 3: Vehicles with 12 V or 24 V supply voltage — Electrical transient transmission by capacitive and inductive coupling via lines other than supply lines. First Edition: 1995 + Cor 1: 1995.
ISO/IEC 7816-1
Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 1: Physical characteristics. First edition: 1998.
ISO/IEC 7816-2
Information technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 2: Dimensions and location of the contacts. First edition: 1999.
ISO/IEC 7816-3
Information technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 3: Electronic signals and transmission protocol. Edition 2: 1997.
ISO/IEC 10373
Identification cards — Test methods. First edition: 1993.
2. VEHICLE UNIT FUNCTIONAL TESTS
No
Test
Description
Related requirements
1.
Administrative examination
1.1.
Documentation
Correctness of documentation
1.2.
Manufacturer test results
Results of manufacturer test performed during integration. Paper demonstrations
070, 071, 073
2.
Visual inspection
2.1.
Compliance with documentation
2.2.
Identification/markings
168, 169
2.3.
Materials
163 to 167
2.4
Sealing
251
2.5.
External interfaces
3.
Functional tests
3.1.
Functions provided
002, 004, 244
3.2.
Modes of operation
006*, 007*, 008*, 009*, 106, 107
3.3.
Functions and data access rights
010*, 011*, 240, 246, 247
3.4.
Monitoring cards insertion and withdrawal
013, 014, 015*, 016*, 106
3.5.
Speed and distance measurement
017 to 026
3.6.
Time measurement (test performed at 20 °C)
027 to 032
3.7.
Monitoring driver activities
033 to 043, 106
3.8.
Monitoring driving status
044, 045, 106
3.9.
Manual entries
046 to 050b
3.10.
Company locks management
051 to 055
3.11.
Monitoring control activities
056, 057
3.12.
Detection of events and/or faults
059 to 069, 106
3.13.
Equipment identification data
075*, 076*, 079
3.14.
Driver card insertion and withdrawal data
081* to 083*
3.15.
Driver activity data
084* to 086*
3.16.
Places data
087* to 089*
3.17.
Odometer data
090* to 092*
3.18.
Detailed speed data
093*
3.19.
Events data
094*, 095
3.20.
Faults data
096*
3.21.
Calibration data
097*, 098*
3.22.
Time adjustment data
100*, 101*
3.23.
Control activity data
102*, 103*
3.24.
Company locks data
104*
3.25.
Download activity data
105*
3.26.
Specific conditions data
105a*, 105b*
3.27.
Recording and storing on tachographs cards
108, 109*, 109a*, 110*, 111, 112
3.28.
Displaying
072, 106, 113 to 128, PIC_001, DIS_001
3.29.
Printing
072, 106, 129 to 138, PIC_001, PRT_001 to PRT_012
3.30.
Warning
106, 139 to 148, PIC_001
3.31.
Data downloading to external media
072, 106, 149 to 151
3.32.
Output data to additional external devices
152, 153
3.33.
Calibration
154*, 155*, 156*, 245
3.34.
Time adjustment
157*, 158*
3.35.
Non-interference of additional functions
003, 269
4.
Environmental tests
4.1.
Temperature
Verify functionality through:
—
IEC 68-2-1, test Ad, with a test duration of 72 hours at the lower temperature (− 20 °C), 1 hour operating, 1 hour non operating,
—
IEC 68-2-2, test Bd, with a test duration of 72 hours at the higher temperature (+ 70 °C), 1 hour operating, 1 hour non operating
Temperature cycles: verify that the vehicle unit can withstand rapid changes in the environment temperature through IEC 68-2-14 test Na, 20 cycles, each with temperature varying from the lower temperature (− 20 °C) to the higher temperature (+ 70 °C) and a 2 hours stay at both the lower and the higher temperature
A reduced set of tests (among those defined in section 3 of this table) can be carried out at the lower temperature, the higher temperature and during the temperature cycles
159
4.2.
Humidity
Verify that the vehicle unit can withstand a cyclic damp (heat test) through IEC 68-2-30, test Db, six 24 hours cycles, each temperature varying from + 25 °C to + 55 °C and a relative humidity of 97 % at + 25 °C and equal to 93 % at + 55 °C
160
4.3.
Vibration
1.
Sinusoidal vibrations:
verify that the vehicle unit can withstand sinusoidal vibrations with the following characteristics:
constant displacement between 5 and 11 Hz: 10 mm peak
constant acceleration between 11 and 300 Hz: 5 g
This requirement is verified through IEC 68-2-6, test Fc, with a minimum test duration of 3 × 12 hours (12 hours per axis)
2.
Random vibrations:
verify that the vehicle unit can withstand random vibrations with the following characteristics:
frequency 5-150 Hz, level 0,02 g2/Hz
This requirement is verified through IEC 68-2-35, test Ffda, with a minimum test duration of 3 × 12 hours (12 hours per axis), 1 hour operating, 1 hour non operating
The two tests described above are performed on two different samples of the equipment type being tested
163
4.4.
Protection against water and foreign bodies
Verify that the vehicle unit protection index according to IEC 529 is at least IP 40, when mounted in operating conditions in a vehicle
164, 165
4.5.
Over-voltage protection
Verify that the vehicle unit can withstand a power supply of:
24V versions: 34 V at + 40 °C 1 hour
12V versions: 17 V at + 40 °C 1 hour
161
4.6.
Reverse polarity protection
Verify that the vehicle unit can withstand an inversion of its power supply
161
4.7.
Short-circuit protection
Verify that input output signals are protected against short circuits to power supply and ground
161
5.
EMC tests
5.1.
Radiated emissions and susceptibility
Compliance with Directive 95/54/EEC
162
5.2.
Electrostatic discharge
Compliance with IEC 61000-4-2, ± 2 kV (level 1)
162
5.3.
Conducted transient susceptibility on power supply
For 24V versions: compliance with ISO 7637-2:
pulse 1a: Vs = − 100 V, Ri = 10 ohms
pulse 2: Vs = + 100 V, Ri = 10 ohms
pulse 3a: Vs = − 100 V, Ri = 50 ohms
pulse 3b: Vs = + 100 V, Ri = 50 ohms
pulse 4: Vs = − 16 V Va = − 12 V, t6=100 ms
pulse 5: Vs = + 120 V, Ri = 2,2 ohms, td = 250 ms
For 12V versions: compliance with ISO 7637-1:
pulse 1: Vs = − 100 V, Ri = 10 ohms
pulse 2: Vs = + 100 V, Ri = 10 ohms
pulse 3a: Vs = − 100 V, Ri = 50 ohms
pulse 3b: Vs = + 100 V, Ri = 50 ohms
pulse 4: Vs = − 6 V, Va = − 5 V, t6 = 15 ms
pulse 5: Vs = + 65 V, Ri = 3 ohms, td = 100 ms
Pulse 5 shall be tested only for vehicle units designed to be installed in vehicles for which no external common protection against load dump is implemented
162
3. MOTION SENSOR FUNCTIONAL TESTS
No
Test
Description
Related requirements
1.
Administrative examination
1.1.
Documentation
Correctness of documentation
2.
Visual inspection
2.1.
Compliance with documentation
2.2.
Identification/markings
169, 170
2.3.
Materials
163 to 167
2.4.
Sealing
251
3.
Functional tests
3.1.
Sensor identification data
077*
3.2.
Motion sensor — vehicle unit pairing
099*, 155
3.3.
Motion detection
Motion measurement accuracy
022 to 026
4.
Environmental tests
4.1.
Operating temperature
Verify functionality (as defined in test No 3.3) in temperature range [− 40 °C; + 135 °C] through:
—
IEC 68-2-1 test Ad, with a test duration of 96 hours at the lowest temperature Tomin
—
IEC 68-2-2 test Bd, with a test duration of 96 hours at the highest temperature Tomax
159
4.2.
Temperature cycles
Verify functionality (as defined in test No 3.3) through IEC 68-2-14 test Na, 20 cycles, each with temperature varying from the lower temperature (− 40 °C) to the higher temperature (+135 °C) and a 2 hours stay at both the lower and the higher temperature
A reduced set of tests (among those defined in test 3.3) can be carried out at the lower temperature, the higher temperature and during the temperature cycles
159
4.3.
Humidity cycles
Verify functionality (as defined in test No 3.3) through IEC 68-2-30, test Db, six 24 hours cycles, each temperature varying from + 25 °C to + 55 °C and a relative humidity of 97 % at + 25 °C and equal to 93 % at + 55 °C
160
4.4.
Vibration
Verify functionality (as defined in test No 3.3) through IEC 68-2-6, test Fc, with a test duration of 100 frequency cycles:
constant displacement between 10 and 57 Hz: 1,5 mm peak constant accelaration between 57 and 500 Hz: 20 g
163
4.5.
Mechanical shock
Verify functionality (as defined in test No 3.3) through IEC 68-2-27, test Ea, 3 shocks in both directions of the 3 perpendicular axes
163
4.6.
Protection against water and foreign bodies
Verify that the motion sensor protection index according to IEC 529 is at least IP 64, when mounted in operating conditions in a vehicle
165
4.7.
Reverse polarity protection
Verify that the motion sensor can withstand an inversion of its power supply
161
4.8.
Short circuit protection
Verify that input output signals are protected against short circuits to power supply and ground
161
5.
EMC
5.1.
Radiated emissions and susceptibility
Verify compliance with Directive 95/54/EEC
162
5.2.
Electrostatic discharge
Compliance with IEC 61000-4-2, ± 2 kV (level 1)
162
5.3.
Conducted transient susceptibility on data lines)
Compliance with ISO 7637-3 (level III)
162
4. TACHOGRAPH CARDS FUNCTIONAL TESTS
No
Test
Description
Related requirements
1.
Administrative examination
1.1.
Documentation
Correctness of documentation
2.
Visual inspection
2.1.
Make sure that all features for protection and visible data are correctly printed on the card and compliant
171 to 181
3.
Physical tests
3.1.
Check dimension of the card and location of the contacts
184
ISO/IEC 7816-1
ISO/IEC 7816-2
4.
Protocol tests
4.1.
ATR
Check that the ATR is compliant
ISO/IEC 7816-3
TCS 304, 307, 308
4.2.
T=0
Check that T=0 protocol is compliant
ISO/IEC 7816-3
TCS 302, 303, 305
4.3.
PTS
Check that the PTS command is compliant by setting T=1 from T=0
ISO/IEC 7816-3
TCS 309 to 311
4.4.
T=1
Check that T=1 protocol is compliant
ISO/IEC 7816-3
TCS 303, / 306
5.
Card structure
5.1.
Test that the file structure of the card is compliant by checking the presence of the mandatory files in the card and their access conditions
TCS 312
TCS 400*, 401, 402, 403*, 404, 405*, 406, 407, 408*, 409, 410*, 411, 412, 413*, 414, 415*, 416, 417, 418*, 419
6.
Functional tests
6.1.
Normal processing
Test at least once each allowed usage of each command (ex: test the UPDATE BINARY command with CLA = ′00′, CLA = ′0C′ and with different P1, P2 and Lc parameters)
Check that the operations have actually been performed in the card (ex: by reading the file the command has been performed on)
TCS 313 to TCS 379
6.2.
Error messages
Test at least once each error message (as specified in Appendix 2) for each command
Test at least once every generic error (except ′6400′ integrity errors checked during security certification)
7.
Environmental tests
7.1.
Make sure that the cards work within the limit conditions defined in accordance with ISO/IEC 10 373
185 to 188
ISO/IEC 7816-1
5. INTEROPERABILITY TESTS
No
Test
Description
1.
Mutual authentication
Check that the mutual authentication between the vehicle unit and the tachograph card runs normally
2.
Write/read tests
Execute a typical activity scenario on the vehicle unit. The scenario shall be adapted to the type of card being tested and involve writings in as many EFs as possible in the card
Verify through a card downloading that all corresponding recordings have been properly made
Verify through a card daily printout that all corresponding recordings can be properly read
Appendix 10
GENERIC SECURITY TARGETS
This appendix specifies the minimum required content of motion sensor, vehicle unit and tachograph card security targets.
In order to form the security targets against which they may seek security certification, manufacturers shall refine and complete the documents as necessary, without amending nor deleting existing threats, objectives, procedural means and security enforcing functions specifications.
CONTENTS
Motion sensor generic security target
1.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.6.1.
3.6.2.
3.6.3.
3.6.4.
3.6.5.
3.6.6.
4.
4.1.
4.2.
4.2.1.
4.2.2.
4.2.3.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.5.1.
4.5.2.
4.5.3.
4.6.
4.6.1.
4.6.2.
4.6.3.
4.6.4.
4.6.5.
4.6.6.
4.6.7.
4.7.
4.8.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Vehicle Unit generic security target
1.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.6.1.
3.6.2.
3.6.3.
3.6.4.
3.6.5.
3.6.6.
3.6.7.
3.6.8.
4.
4.1.
4.1.1.
4.1.2.
4.1.3.
4.1.4.
4.2.
4.2.1.
4.2.2.
4.2.3.
4.2.4.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.6.1.
4.6.2.
4.6.3.
4.7.
4.7.1.
4.7.2.
4.7.3.
4.7.4.
4.7.5.
4.7.6.
4.7.7.
4.8.
4.8.1.
4.8.2.
4.8.3.
4.9.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Tachograph card generic security target
1.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
4.
4.1.
4.2.
4.2.1.
4.2.2.
4.2.3.
4.3.
4.3.1.
4.3.2.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.6.1.
4.6.2.
4.7.
4.7.1.
4.7.2.
4.7.3.
4.7.4.
4.8.
4.8.1.
4.8.2.
4.9.
5.
6.
7.
8.
MOTION SENSOR GENERIC SECURITY TARGET
1. Introduction
This document contains a description of the motion sensor, of the threats it must be able to counteract and of the security objectives it must achieve. It specifies the required security enforcing functions. It states the claimed minimum strength of security mechanisms and the required level of assurance for the development and the evaluation.
Requirements referred to in the document, are those of the body of Annex I B. For clarity of reading, duplication sometimes arises between Annex I B body requirements and security target requirements. In case of ambiguity between a security target requirement and the Annex I B body requirement referred by this security target requirement, the Annex I B body requirement shall prevail.
Annex I B body requirements not referred by security targets are not the subject of security enforcing functions.
Unique labels have been assigned to threats, objectives, procedural means and SEF specifications for the purpose of traceability to development and evaluation documentation.
2. Abbreviations, definitions and references
2.1. Abbreviations
ROM
Read only Memory
SEF
Security enforcing function
TBD
To be defined
TOE
Target of evaluation
VU
Vehicle unit.
2.2. Definitions
Digital Tachograph
Recording equipment
Entity
A device connected to the motion sensor
Motion data
The data exchanged with the VU, representative of speed and distance travelled
Physically separated parts
Physical components of the motion sensor that are distributed in the vehicle as opposed to physical components gathered into the motion sensor casing
Security data
The specific data needed to support security enforcing functions (e.g. crypto keys)
System
Equipment, people or organisations, involved in any way with the recording equipment
User
A human user of the motion sensor (when not used in the expression “user data“)
User data
Any data, other than motion or security data, recorded or stored by the motion sensor.
2.3. References
ITSEC
ITSEC Information Technology Security Evaluation Criteria 1991.
3. Product rationale
3.1. Motion sensor description and method of use
The motion sensor is intended to be installed in road transport vehicles. Its purpose is to provide a VU with secured motion data representative of vehicle's speed and distance travelled.
The motion sensor is mechanically interfaced to a moving part of the vehicle, which movement can be representative of vehicle's speed or distance travelled. It may be located in the vehicle's gear box or in any other part of the vehicle.
In its operational mode, the motion sensor is connected to a VU.
It may also be connected to specific equipment for management purposes (TBD by manufacturer).
The typical motion sensor is described in the following figure:
3.2. Motion sensor life cycle
The typical life cycle of the motion sensor is described in the following figure:
3.3. Threats
This paragraph describes the threats the motion sensor may face.
3.3.1. Threats to access control policies
T.Access
Users could try to access functions not allowed to them.
3.3.2. Design related threats
T.Faults
Faults in hardware, software, communication procedures could place the motion sensor in unforeseen conditions compromising its security
T.Tests
The use of non invalidated test modes or of existing back doors could compromise the motion sensor security
T.Design
Users could try to gain illicit knowledge of design either from manufacturer's material (through theft, bribery, …) or from reverse engineering.
3.3.3. Operation oriented threats
T.Environment
Users could compromise the motion sensor security through environmental attacks (thermal, electromagnetic, optical, chemical, mechanical, …)
T.Hardware
Users could try to modify motion sensor hardware
T.Mechanical_Origin
Users could try to manipulate the motion sensor input (e.g. unscrewing from gearbox, …)
T.Motion_Data
Users could try to modify the vehicle's motion data (addition, modification, deletion, replay of signal)
T.Power_Supply
Users could try to defeat the motion sensor security objectives by modifying (cutting, reducing, increasing) its power supply
T.Security_Data
Users could try to gain illicit knowledge of security data during security data generation or transport or storage in the equipment
T.Software
Users could try to modify motion sensor software
T.Stored_Data
Users could try to modify stored data (security or user data).
3.4. Security objectives
The main security objective of the digital tachograph system is the following:
O.Main
The data to be checked by control authorities must be available and reflect fully and accurately the activities of controlled drivers and vehicles in terms of driving, work, availability and rest periods and in terms of vehicle speed
Therefore the security objective of the motion sensor, contributing to the global security objective, is:
O.Sensor_Main
The data transmitted by the motion sensor must be available to the VU so as to allow the VU to determine fully and accurately the movement of the vehicle in terms of speed and distance travelled.
3.5. Information technology security objectives
The specific IT security objectives of the motion sensor contributing to its main security objective, are the following:
O.Access
The motion sensor must control connected entities' access to functions and data
O.Audit
The motion sensor must audit attempts to undermine its security and should trace them to associated entities
O.Authentication
The motion sensor must authenticate connected entities
O.Processing
The motion sensor must ensure that processing of input to derive motion data is accurate
O.Reliability
The motion sensor must provide a reliable service
O.Secured_Data_Exchange
The motion sensor must secure data exchanges with the VU.
3.6. Physical, personnel or procedural means
This paragraph describes physical, personnel or procedural requirements that contribute to the security of the motion sensor.
3.6.1. Equipment design
M.Development
Motion sensor developers must ensure that the assignment of responsibilities during development is done in a manner which maintains IT security
M.Manufacturing
Motion sensor manufacturers must ensure that the assignment of responsibilities during manufacturing is done in a manner which maintains IT security, and that during the manufacturing process the motion sensor is protected from physical attacks which might compromise IT security.
3.6.2. Equipment delivery
M.Delivery
Motion sensor manufacturers, vehicle manufacturers and fitters or workshops must ensure that handling of the motion sensor is done in a manner which maintains IT security.
3.6.3. Security data generation and delivery
M.Sec_Data_Generation
Security data generation algorithms must be accessible to authorised and trusted persons only
M.Sec_Data_Transport
Security data must be generated, transported, and inserted into the motion sensor, in such a way to preserve its appropriate confidentiality and integrity.
3.6.4. Recording equipment installation, calibration, and inspection
M.Approved_Workshops
Installation, calibration and repair of recording equipment must be carried by trusted and approved fitters or workshops
M.Mechanical_Interface
Means of detecting physical tampering with the mechanical interface must be provided (e.g. seals)
M.Regular_Inpections
Recording equipment must be periodically inspected and calibrated.
3.6.5. Law enforcement control
M.Controls
Law enforcement controls must be performed regularly and randomly, and must include security audits.
3.6.6. Software upgrades
M.Software_Upgrade
Software revisions must be granted security certification before they can be implemented in a motion sensor.
4. Security enforcing functions
4.1. Identification and authentication
UIA_101The motion sensor shall be able to establish, for every interaction, the identity of any entity it is connected to.
UIA_102The identity of a connected entity shall consist of:
—
an entity group:
—
VU,
—
Management device,
—
Other,
—
an entity ID (VU only).
UIA_103The entity ID of a connected VU shall consist of the VU approval number and the VU serial number.
UIA_104The motion sensor shall be able to authenticate any VU or management device it is connected to:
—
at entity connection,
—
at power supply recovery.
UIA_105The motion sensor shall be able to periodically re-authenticate the VU it is connected to.
UIA_106The motion sensor shall detect and prevent use of authentication data that has been copied and replayed.
UIA_107After (TBD by manufacturer and not more than 20) consecutive unsuccessful authentication attempts have been detected, the SEF shall:
—
generate an audit record of the event,
—
warn the entity,
—
continue to export motion data in a non secured mode.
4.2. Access control
Access controls ensure that information is read from, created in, or modified into the TOE only by those authorised to do so.
4.2.1. Access control policy
ACC_101The motion sensor shall control access rights to function and data.
4.2.2. Data access rights
ACC_102The motion sensor shall ensure that motion sensor identification data can be written once only (requirement 078).
ACC_103The motion sensor shall accept and/or store user data from authenticated entities only.
ACC_104The motion sensor shall enforce appropriate read and write access rights to security data.
4.2.3. File structure and access conditions
ACC_105Application and data files structure and access conditions shall be created during the manufacturing process, and then locked from any future modification or deletion.
4.3. Accountability
ACT_101The motion sensor shall hold in its memory motion sensor identification data (requirement 077).
ACT_102The motion sensor shall store in its memory installation data (requirement 099).
ACT_103The motion sensor shall have a capability to output accountability data to authenticated entities at their request.
4.4. Audit
AUD_101The motion sensor shall, for events impairing its security, generate audit records of the events.
AUD_102The events affecting the security of the motion sensor are the following:
—
security breach attempts,
—
authentication failure,
—
stored data integrity error,
—
internal data transfer error,
—
unauthorised case opening,
—
hardware sabotage.
—
sensor fault.
AUD_103Audit records shall include the following data:
—
date and time of the event,
—
type of event,
—
connected entity identity.
when required data is not available, an appropriate default indication shall be given (TBD by manufacturer).
AUD_104The motion sensor shall send the generated audit records to the VU at the moment of their generation, and may also store them in its memory.
AUD_105In the case where the motion sensor stores audit records, it shall ensure that 20 audit records will be maintained independent of audit storage exhaustion, and shall have a capability to output stored audit records to authenticated entities at their request.
4.5. Accuracy
4.5.1. Information flow control policy
ACR_101The motion sensor shall ensure that motion data may only been processed and derived from sensor mechanical input.
4.5.2. Internal data transfers
The requirements of this paragraph apply only if the motion sensor makes use of physically separated parts.
ACR_102If data are transferred between physically separated parts of the motion sensor, the data shall be protected from modification.
ACR_103Upon detection of a data transfer error during an internal transfer, transmission shall be repeated and the SEF shall generate an audit record of the event.
4.5.3. Stored data integrity
ACR_104The motion sensor shall check user data stored in its memory for integrity errors.
ACR_105Upon detection of a stored user data integrity error, the SEF shall generate an audit record.
4.6. Reliability of service
4.6.1 Tests
RLB_101All commands, actions, or test points, specific to the testing needs of the manufacturing phase shall be disabled or removed before the end of the manufacturing phase. It shall not be possible to restore them for later use.
RLB_102The motion sensor shall run self-tests, during initial start-up, and during normal operation to verify its correct operation. The motion sensor self-tests shall include a verification of the integrity of security data and a verification of the integrity of stored executable code (if not in ROM).
RLB_103Upon detection of an internal fault during self-test, the SEF shall generate an audit record (sensor fault).
4.6.2. Software
RLB_104There shall be no way to analyse or debug the motion sensor software in the field.
RLB_105Inputs from external sources shall not be accepted as executable code.
4.6.3. Physical protection
RLB_106If the motion sensor is designed so that it can be opened, the motion sensor shall detect any case opening, even without external power supply for a minimum of 6 months. In such a case, the SEF shall generate an audit record of the event (It is acceptable that the audit record is generated and stored after power supply reconnection).
If the motion sensor is designed so that it cannot be opened, it shall be designed such that physical tampering attempts can be easily detected (e.g. through visual inspection).
RLB_107The motion sensor shall detect specified (TBD by manufacturer) hardware sabotage.
RLB_108In the case described above, the SEF shall generate an audit record and the motion sensor shall: (TBD by manufacturer).
4.6.4. Power supply interruptions
RLB_109The motion sensor shall preserve a secure state during power supply cut-off or variations.
4.6.5. Reset conditions
RLB_110In case of a power supply interruption, or if a transaction is stopped before completion, or on any other reset conditions, the motion sensor shall be reset cleanly.
4.6.6. Data availability
RLB_111The motion sensor shall ensure that access to resources is obtained when required and that resources are not requested nor retained unnecessarily.
4.6.7. Multiple applications
RLB_112If the motion sensor provides applications other than the tachograph application, all applications shall be physically and/or logically separated from each other. These applications shall not share security data. Only one task shall be active at a time.
4.7. Data exchange
DEX_101The motion sensor shall export motion data to the VU with associated security attributes, such that the VU will be able to verify its integrity and authenticity.
4.8. Cryptographic support
The requirements of this paragraph are applicable only where needed, depending upon security mechanisms used and upon the manufacturer's solutions.
CSP_101Any cryptographic operation performed by the motion sensor shall be in accordance with a specified algorithm and a specified key size.
CSP_102If the motion sensor generates cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified cryptographic key generation algorithms and specified cryptographic key sizes.
CSP_103If the motion sensor distributes cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified key distribution methods.
CSP_104If the motion sensor accesses cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified cryptographic keys access methods.
CSP_105If the motion sensor destroys cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified cryptographic keys destruction methods.
5. Definition of security mechanisms
The security mechanisms, fulfilling the motion sensor security enforcing functions, are defined by the motion sensor manufacturers.
6. Minimum strength of security mechanisms
The minimum strength of the motion sensor security mechanisms is High, as defined in (ITSEC).
7. Level of assurance
The target level of assurance for the motion sensor is ITSEC level E3, as defined in (ITSEC).
8. Rationale
The following matrixes give a rationale for the SEFs by showing:
—
which SEFs or means counteract which threats,
—
which SEFs fulfil which IT security objectives.
Threats
IT Objectives
Access
Faults
Tests
Design
Environment
Hardware
Mechanical_Origin
Motion_Data
Power_Supply
Security_Data
Software
Stored_Data
Access
Audit
Authentication
Processing
Reliability
Secured_Data_Exchange
Physical Personnel Procedural means
Development
x
x
x
Manufacturing
x
x
Delivery
x
x
x
Security Data Generation
x
Security Data Transport
x
Approved Workshops
x
Mechanical interface
x
Regular Inspection
x
x
x
x
Law enforcement controls
x
x
x
x
x
x
Software Upgrades
x
Security Enforcing Functions
Identification and authentication
UIA_101 Entities identification
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_102 Entities identity
x
x
x
UIA_103 VU identity
x
UIA_104 Entities authentication
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_105 re-authentication
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_106 Unforgeable authentication
x
x
x
x
UIA_107 Authentication failure
x
x
x
Access control
ACC_101 Access control policy
x
x
x
x
ACC_102 Motion sensor ID
x
x
ACC_103 User Data
x
x
ACC_104 Security Data
x
x
x
ACC_105 File structure and access conditions
x
x
x
x
Accountability
ACT_101 Motion sensor ID data
x
ACT_102 Pairing data
x
ACT_103 Accountability data
x
Audit
AUD_101 Audit records
x
AUD_102 Audit events list
x
x
x
x
x
AUD_103 Audit data
x
AUD_104 Audit tools
x
AUD_105 Audit records storage
x
Accuracy
ACR_101 Information flow control policy
x
x
x
ACR_102 Internal transfers
x
x
ACR_103 Internal transfers
x
ACR_104 Stored data integrity
x
x
ACR_105 Stored data integrity
x
x
Reliability
RLB_101 Manufacturing tests
x
x
x
RLB_102 Self tests
x
x
x
x
x
RLB_103 Self tests
x
x
x
x
RLB_104 Software analysis
x
x
x
RLB_105 Software input
x
x
x
RLB_106 Case opening
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
RLB_107 Hardware sabotage
x
x
RLB_108 Hardware sabotage
x
x
RLB_109 Power supply interruptions
x
x
RLB_110 Reset
x
x
RLB_111 Data Availability
x
x
RLB_112 Multiple Applications
x
Data exchange
DEX_101 Secured motion data export
x
x
Cryptographic support
CSP_101 Algorithms
x
x
CSP_102 key generation
x
x
CSP_103 key distribution
x
x
CSP_104 key access
x
x
CSP_105 key destruction
x
x
VEHICLE UNIT GENERIC SECURITY TARGET
1. Introduction
This document contains a description of the vehicle unit, of the threats it must be able to counteract and of the security objectives it must achieve. It specifies the required security enforcing functions. It states the claimed minimum strength of security mechanisms and the required level of assurance for the development and the evaluation.
Requirements referred to in the document, are those of the body of Annex I B. For clarity of reading, duplication sometimes arises between Annex I B body requirements and security target requirements. In case of ambiguity between a security target requirement and the Annex I B body requirement referred by this security target requirement, the Annex I B body requirement shall prevail.
Annex I B body requirements not referred by security targets are not the subject of security enforcing functions.
Unique labels have been assigned to threats, objectives, procedural means and SEF specifications for the purpose of traceability to development and evaluation documentation.
2. Abbreviations, definitions and references
2.1. Abbreviations
PIN
Personal identification number
ROM
Read only memory
SEF
Security enforcing function
TBD
To be defined
TOE
Target of evaluation
VU
Vehicle Unit.
2.2. Definitions
Digital tachograph
Recording equipment
Motion data
The data exchanged with the motion sensor, representative of speed and distance travelled
Physically separated parts
Physical components of the VU that are distributed in the vehicle as opposed to physical components gathered into the VU casing
Security data
The specific data needed to support security enforcing functions (e.g. crypto keys)
System
Equipment, people or organisations, involved in any way with the recording equipment
User
Users are to be understood as human user of the equipment. Normal users of the VU comprise drivers, controllers, workshops and companies
User data
Any data, other than security data, recorded or stored by the VU, required by Chapter III.12.
2.3. References
ITSEC
ITSEC Information Technology Security Evaluation Criteria 1991.
3. Product rationale
3.1. Vehicle unit description and method of use
The VU is intended to be installed in road transport vehicles. Its purpose is to record, store, display, print and output data related to driver activities.
It is connected to a motion sensor with which it exchanges vehicle's motion data.
Users identify themselves to the VU using tachograph cards.
The VU records and stores user activities data in its data memory, it also records user activities data in tachograph cards.
The VU outputs data to display, printer and external devices.
The vehicle unit's operational environment while installed in a vehicle is described in the following figure:
The VU general characteristics, functions and mode of operations are described in Chapter II of Annex I B.
The VU functional requirements are specified in Chapter III of Annex I B.
The typical VU is described in the following figure:
It must be noted that although the printer mechanism is part of the TOE, the paper document once produced is not.
3.2. Vehicle unit life cycle
The typical life cycle of the VU is described in the following figure:
3.3. Threats
This paragraph describes the threats the VU may face.
3.3.1. Threats to identification and access control policies
T.Access
Users could try to access functions not allowed to them (e.g. drivers gaining access to calibration function)
T.Identification
Users could try to use several identifications or no identification.
3.3.2. Design related threats
T.Faults
Faults in hardware, software, communication procedures could place the VU in unforeseen conditions compromising its security
T.Tests
The use of non invalidated test modes or of existing back doors could compromise the VU security
T.Design
Users could try to gain illicit knowledge of design either from manufacturer's material (through theft, bribery, …) or from reverse engineering
3.3.3. Operation oriented threats
T.Calibration_Parameters
Users could try to use mis-calibrated equipment (through calibration data modification, or through organisational weaknesses)
T.Card_Data_Exchange
Users could try to modify data while exchanged between VU and tachograph cards (addition, modification, deletion, replay of signal)
T.Clock
Users could try to modify internal clock
T.Environment
Users could compromise the VU security through environmental attacks (thermal, electromagnetic, optical, chemical, mechanical, …)
T.Fake_Devices
Users could try to connect fake devices (motion sensor, smart cards) to the VU
T.Hardware
Users could try to modify VU hardware
T.Motion_Data
Users could try to modify the vehicle's motion data (addition, modification, deletion, replay of signal)
T.Non_Activated
Users could use non activated equipment
T.Output_Data
Users could try to modify data output (print, display or download)
T.Power_Supply
Users could try to defeat the VU security objectives by modifying (cutting, reducing, increasing) its power supply
T.Security_Data
Users could try to gain illicit knowledge of security data during security data generation or transport or storage in the equipment
T.Software
Users could try to modify VU software
T.Stored_Data
Users could try to modify stored data (security or user data).
3.4. Security objectives
The main security objective of the digital tachograph system is the following:
O.Main
The data to be checked by control authorities must be available and reflect fully and accurately the activities of controlled drivers and vehicles in terms of driving, work, availability and rest periods and in terms of vehicle speed
Therefore the security objectives of the VU, contributing to the global security objective, are the following:
O.VU_Main
The data to be measured and recorded and then to be checked by control authorities must be available and reflect accurately the activities of controlled drivers and vehicles in terms of driving, work, availability and rest periods and in terms of vehicle speed
O.VU_Export
The VU must be able to export data to external storage media in such a way as to allow for verification of their integrity and authenticity.
3.5. Information technology security objectives
The specific IT security objectives of the VU contributing to its main security objectives, are the following:
O.Access
The VU must control user access to functions and data
O.Accountability
The VU must collect accurate accountability data
O.Audit
The VU must audit attempts to undermine system security and should trace them to associated users
O.Authentication
The VU should authenticate users and connected entities (when a trusted path needs to be established between entities)
O.Integrity
The VU must maintain stored data integrity
O.Output
The VU must ensure that data output reflects accurately data measured or stored
O.Processing
The VU must ensure that processing of inputs to derive user data is accurate
O.Reliability
The VU must provide a reliable service
O.Secured_Data_Exchange
The VU must secure data exchanges with the motion sensor and with tachograph cards.
3.6. Physical, personnel or procedural means
This paragraph describes physical, personnel or procedural requirements that contribute to the security of the VU.
3.6.1. Equipment design
M.Development
VU developers must ensure that the assignment of responsibilities during development is done in a manner which maintains IT security
M.Manufacturing
VU manufacturers must ensure that the assignment of responsibilities during manufacturing is done in a manner which maintains IT security, and that during the manufacturing process the VU is protected from physical attacks which might compromise IT security.
3.6.2. Equipment delivery and activation
M.Delivery
VU manufacturers, vehicle manufacturers and fitters or workshops must ensure that handling of non activated VUs is done in a manner which maintains VU security
M.Activation
Vehicle manufacturers and fitters or workshops must activate the VU after its installation before the vehicle leaves the premises where installation took place.
3.6.3. Security data generation and delivery
M.Sec_Data_Generation
Security data generation algorithms must be accessible to authorised and trusted persons only
M.Sec_Data_Transport
Security data must be generated, transported, and inserted into the VU, in such a way to preserve its appropriate confidentiality and integrity.
3.6.4. Cards delivery
M.Card_Availability
Tachograph cards must be available and delivered to authorised persons only
M.Driver_Card_Uniqueness
Drivers must possess, at one time, one valid driver card only
M.Card_Traceability
Card delivery must be traceable (white lists, black lists), and black lists must be used during security audits.
3.6.5. Recording equipment installation, calibration, and inspection
M.Approved_Workshops
Installation, calibration and repair of recording equipment must be carried by trusted and approved fitters or workshops
M.Regular_Inpections
Recording equipment must be periodically inspected and calibrated
M.Faithful_Calibration
Approved fitters and workshops must enter proper vehicle parameters in recording equipment during calibration.
3.6.6. Equipment operation
M.Faithful_Drivers
Drivers must play by the rules and act responsibly (e.g. use their driver cards, properly select their activity for those that are manually selected, …).
3.6.7. Law enforcement control
M.Controls
Law enforcement controls must be performed regularly and randomly, and must include security audits.
3.6.8. Software upgrades
M.Software_Upgrade
Software revisions must be granted security certification before they can be implemented in a VU.
4. Security enforcing functions
4.1. Identification and authentication
4.1.1. Motion sensor identification and authentication
UIA_201The VU shall be able to establish, for every interaction, the identity of the motion sensor it is connected to.
UIA_202The identity of the motion sensor shall consist of the sensor approval number and the sensor serial number.
UIA_203The VU shall authenticate the motion sensor it is connected to:
—
at motion sensor connection,
—
at each calibration of the recording equipment,
—
at power supply recovery.
Authentication shall be mutual and triggered by the VU.
UIA_204The VU shall periodically (period TBD by manufacturer and more frequently than once per hour) re-identify and re-authenticate the motion sensor it is connected to, and ensure that the motion sensor identified during the last calibration of the recording equipment has not been changed.
UIA_205The VU shall detect and prevent use of authentication data that has been copied and replayed.
UIA_206After (TBD by manufacturer and not more than 20) consecutive unsuccessful authentication attempts have been detected, and/or after detecting that the identity of the motion sensor has changed while not authorised (i.e. while not during a calibration of the recording equipment), the SEF shall:
—
generate an audit record of the event,
—
warn the user,
—
continue to accept and use non secured motion data sent by the motion sensor.
4.1.2. User identification and authentication
UIA_207The VU shall permanently and selectively track the identity of two users, by monitoring the tachograph cards inserted in respectively the driver slot and the co-driver slot of the equipment.
UIA_208The user identity shall consist of:
—
a user group:
—
DRIVER (driver card),
—
CONTROLLER (control card),
—
WORKSHOP (workshop card),
—
COMPANY (company card),
—
UNKNOWN (no card inserted),
—
a user ID, composed of:
—
the card issuing Member State code and of the card number,
—
UNKNOWN if user group is UNKNOWN.
UNKNOWN identities may be implicitly or explicitly known.
UIA_209The VU shall authenticate its users at card insertion.
UIA_210The VU shall re-authenticate its users:
—
at power supply recovery,
—
periodically or after occurrence of specific events (TBD by manufacturers and more frequently than once per day).
UIA_211Authentication shall be performed by means of proving that the card inserted is a valid tachograph card, possessing security data that only the system could distribute. Authentication shall be mutual and triggered by the VU.
UIA_212In addition to the above, workshops shall be required to be successfully authenticated through a PIN check. PINs shall be at least 4 characters long.
Note:
In the case the PIN is transferred to the VU from an outside equipment located in the vicinity of the VU, PIN confidentiality need not be protected during the transfer.
UIA_213The VU shall detect and prevent use of authentication data that has been copied and replayed.
UIA_214After 5 consecutive unsuccessful authentication attempts have been detected, the SEF shall:
—
generate an audit record of the event,
—
warn the user,
—
assume the user as UNKNOWN, and the card as non valid (definition z) and requirement 007).
4.1.3. Remotely connected company identification and authentication
Company remote connection capability is optional. This paragraph therefore applies only if this feature is implemented.
UIA_215For every interaction with a remotely connected company, the VU shall be able to establish the company's identity.
UIA_216The remotely connected company's identity shall consist of its company card issuing Member State code and of its company card number.
UIA_217The VU shall successfully authenticate the remotely connected company before allowing any data export to it.
UIA_218Authentication shall be performed by means of proving that the company owns a valid company card, possessing security data that only the system could distribute.
UIA_219The VU shall detect and prevent use of authentication data that has been copied and replayed.
UIA_220After 5 consecutive unsuccessful authentication attempts have been detected, the VU shall:
—
warn the remotely connected company.
4.1.4. Management device identification and authentication
VU manufacturers may foresee dedicated devices for additional VU management functions (e.g. Software upgrading, security data reloading, …). This paragraph therefore applies only if this feature is implemented.
UIA_221For every interaction with a management device, the VU shall be able to establish the device identity.
UIA_222Before allowing any further interaction, the VU shall successfully authenticate the management device.
UIA_223The VU shall detect and prevent use of authentication data that has been copied and replayed.
4.2. Access control
Access controls ensure that information is read from, created in, or modified into the TOE only by those authorised to do so.
It must be noted that the user data recorded by the VU, although presenting privacy or commercial sensitivity aspects, are not of a confidential nature. Therefore, the functional requirement related to data read access rights (requirement 011) is not the subject of a security enforcing function.
4.2.1. Access control policy
ACC_201The VU shall manage and check access control rights to functions and to data.
4.2.2. Access rights to functions
ACC_202The VU shall enforce the mode of operation selection rules (requirements 006 to 009).
ACC_203The VU shall use the mode of operation to enforce the functions access control rules (requirement 010).
4.2.3. Access rights to data
ACC_204The VU shall enforce the VU identification data write access rules (requirement 076)
ACC_205The VU shall enforce the paired motion sensor identification data write access rules (requirements 079 and 155)
ACC_206After the VU activation, the VU shall ensure that only in calibration mode, may calibration data be input into the VU and stored into its data memory (requirements 154 and 156).
ACC_207After the VU activation, the VU shall enforce calibration data write and delete access rules (requirement 097).
ACC_208After the VU activation, the VU shall ensure that only in calibration mode, may time adjustment data be input into the VU and stored into its data memory (This requirement does not apply to small time adjustments allowed by requirements 157 and 158).
ACC_209After the VU activation, the VU shall enforce time adjustment data write and delete access rules (requirement 100).
ACC_210The VU shall enforce appropriate read and write access rights to security data (requirement 080).
4.2.4. File structure and access conditions
ACC_211Application and data files structure and access conditions shall be created during the manufacturing process, and then locked from any future modification or deletion.
4.3. Accountability
ACT_201The VU shall ensure that drivers are accountable for their activities (requirements 081, 084, 087, 105a, 105b, 109 and 109a).
ACT_202The VU shall hold permanent identification data (requirement 075).
ACT_203The VU shall ensure that workshops are accountable for their activities (requirements 098, 101 and 109).
ACT_204The VU shall ensure that controllers are accountable for their activities (requirements 102, 103 and 109).
ACT_205The VU shall record odometer data (requirement 090) and detailed speed data (requirement 093).
ACT_206The VU shall ensure that user data related to requirements 081 to 093 and 102 to 105b inclusive are not modified once recorded, except when becoming oldest stored data to be replaced by new data.
ACT_207The VU shall ensure that it does not modify data already stored in a tachograph card (requirements 109 and 109a) except for replacing oldest data by new data (requirement 110) or in the case described in Appendix 1 Paragraph 2.1 Note.
4.4. Audit
Audit capabilities are required only for events that may indicate a manipulation or a security breach attempt. It is not required for the normal exercising of rights even if relevant to security.
AUD_201The VU shall, for events impairing the security of the VU, record those events with associated data (requirements 094, 096 and 109).
AUD_202The events affecting the security of the VU are the following:
—
Security breach attempts,
—
motion sensor authentication failure,
—
tachograph card authentication failure,
—
unauthorised change of motion sensor,
—
card data input integrity error,
—
stored user data integrity error,
—
internal data transfer error,
—
unauthorised case opening,
—
hardware sabotage,
—
last card session not correctly closed,
—
motion data error event,
—
power supply interruption event,
—
VU internal fault.
AUD_203The VU shall enforce audit records storage rules (requirement 094 and 096).
AUD_204The VU shall store audit records generated by the motion sensor in its data memory.
AUD_205It shall be possible to print, display and download audit records.
4.5. Object re-use
REU_201The VU shall ensure that temporary storage objects can be re-used without this involving inadmissible information flow.
4.6. Accuracy
4.6.1. Information flow control policy
ACR_201The VU shall ensure that user data related to requirements 081, 084, 087, 090, 093, 102, 104, 105, 105a and 109 may only be processed from the right input sources:
—
vehicle motion data,
—
VU's real time clock,
—
recording equipment calibration parameters,
—
tachograph cards,
—
user's inputs.
ACR_201aThe VU shall ensure that user data related to requirement 109a may only be entered for the period last card withdrawal — current insertion (requirement 050a).
4.6.2. Internal data transfers
The requirements of this paragraph apply only if the VU makes use of physically separated parts.
ACR_202If data are transferred between physically separated parts of the VU, the data shall be protected from modification.
ACR_203Upon detection of a data transfer error during an internal transfer, transmission shall be repeated and the SEF shall generate an audit record of the event.
4.6.3. Stored data integrity
ACR_204The VU shall check user data stored in the data memory for integrity errors.
ACR_205Upon detection of a stored user data integrity error, the SEF shall generate an audit record.
4.7. Reliability of service
4.7.1. Tests
RLB_201All commands, actions or test points, specific to the testing needs of the manufacturing phase of the VU shall be disabled or removed before the VU activation. It shall not be possible to restore them for later use.
RLB_202The VU shall run self tests, during initial start-up, and during normal operation to verify its correct operation. The VU self tests shall include a verification of the integrity of security data and a verification of the integrity of stored executable code (if not in ROM).
RLB_203Upon detection of an internal fault during self test, the SEF shall:
—
generate an audit record (except in calibration mode) (VU internal fault),
—
Preserve the stored data integrity.
4.7.2. Software
RLB_204There shall be no way to analyse or debug software in the field after the VU activation.
RLB_205Inputs from external sources shall not be accepted as executable code.
4.7.3. Physical protection
RLB_206If the VU is designed so that it can be opened, the VU shall detect any case opening, except in calibration mode, even without external power supply for a minimum of six months. In such a case, the SEF shall generate an audit record (It is acceptable that the audit record is generated and stored after power supply reconnection).
If the VU is designed so that it cannot be opened, it shall be designed such that physical tampering attempts can be easily detected (e.g. through visual inspection).
RLB_207After its activation, the VU shall detect specified (TBD by manufacturer) hardware sabotage.
RLB_208In the case described above, the SEF shall generate an audit record and the VU shall: (TBD by manufacturer).
4.7.4. Power supply interruptions
RLB_209The VU shall detect deviations from the specified values of the power supply, including cut-off.
RLB_210In the case described above, the SEF shall:
—
generate an audit record (except in calibration mode),
—
preserve the secure state of the VU,
—
maintain the security functions, related to components or processes still operational,
—
preserve the stored data integrity.
4.7.5. Reset conditions
RLB_211In case of a power supply interruption, or if a transaction is stopped before completion, or on any other reset conditions, the VU shall be reset cleanly.
4.7.6. Data availability
RLB_212The VU shall ensure that access to resources is obtained when required and that resources are not requested nor retained unnecessarily.
RLB_213The VU must ensure that cards cannot be released before relevant data have been stored to them (requirements 015 and 016)
RLB_214In the case described above, the SEF shall generate an audit record of the event.
4.7.7. Multiple applications
RLB_215If the VU provides applications other than the tachograph application, all applications shall be physically and/or logically separated from each other. These applications shall not share security data. Only one task shall be active at a time.
4.8. Data exchange
This paragraph addresses data exchange between the VU and connected devices.
4.8.1. Data exchange with motion sensor
DEX_201The VU shall verify the integrity and authenticity of motion data imported from the motion sensor
DEX_202Upon detection of a motion data integrity or authenticity error, the SEF shall:
—
generate an audit record,
—
continue to use imported data.
4.8.2. Data exchange with tachograph cards
DEX_203The VU shall verify the integrity and authenticity of data imported from tachograph cards.
DEX_204Upon detection of card data integrity or authenticity error, the VU shall:
—
generate an audit record,
—
not use the data.
DEX_205The VU shall export data to tachograph smart cards with associated security attributes such that the card will be able to verify its integrity and authenticity.
4.8.3. Data exchange with external storage media (downloading function)
DEX_206The VU shall generate an evidence of origin for data downloaded to external media.
DEX_207The VU shall provide a capability to verify the evidence of origin of downloaded data to the recipient.
DEX_208The VU shall download data to external storage media with associated security attributes such that downloaded data integrity and authenticity can be verified.
4.9. Cryptographic support
The requirements of this paragraph are applicable only where needed, depending upon security mechanisms used and upon the manufacturer's solutions.
CSP_201Any cryptographic operation performed by the VU shall be in accordance with a specified algorithm and a specified key size.
CSP_202If the VU generates cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified cryptographic key generation algorithms and specified cryptographic key sizes.
CSP_203If the VU distributes cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified key distribution methods.
CSP_204If the VU accesses cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified cryptographic keys access methods.
CSP_205If the VU destroys cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified cryptographic keys destruction methods.
5. Definition of security mechanisms
Required security mechanisms are specified in Appendix 11.
All other security mechanisms are to be defined by manufacturers.
6. Minimum strength of security mechanisms
The minimum strength of the Vehicle Unit security mechanisms is High, as defined in (ITSEC).
7. Level of assurance
The target level of assurance for the Vehicle Unit is ITSEC level E3, as defined in (ITSEC).
8. Rationale
The following matrixes give a rationale for the SEFs by showing:
—
which SEFs or means counteract which threats,
—
which SEFs fulfil which IT security objectives.
Threats
IT Objectives
Access
Identification
Faults
Tests
Design
Calibration_Parameters
Card_Data_Exchange
Clock
Environment
Fake_Devices
Hardware
Motion_Data
Non_Activated
Output_Data
Power_Supply
Security_Data
Software
Stored_Data
Access
Accountability
Audit
Authentication
Integrity
Output
Processing
Reliability
Secured_Data_Exchange
Physical Personnel Procedural Means
Development
x
x
x
Manufacturing
x
x
Delivery
x
Activation
x
x
Security data generation
x
Security data transport
x
Card availability
x
One driver card
x
Card traceability
x
Approved workshops
x
x
Regular inspection calibration
x
x
x
x
x
Faithful workshops
x
x
Faithful drivers
x
Law enforcement controls
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Software upgrade
x
Security enforcing functions
Identification and authentication
UIA_201 Sensor identification
x
x
x
x
UIA_202 Sensor identity
x
x
x
x
UIA_203 Sensor authentication
x
x
x
x
UIA_204 Sensor re-identification and re-authentication
x
x
x
x
UIA_205 Unforgeable authentication
x
x
x
UIA_206 Authentication failure
x
x
x
x
UIA_207 Users identification
x
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_208 User identity
x
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_209 User authentication
x
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_210 User re-authentication
x
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_211 Authentication means
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_212 PIN checks
x
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_213 Unforgeable authentication
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_214 Authentification failure
x
x
x
x
UIA_215 Remote user identification
x
x
x
UIA_216 Remote user identity
x
x
x
x
UIA_217 Remote user authentication
x
x
x
x
x
UIA_218 Authentication means
x
x
x
x
UIA_219 Unforgeable authentication
x
x
x
x
UIA_220 Authentication failure
x
x
UIA_221 Management device identification
x
x
x
x
UIA_222 Management device identification
x
x
x
x
UIA_223 Unforgeable authentication
x
x
x
x
Access Control
ACC_201 Access control policy
x
x
x
x
x
x
ACC_202 Access rights to functions
x
x
x
x
ACC_203 Access rights to functions
x
x
x
x
ACC_204 VU ID
x
x
ACC_205 Connected sensor ID
x
x
x
ACC_206 Calibration data
x
x
x
x
ACC_207 Calibration data
x
x
x
ACC_208 Time adjustment data
x
x
ACC_209 Time adjustment data
x
x
x
ACC_210 Security data
x
x
x
ACC_211 File structure and access conditions
x
x
x
x
x
Accountability
ACT_201 Drivers accountability
x
x
ACT_202 VU ID data
x
x
ACT_203 Workshops accountability
x
ACT_204 Controllers accountability
x
ACT_205 Vehicle movement accountability
x
ACT_206 Accountability data modification
x
x
x
ACT_207 Accountability data modification
x
x
x
Audit
AUD_201 Audit records
x
AUD_202 Audit events list
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
AUD_203 Audit records storage rules
x
AUD_204 Sensor audit records
x
AUD_205 Audit tools
x
Re-use
REU_201 Re-use
x
x
x
Accuracy
ACR_201 Information flow control policy
x
x
x
x
x
ACR_202 Internal transfers
x
x
x
x
ACR_203 Internal transfers
x
x
ACR_204 Stored data integrity
x
x
x
ACR_205 Stored data integrity
x
x
Reliability
RLB_201 Manufacturing tests
x
x
x
RLB_202 Self tests
x
x
x
x
x
RLB_203 Self tests
x
x
x
x
RLB_204 Software analysis
x
x
x
RLB_205 Software input
x
x
x
x
RLB_206 Case opening
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
RLB_207 Hardware sabotage
x
x
RLB_208 Hardware sabotage
x
x
RLB_209 Power supply interruptions
x
x
RLB_210 Power supply interruptions
x
x
RLB_211 Reset
x
x
RLB_212 Data availability
x
x
RLB_213 Card release
x
RLB_214 Card session not correctly closed
x
RLB_215 Multiple applications
x
Data exchange
DEX_201 Secured motion data import
x
x
DEX_202 Secured motion data import
x
x
DEX_203 Secured card data import
x
x
DEX_204 Secured card data imports
x
x
DEX_205 Secured data export to cards
x
x
DEX_206 Evidence of origin
x
x
DEX_207 Evidence of origin
x
x
DEX_208 Secure export to external media
x
x
Cryptographic support
CSP_201 Algorithms
x
x
CSP_202 key generation
x
x
CSP_203 key distribution
x
x
CSP_204 key access
x
x
CSP_205 key destruction
x
x
TACHOGRAPH CARD GENERIC SECURITY TARGET
1. Introduction
This document contains a description of the tachograph card, of the threats it must be able to counteract and of the security objectives it must achieve. It specifies the required security enforcing functions. It states the claimed minimum strength of security mechanisms, and the required level of assurance for the development and the evaluation.
Requirements referred to in the document, are those of the body of Annex I B. For clarity of reading, duplication sometimes arises between Annex I B body requirements and security target requirements. In case of ambiguity between a security target requirement and the Annex I B requirement referred by this security target requirement, the Annex I B body requirement shall prevail.
Annex I B body requirements not referred by security targets are not the subject of security enforcing functions.
A tachograph card is a standard smart card carrying a dedicated tachograph application, and shall comply with up-to-date functional and assurance security requirements applicable to smart cards. This security target therefore incorporates only the extra security requirements needed by the tachograph application.
Unique labels have been assigned to threats, objectives, procedural means and SEF specifications for the purpose of traceability to development and evaluation documentation.
2. Abbreviations, definitions and references
2.1. Abbreviations
IC
Integrated Circuit (electronic component designed to perform processing and/or memory functions)
OS
Operating system
PIN
Personal identification number
ROM
Read only memory
SFP
Security functions policy
TBD
To be defined
TOE
Target of evaluation
TSF
TOE security function
VU
Vehicle unit.
2.2. Definitions
Digital tachograph
Recording equipment.
Sensitive data
Data stored by the tachograph card that need to be protected for integrity, unauthorised modification and confidentiality (where applicable for security data). Sensitive data includes security data and user data.
Security data
The specific data needed to support security enforcing functions (e.g. crypto keys).
System
Equipment, people or organisations involved in any way with the recording equipment.
User
Any entity (human user or external IT entity) outside the TOE that interacts with the TOE (when not used in the expression “user data“).
User data
Sensitive data stored in the tachograph card, other than security data. User data include identification data and activity data.
Identification data
Identification data include card identification data and cardholder identification data.
Card identification data
User data related to card identification as defined by requirements 190, 191, 192, 194, 215, 231 and 235.
Cardholder identification data
User data related to cardholder identification as defined by requirements 195, 196, 216, 232 and 236.
Activity data
Activity data include cardholder activities data, events and faults data and control activity data.
Cardholder activities data
User data related to the activities carried by the cardholder as defined by requirements 197, 199, 202, 212, 212a, 217, 219, 221, 226, 227, 229, 230a, 233 and 237.
Events and faults data
User data related to events or faults as defined by requirements 204, 205, 207, 208 and 223.
Control activity data
User data related to law enforcement controls as defined by requirements 210 and 225.
2.3. References
ITSEC
ITSEC Information Technology Security Evaluation Criteria 1991
IC PP
Smartcard Integrated Circuit Protection Profile — version 2.0 — issue September 1998. Registered at French certification body under the number PP/9806
ES PP
Smart Card Integrated Circuit With Embedded Software Protection Profile — version 2.0 — issue June 99. Registered at French certification body under the number PP/9911
3. Product Rationale
3.1. Tachograph card description and method of use
A tachograph card is a smart card, as described in (IC PP) and (ES PP), carrying an application intended for its use with the recording equipment.
The basic functions of the tachograph card are:
—
to store card identification and card holder identification data. These data are used by the vehicle unit to identify the cardholder, provide accordingly functions and data access rights, and ensure cardholder accountability for his activities,
—
to store cardholder activities data, events and faults data and control activities data, related to the cardholder.
A tachograph card is therefore intended to be used by a card interface device of a vehicle unit. It may also be used by any card reader (e.g. of a personal computer) which shall have full read access right on any user data.
During the end-usage phase of a tachograph card life cycle (phase 7 of life-cycle as described in (ES PP)), vehicle units only may write user data to the card.
The functional requirements for a tachograph card are specified in Annex I B body text and Appendix 2.
3.2. Tachograph card life cycle
The tachograph card life cycle conforms to smart card life cycle described in (ES PP).
3.3. Threats
In addition to the smart card general threats listed in (ES PP) and (IC PP), the tachograph card may face the following threats:
3.3.1. Final aims
The final aim of attackers will be to modify user data stored within the TOE.
T.Ident_Data
A successful modification of identification data held by the TOE (e.g. the type of card, or the card expiry date or the cardholder identification data) would allow a fraudulent use of the TOE and would be a major threat to the global security objective of the system.
T.Activity_Data
A successful modification of activity data stored in the TOE would be a threat to the security of the TOE.
T.Data_Exchange
A successful modification of activity data (addition, deletion, modification) during import or export would be a threat to the security of the TOE.
3.3.2. Attack paths
TOE's assets may be attacked by:
—
trying to gain illicit knowledge of TOE's hardware and software design and especially of its security functions or security data. Illicit knowledge may be gained though attacks to designer or manufacturer material (theft, bribery, …) or through direct examination of the TOE (physical probing, inference analysis, …),
—
taking advantage of weaknesses in TOE design or realisation (exploit errors in hardware, errors in software, transmission faults, errors induced in TOE by environmental stress, exploit weaknesses of security functions such as authentication procedures, data access control, cryptographic operations, …),
—
modifying the TOE or its security functions through physical, electrical or logical attacks or combination of these.
3.4. Security Objectives
The main security objective of the entire digital tachograph system is the following:
O.Main
The data to be checked by control authorities must be available and reflect fully and accurately the activity of controlled drivers and vehicles in terms of driving, work, availability and rest period and in terms of vehicle speed.
Therefore the main security objectives of the TOE, contributing to this global security objective are the following:
O.Card_Identification_Data
The TOE must preserve card identification data and cardholder identification data stored during card personalisation process,
O.Card_Activity_Storage
The TOE must preserve user data stored in the card by vehicle units.
3.5. Information technology security objectives
In addition to the smart card general security objectives listed in (ES PP) and (IC PP), the specific IT security objectives of the TOE that contributes to its main security objectives during its end-usage life-cycle phase are the following:
O.Data_Access
The TOE must limit user data write access rights to authenticated vehicle units,
O.Secure_Communications
The TOE must be able to support secure communication protocols and procedures between the card and the card interface device when required by the application.
3.6. Physical, personnel or procedural means
The physical, personnel or procedural requirements that contribute to the security of the TOE are listed in (ES PP) and (IC PP) (chapters security objectives for the environment).
4. Security enforcing functions
This paragraph refines some of the permitted operations such as assignment or selection of (ES PP) and provides additional SEF functional requirements.
4.1. Compliance to protection profiles
CPP_301The TOE shall comply with (IC PP).
CPP_302The TOE shall comply with (ES PP) as refined further.
4.2. User identification and authentication
The card must identify the entity in which it is inserted and know whether it is an authenticated vehicle unit or not. The card may export any user data whatever the entity it is connected to, except the control card which may export card holder identification data to authenticated vehicle units only (such that a controller is ensured that the vehicle unit is not a fake one by seeing his name on display or printouts).
4.2.1. User identification
Assignment (FIA_UID.1.1) List of TSF mediated actions: none.
Assignment (FIA_ATD.1.1) List of security attributes:
USER_GROUP VEHICLE_UNIT, NON_VEHICLE_UNIT,
USER_ID Vehicle Registration Number (VRN) and registering Member State Code (USER_ID is known for USER_GROUP = VEHICLE_UNIT only).
4.2.2. User authentication
Assignment (FIA_UAU.1.1) List of TSF mediated actions:
—
Driver and Workshop cards: export user data with security attributes (card data download function),
—
Control card: export user data without security attributes except cardholder identification data.
UIA_301Authentication of a vehicle unit shall be performed by means of proving that it possesses security data that only the system could distribute.
Selection (FIA_UAU.3.1 and FIA_UAU.3.2): prevent.
Assignment (FIA_UAU.4.1) Identified authentication mechanism(s): any authentication mechanism.
UIA_302The Workshop card shall provide an additional authentication mechanism by checking a PIN code (This mechanism is intended for the vehicle unit to ensure the identity of the card holder, it is not intended to protect workshop card content).
4.2.3. Authentication failures
The following assignments describe the card reaction for each single user authentication failure.
Assignment (FIA_AFL.1.1) Number: 1, list of authentication events: authentication of a card interface device.
Assignment (FIA_AFL.1.2) List of actions:
—
warn the entity connected,
—
assume the user as NON_VEHICLE_UNIT.
The following assignments describe the card reaction in the case of failure of the additional authentication mechanism required in UIA_302.
Assignment (FIA_AFL.1.1) Number: 5, list of authentication events: PIN checks (workshop card).
Assignment (FIA_AFL.1.2) List of actions:
—
warn the entity connected,
—
block the PIN check procedure such that any subsequent PIN check attempt will fail,
—
be able to indicate to subsequent users the reason of the blocking.
4.3. Access control
4.3.1. Access control policy
During end-usage phase of its life cycle, the tachograph card is the subject of one single access control security function policy (SFP) named AC_SFP.
Assignment (FDP_ACC.2.1) Access control SFP: AC_SFP.
4.3.2. Access control functions
Assignment (FDP_ACF.1.1) Access control SFP: AC_SFP.
Assignment (FDP_ACF.1.1) Named group of security attributes: USER_GROUP.
Assignment (FDP_ACF.1.2) Rules governing access among controlled subjects and controlled objects using controlled operations on controlled objects:
GENERAL_READ
:
User data may be read from the TOE by any user, except cardholder identification data which may be read from control cards by VEHICLE_UNIT only.
IDENTIF_WRITE
:
Identification data may only be written once and before the end of phase 6 of card's life-cycle. No user may write or modify identification data during end-usage phase of card's life-cycle.
ACTIVITY_WRITE
:
Activity data may be written to the TOE by VEHICLE_UNIT only.
SOFT_UPGRADE
:
No user may upgrade TOE's software.
FILE_STRUCTURE
:
Files structure and access conditions shall be created before end of phase 6 of TOE's life-cycle and then locked from any future modification or deletion by any user.
4.4. Accountability
ACT_301The TOE shall hold permanent identification data.
ACT_302There shall be an indication of the time and date of the TOE's personalisation. This indication shall remain unalterable.
4.5. Audit
The TOE must monitor events that indicate a potential violation of its security.
Assignment (FAU_SAA.1.2) Subset of defined auditable events:
—
cardholder authentication failure (5 consecutive unsuccessful PIN checks),
—
self test error,
—
stored data integrity error,
—
activity data input integrity error.
4.6. Accuracy
4.6.1. Stored data integrity
Assignment (FDP_SDI.2.2) Actions to be taken: warn the entity connected,
4.6.2. Basic data authentication
Assignment (FDP_DAU.1.1) List of objects or information types: activity data.
Assignment (FDP_DAU.1.2) List of subjects: any.
4.7. Reliability of service
4.7.1. Tests
Selection (FPT_TST.1.1): during initial start-up, periodically during normal operation.
Note: during initial start-up means before code is executed (and not necessarily during Answer To Reset procedure).
RLB_301The TOE's self tests shall include the verification of the integrity of any software code not stored in ROM.
RLB_302Upon detection of a self test error the TSF shall warn the entity connected.
RLB_303After OS testing is completed, all testing-specific commands and actions shall be disabled or removed. It shall not be possible to override these controls and restore them for use. Command associated exclusively with one life cycle state shall never be accessed during another state.
4.7.2. Software
RLB_304There shall be no way to analyse, debug or modify TOE's software in the field.
RLB_305Inputs from external sources shall not be accepted as executable code.
4.7.3. Power supply
RLB_306The TOE shall preserve a secure state during power supply cut-off or variations.
4.7.4. Reset conditions
RLB_307If power is cut (or if power variations occur) from the TOE, or if a transaction is stopped before completion, or on any other reset conditions, the TOE shall be reset cleanly.
4.8. Data exchange
4.8.1. Data exchange with a vehicle unit
DEX_301The TOE shall verify the integrity and authenticity of data imported from a vehicle unit.
DEX_302Upon detection of an imported data integrity error, the TOE shall:
—
warn the entity sending the data,
—
not use the data.
DEX_303The TOE shall export user data to the vehicle unit with associated security attributes, such that the vehicle unit will be able to verify the integrity and authenticity of data received.
4.8.2. Export of data to a non-vehicle unit (download function)
DEX_304The TOE shall be able to generate an evidence of origin for data downloaded to external media.
DEX_305The TOE shall be able to provide a capability to verify the evidence of origin of downloaded data to the recipient.
DEX_306The TOE shall be able to download data to external storage media with associated security attributes such that downloaded data integrity can be verified.
4.9. Cryptographic support
CSP_301If the TSF generates cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified cryptographic key generation algorithms and specified cryptographic key sizes. Generated cryptographic session keys shall have a limited (TBD by manufacturer and not more than 240) number of possible use.
CSP_302If the TSF distributes cryptographic keys, it shall be in accordance with specified cryptographic key distribution methods.
5. Definition of security mechanisms
Required security mechanisms are specified in Appendix 11.
All other security mechanisms are to be defined by the TOE manufacturer.
6. Claimed minimum strength of mechanisms
The minimum strength of mechanisms for the Tachograph Card is High as defined in (ITSEC).
7. Level of Assurance
The target level of assurance for the Tachograph Card is ITSEC level E3, as defined in (ITSEC).
8. Rationale
The following matrixes give a rationale for the additional SEFs by showing:
—
which SEFs counteract which threats,
—
which SEFs fulfil which IT security objectives.
Threats
IT Objectives
T.CLON*
T.DIS_ES2
T.T_ES
T.T_CMD
T.MOD_SOFT*
T.MOD_LOAD
T.MOD_EXE
T.MOD_SHARE
Ident_Data
Activity_Data
Data_Exchange
O.TAMPER_ES
O.CLON*
O.OPERATE*
O.FLAW*
O.DIS_MECHANISM2
O.DIS_MEMORY*
O.MOD_MEMORY*
Data_Access
Secured_Communications
UIA_301 Authentication means
x
UIA_302 PIN checks
x
ACT_301 Identification data
ACT_302 Personalisation date
RLB_301 Software integrity
x
x
RLB_302 Self tests
x
x
RLB_303 Manufacturing tests
x
x
x
x
RLB_304 Software analysis
x
x
x
x
x
RLB_305 Software input
x
x
x
x
x
RLB_306 Power supply
x
x
x
x
RLB_307 Reset
x
x
DEX_301 Secured data import
x
x
DEX_302 Secured data import
x
x
DEX_303 Secured data export to VU
x
x
DEX_304 Evidence of origin
x
x
DEX_305 Evidence of origin
x
x
DEX_306 Secured export to external media
x
x
CSP_301 key generation
x
x
CSP_302 key distribution
x
x
Appendix 11
COMMON SECURITY MECHANISMS
CONTENTS
1.
1.1.
1.2.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.2.1.
2.2.2.
2.2.3.
3.
3.1.
3.1.1.
3.1.2.
3.1.3.
3.1.4.
3.2.
3.3.
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
4.
5.
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
6.
6.1.
6.2.
1. GENERALITIES
This appendix specifies the security mechanisms ensuring:
—
the mutual authentication between VUs and tachograph cards, including session key agreement,
—
the confidentiality, integrity and authentication of data transferred between VUs and tachograph cards,
—
the integrity and authentication of data downloaded from VUs to external storage media,
—
the integrity and authentication of data downloaded from tachograph cards to external storage media.
1.1. References
The following references are used in this Appendix:
SHA-1
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). FIPS Publication 180-1: Secure Hash Standard. April 1995
PKCS1
RSA Laboratories. PKCS # 1: RSA Encryption Standard. Version 2.0. October 1998
TDES
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). FIPS Publication 46-3: Data Encryption Standard. Draft 1999
TDES-OP
ANSI X9.52, Triple Data Encryption Algorithm Modes of Operation. 1998
ISO/IEC 7816-4
Information Technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 4: Interindustry commands for interexchange. First edition: 1995 + Amendment 1: 1997
ISO/IEC 7816-6
Information Technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 6: Interindustry data elements. First edition: 1996 + Cor 1: 1998
ISO/IEC 7816-8
Information Technology — Identification cards — Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts — Part 8: Security related interindustry commands. First edition 1999
ISO/IEC 9796-2
Information Technology — Security techniques — Digital signature schemes giving message recovery — Part 2: Mechanisms using a hash function. First edition: 1997
ISO/IEC 9798-3
Information Technology — Security techniques — Entity authentication mechanisms — Part 3: Entity authentication using a public key algorithm. Second edition 1998
ISO 16844-3
Road vehicles — Tachograph systems — Part 3: Motion sensor interface.
1.2. Notations and abbreviated terms
The following notations and abbreviated terms are used in this Appendix:
(Ka, Kb, Kc)
a key bundle for use by the triple data encryption algorithm
CA
Certification authority
CAR
Certification authority reference
CC
Cryptographic checksum
CG
Cryptogram
CH
Command header
CHA
Certificate holder authorisation
CHR
Certificate holder reference
D()
Decryption with DES
DE
Data element
DO
Data object
d
RSA private key, private exponent
e
RSA public key, public exponent
E()
Encryption with DES
EQT
Equipment
Hash()
hash value, an output of hash
Hash
hash function
KID
Key identifier
Km
TDES key. Master Key defined in ISO 16844-3
Kmvu
TDES key inserted in vehicle units
Kmwc
TDES key inserted in workshop cards
m
message representative an integer between 0 and n-1
n
RSA keys, modulus
PB
Padding bytes
PI
Padding indicator byte (for use in cryptogram for confidentiality DO)
PV
Plain value
s
signature representative, an integer between 0 and n-1
SSC
Send sequence counter
SM
Secure messaging
TCBC
TDEA cipher block chaining mode of operation
TDEA
Triple data encryption algorithm
TLV
Tag length value
VU
Vehicle unit
X.C
the certificate of user X issued by a certification authority
X.CA
a certification authority of user X
X.CA.PKoX.C
the operation of unwrapping a certificate to extract a public key. It is an infix operator, whose left operand is the public key of a certification authority, and whose right operand is the certificate issued by that certification authority. The outcome is the public key of the user X whose certificate is the right operand,
X.PK
public key of a user X
X.PK[I]
RSA encipherment of some information I, using the public key of user X
X.SK
RSA private key of a user X
X.SK[I]
RSA encipherment of some information I, using the private key of user X
′xx′
a Hexadecimal value
||
concatenation operator.
2. CRYPTOGRAPHIC SYSTEMS AND ALGORITHMS
2.1. Cryptographic systems
CSM_001Vehicle units and tachograph cards shall use a classical RSA public-key cryptographic system to provide the following security mechanisms:
—
authentication between vehicle units and cards,
—
transport of Triple-DES session keys between vehicle units and tachograph cards,
—
digital signature of data downloaded from vehicle units or tachograph cards to external media.
CSM_002Vehicle units and tachograph cards shall use a Triple DES symmetric cryptographic system to provide a mechanism for data integrity during user data exchange between vehicle units and tachograph cards, and to provide, where applicable, confidentiality of data exchange between vehicle units and tachograph cards.
2.2. Cryptographic algorithms
CSM_003The RSA algorithm is fully defined by the following relations:
2.2.1. RSA algorithm
A more comprehensive description of the RSA function can be found in reference (PKCS1).
Public exponent, e, for RSA calculations will be different from 2 in all generated RSA keys.
2.2.2. Hash algorithm
CSM_004The digital signature mechanisms shall use the SHA-1 hash algorithm as defined in reference (SHA-1).
2.2.3. Data encryption algorithm
CSM_005DES based algorithms shall be used in Cipher Block Chaining mode of operation.
3. KEYS AND CERTIFICATES
3.1. Keys generation and distribution
3.1.1. RSA keys generation and distribution
CSM_006RSA keys shall be generated through three functional hierarchical levels:
—
European level,
—
Member State level,
—
Equipment level.
CSM_007At European level, a single European key pair (EUR.SK and EUR.PK) shall be generated. The European private key shall be used to certify the Member States public keys. Records of all certified keys shall be kept. These tasks shall be handled by a European certification authority, under the authority and responsibility of the European Commission.
CSM_008At Member State level, a Member State key pair (MS.SK and MS.PK) shall be generated. Member States public keys shall be certified by the European Certification Authority. The Member State private key shall be used to certify public keys to be inserted in equipment (vehicle unit or tachograph card). Records of all certified public keys shall be kept with the identification of the equipment to which it is intended. These tasks shall be handled by a Member State certification authority. A Member State may regularly change its key pair.
CSM_009At equipment level, one single key pair (EQT.SK and EQT.PK) shall be generated and inserted in each equipment. Equipment public keys shall be certified by a Member State certification authority. These tasks may be handled by equipment manufacturers, equipment personalisers or Member State authorities. This key pair is used for authentication, digital signature and encipherement services
CSM_010Private keys confidentiality shall be maintained during generation, transport (if any) and storage.
The following picture summarises the data flow of this process:
3.1.2. RSA test keys
CSM_011For the purpose of equipment testing (including interoperability tests) the European certification authority shall generate a different single European test key pair and at least two Member State test key pairs, the public keys of which shall be certified with the European private test key. Manufacturers shall insert, in equipment undergoing type approval tests, test keys certified by one of these Member State test keys.
3.1.3. Motion sensor keys
The confidentiality of the three TDES keys described below shall be appropriately maintained during generation, transport (if any) and storage.
In order to support recording equipment compliant with ISO 16844, the European certification authority and the Member State certification authorities shall, in addition, ensure the following:
CSM_036The European certification authority shall generate KmVU and KmWC, two independent and unique Triple DES keys, and generate Km as:
The European certification authority shall forward these keys, under appropriately secured procedures, to Member States certification authorities at their request.
CSM_037Member States certification authorities shall:
—
use Km to encrypt motion sensor data requested by motion sensor manufacturers (data to be encrypted with Km is defined in ISO 16844-3),
—
forward KmVU to vehicle unit manufacturers, under appropriately secured procedures, for insertion in vehicle units,
—
ensure that KmWC will be inserted in all workshop cards (SensorInstallationSecData in Sensor_Installation_Data elementary file) during card personalisation.
3.1.4. T-DES session keys generation and distribution
CSM_012Vehicle units and tachograph cards shall, as a part of the mutual authentication process, generate and exchange necessary data to elaborate a common Triple DES session key. This exchange of data shall be protected for confidentiality through an RSA crypt-mechanism.
CSM_013This key shall be used for all subsequent cryptographic operations using secure messaging. Its validity shall expire at the end of the session (withdrawal of the card or reset of the card) and/or after 240 use (one use of the key = one command using secure messaging sent to the card and associated response).
3.2. Keys
CSM_014RSA keys shall have (whatever the level) the following lengths: modulus n 1024 bits, public exponent e 64 bits maximum, private exponent d 1024 bits.
CSM_015Triple DES keys shall have the form (Ka, Kb, Ka) where Ka and Kb are independent 64 bits long keys. No parity error detecting bits shall be set.
3.3. Certificates
CSM_016RSA Public key certificates shall be “non self-descriptive““Card Verifiable“ certificates (Ref.: ISO/IEC 7816-8)
3.3.1. Certificates content
CSM_017RSA Public key certificates are built with the following data in the following order:
Data
Format
Bytes
Obs
CPI
INTEGER
1
Certificate profile identifier (′01′ for this version)
CAR
OCTET STRING
8
Certification authority reference
CHA
OCTET STRING
7
Certificate holder authorisation
EOV
TimeReal
4
Certificate end of validity. Optional, ′FF′ padded if not used
CHR
OCTET STRING
8
Certificate holder reference
n
OCTET STRING
128
Public key (modulus)
e
OCTET STRING
8
Public key (public exponent)
164
Notes:
1.
The “Certificate Profile Identifier“ (CPI) delineates the exact structure of an authentication certificate. It can be used as an equipment internal identifier of a relevant headerlist which describes the concatenation of Data Elements within the certificate.
The headerlist associated with this certificate content is as follows:
2.
The “Certification Authority Reference“ (CAR) has the purpose of identifying the certificate issuing CA, in such a way that the data element can be used at the same time as an authority key identifier to reference the public key of the certification authority (for coding, see Key Identifier below).
3.
The “Certificate Holder Authorisation“ ((CHA) is used to identify the rights of the certificate holder. It consists of the Tachograph Application ID and of the type of equipment to which the certificate is intended (according to EquipmentType data element, “00“ for a Member State).
4.
“Certificate Holder Reference“ (CHR) has the purpose of identifying uniquely the certificate holder, in such a way that the Data Element can be used at the same time as a Subject Key Identifier to reference the Public Key of the certificate holder.
5.
Key Identifiers uniquely identify certificate holder or certification authorities. They are coded as follows:
5.1.
Equipment (VU or Card):
Data
Equipment serial number
Date
Type
Manufacturer
Length
4 Bytes
2 Bytes
1 Byte
1 Byte
Value
Integer
mm yy BCD coding
Manufacturer specific
Manufacturer code
In the case of a VU, the manufacturer, when requesting certificates, may or may not know the identification of the equipment in which the keys will be inserted.
In the first case, the manufacturer will send the equipment identification with the public key to its Member State authority for certification. The certificate will then contain the equipment identification, and the manufacturer must ensure that keys and certificate are inserted in the intended equipment. The Key identifier has the form shown above.
In the later case, the manufacturer must uniquely identify each certificate request and send this identification with the public key to its Member State authority for certification. The certificate will contain the request identification. The manufacturer must feed back its Member State authority with the assignment of key to equipment (i.e. certificate request identification, equipment identification) after key installation in the equipment. The key identifier has the following form:
Data
Certificate request serial number
Date
Type
Manufacturer
Length
4 Bytes
2 Bytes
1 Byte
1 Byte
Value
BCD coding
mm jj BCD coding
′FF′
Manufacturer code
5.2.
Certification Authority:
Data
Authority identification
Key serial number
Additional info
Identifier
Length
4 Bytes
1 Byte
2 Bytes
1 Byte
Value
1 Byte nation numerical code
Integer
additional coding (CA specific)
′01′
3 Bytes nation alphanumerical code
′FF FF′ if not used
The key serial number is used to distinguish the different keys of a Member State, in the case the key is changed.
6.
Certificate verifiers shall implicitly know that the public key certified is an RSA key relevant to authentication, digital signature verification and encipherement for confidentiality services (the certificate contains no Object Identifier to specify it).
3.3.2. Certificates issued
CSM_018The certificate issued is a digital signature with partial recovery of the certificate content in accordance with ISO/IEC 9796-2, with the “Certification Authority Reference“ appended.
With certificate content
Notes:
1.
This certificate is 194 bytes long.
2.
CAR, being hidden by the signature, is also appended to the signature, such that the public key of the certification authority may be selected for the verification of the certificate.
3.
The certificate verifier shall implicitly know the algorithm used by the certification authority to sign the certificate.
4.
The headerlist associated with this issued certificate is as follows:
3.3.3. Certificate verification and unwrapping
Certificate verification and unwrapping consists in verifying the signature in accordance with ISO/IEC 9796-2, retrieving the certificate content and the public key contained: X.PK = X.CA.PKoX.C, and verifying the validity of the certificate.
CSM_019It involves the following steps:
verify signature and retrieve content:
—
from X.C retrieve Sign, Cn′ and CAR′:
—
from CAR′ select appropriate Certification Authority Public Key (if not done before through other means)
—
open Sign with CA Public Key: Sr′ = X.CA.PK [Sign],
—
check Sr′ starts with ′6A′ and ends with ′BC′
—
compute Cr′ and H′ from:
—
Recover certificate content C′ = Cr′ || Cn′,
—
check Hash(C′) = H′
If the checks are OK the certificate is a genuine one, its content is C′.
Verify validity. From C′:
—
if applicable, check End of validity date,
Retrieve and store public key, Key Identifier, Certificate Holder Authorisation and Certificate End of Validity from C′:
—
X.PK = n || e
—
X.KID = CHR
—
X.CHA = CHA
—
X.EOV = EOV.
4. MUTUAL AUTHENTICATION MECHANISM
Mutual authentication between cards and VUs is based on the following principle:
Each party shall demonstrate to the other that it owns a valid key pair, the public key of which has been certified by a Member State certification authority, itself being certified by the European certification authority.
Demonstration is made by signing with the private key a random number sent by the other party, who must recover the random number sent when verifying this signature.
The mechanism is triggered at card insertion by the VU. It starts with the exchange of certificates and unwrapping of public keys, and ends with the setting of a session key.
CSM_020The following protocol shall be used (arrows indicate commands and data exchanged (see Appendix 2)):
5. VU-CARDS DATA TRANSFER CONFIDENTIALITY, INTEGRITY AND AUTHENTICATION MECHANISMS
5.1. Secure messaging
CSM_021VU-cards data transfers integrity shall be protected through Secure Messaging in accordance with references (ISO/IEC 7816-4) and (ISO/IEC 7816-8).
CSM_022When data need to be protected during transfer, a cryptographic checksum data object shall be appended to the data objects sent within the command or the response. The cryptographic checksum shall be verified by the receiver.
CSM_023The cryptographic checksum of data sent within a command shall integrate the command header, and all data objects sent (= > CLA = ′0C′, and all data objects shall be encapsulated with tags in which b1 = 1).
CSM_024The response status-information bytes shall be protected by a cryptographic checksum when the response contains no data field.
CSM_025Cryptographic checksums shall be four bytes long.
The structure of commands and responses when using secure messaging is therefore the following:
The DOs used are a partial set of the Secure Messaging DOs described in ISO/IEC 7816-4:
Tag
Mnemonic
Meaning
′81′
TPV
Plain Value not BER-TLV coded data (to be protected by CC)
′97′
TLE
Value of Le in the unsecured command (to be protected by CC)
′99′
TSW
Status-Info (to be protected by CC)
′8E′
TCC
Cryptographic Checksum
′87′
TPI CG
Padding Indicator Byte || Cryptogram (Plain Value not coded in BER-TLV)
Given an unsecured command response pair:
Command header
Command body
CLA INS P1 P2
(Lc-field) (Data field) (Le-field)
four bytes
L bytes, denoted as B1 to BL
Response body
Response trailer
(Data field)
SW1
SW2
Lr data bytes
two bytes
The corresponding secured command response pair is:
Secured command:
Command header (CH)
Command body
CLA INS P1 P2
(New Lc field)
(New Data field)
(New Le field)
′OC′
Length of new data field
TPV
LPV
PV
TLE
LLE
Le
TCC
LCC
CC
′00′
′81′
Lc
Data field
′97′
′01′
Le
′8E′
′04′
CC
Data to be integrated in checksum = CH || PB || TPV || LPV || PV || TLE || LLE || Le || PB
PB = padding bytes (80 .. 00) in accordance with ISO-IEC 7816-4 and ISO 9797 method 1.
DOs PV and LE are present only when there is some corresponding data in the unsecured command.
Secured response:
1.
Case where response data field is not empty and needs not to be protected for confidentiality:
Response body
Response trailer
(New data field)
new SW1 SW2
TPV
LPV
PV
TCC
LCC
CC
′81′
Lr
Data field
′8E′
′04′
CC
Data to be integrated in checksum = TPV || LPV || PV || PB
2.
Case where response data field is not empty and needs to be protected for confidentiality:
Response body
Response trailer
(New data field)
new SW1 SW2
TPI CG
LPI CG
PI CG
TCC
LCC
CC
′87′
PI || CG
′8E′
′04′
CC
Data to be carried by CG: non BER-TLV coded data and padding bytes.
Data to be integrated in checksum = TPI CG || LPI CG || PI CG || PB
3.
Case where response data field is empty:
Response body
Response trailer
(New data field)
new SW1 SW2
TSW
LSW
SW
TCC
LCC
CC
′99′
′02′
New SW1 SW2
′8E′
′04′
CC
Data to be integrated in checksum = TSW || LSW || SW || PB
5.2. Treatment of secure messaging errors
CSM_026When the tachograph card recognises an SM error while interpreting a command, then the status bytes must be returned without SM. In accordance with ISO/IEC 7816-4, the following status bytes are defined to indicate SM errors:
′66 88′
verification of cryptographic checksum failed,
′69 87′
expected SM data objects missing,
′69 88′
SM data objects incorrect.
CSM_027When the tachograph card returns status bytes without SM DOs or with an erroneous SM DO, the session must be aborted by the VU.
5.3. Algorithm to compute cryptographic checksums
CSM_028Cryptographic checksums are built using a retail MACs in accordance with ANSI X9.19 with DES:
—
initial stage: the initial check block y0 is E(Ka, SSC).
—
sequential stage: the check blocks y1, …, yn are calculated using Ka.
—
final stage: the cryptographic checksum is calculated from the last check block yn as follows: E(Ka, D(Kb, yn)).
where E() means encryption with DES, and D() means decryption with DES.
The four most significant bytes of the cryptographic checksum are transferred
CSM_029The send sequence counter (SSC) shall be initiated during key agreement procedure to:
Initial SSC: Rnd3 (4 least significant bytes) || Rnd1 (4 least significant bytes).
CSM_030The send sequence counter shall be increased by 1 each time before a MAC is calculated (i.e. the SSC for the first command is Initial SSC + 1, the SSC for the first response is Initial SSC + 2).
The following figure shows the calculation of the retail MAC:
5.4. Algorithm to compute cryptograms for confidentiality DOs
CSM_031Cryptograms are computed using TDEA in TCBC mode of operation in accordance with references (TDES) and (TDES-OP) and with the Null vector as Initial Value block.
The following figure shows the application of keys in TDES:
6. DATA DOWNLOAD DIGITAL SIGNATURE MECHANISMS
CSM_032The intelligent dedicated equipment (IDE) stores data received from an equipment (VU or card) during one download session within one physical data file. This file must contain the certificates MSi.C and EQT.C. The file contains digital signatures of data blocks as specified in Appendix 7 Data Downloading Protocols.
CSM_033Digital signatures of downloaded data shall use a digital signature scheme with appendix such, that downloaded data may be read without any decipherment if desired.
6.1. Signature generation
CSM_034Data signature generation by the equipment shall follow the signature scheme with appendix defined in reference (PKCS1) with the SHA-1 hash function:
Signature = EQT.SK[′00′ || ′01′ || PS || ′00′ || DER(SHA-1(Data))]
PS
Padding string of octets with value ′FF′ such that length is 128.
DER(SHA-1(M)) is the encoding of the algorithm ID for the hash function and the hash value into an ASN.1 value of type DigestInfo (distinguished encoding rules):
′30′||′21′||′30′||′09′||′06′||′05′||′2B′||′0E′||′03′||′02′||′1A′||′05′||′00′||′04′||′14′||Hash Value.
6.2. Signature verification
CSM_035Data signature verification on downloaded data shall follow the signature scheme with appendix defined in reference (PKCS1) with the SHA-1 hash function.
The European public key EUR.PK needs to be known independently (and trusted) by the verifier.
The following table illustrates the protocol an IDE carrying a Control card can follow to verify the integrity of data downloaded and stored on the ESM (external storage media). The control card is used to perform the decipherement of digital signatures. This function may in this case not be implemented in the IDE.
The equipment that has downloaded and signed the data to be analysed is denoted EQT.
(1) This way of computing the continuous driving time and the cumulative break time serves into the recording equipment for computing the continuous driving time warning. It does not prejudge the legal interpretation to be made of these times.
(2) UNKNOWN periods correspond to periods where the driver's card was not inserted in a recording equipment and for which no manual entry of driver activities was made. period of 45 minutes or more (this period may have been split in several periods of 15 minutes or more). The computations involved take into account, as needed, past activities stored on the driver card. When the driver has not inserted his card, the computations involved are based on the data memory recordings related to the current period where no card was inserted and related to the relevant slot;
(3) Directive 97/27/EC of 22 July 1997 relating to the masses and dimensions of certain categories of motor vehicles and their trailers and amending Directive 70/156/EEC (OJ L 233, 25.8.1997, p. 1).
(4) OJ L 57, 2.3.1992, p. 27.
(5) Council Recommendation 95/144/EC of 7 April 1995 on common information technology security evaluation criteria (OJ L 93, 26.4.1995, p. 27).
(6) OJ L 129, 14.5.1992, p. 95.
(7) Directive 76/114/EEC, of 18 December 1975 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to statutory plates and inscriptions for motor vehicles and their trailers, and their location and method of attachment (OJ L 24, 30.1.1976, p. 1).
(8) OJ L 281, 23.11.1995, p. 31.
(9) 008In these situations the recording equipment shall use only the tachograph card inserted in the driver slot.
(10) 095The recording equipment shall also record and store in its data memory:
—
the date and time of the last OVER SPEEDING CONTROL,
—
the date and time of the first over speeding following this OVER SPEEDING CONTROL,
—
the number of over speeding events since the last OVER SPEEDING CONTROL.
(11) These data may be recorded at power supply reconnection only, times may be known with an accuracy to the minute.
(12) OJ L 266, 8.11.1995, p. 1.
(13) OJ L 152, 6.7.1972, p. 15.
(14) OJ L 266, 8.11.1995, p. 1.
(15) OJ L 281, 23.11.1995, p. 31.
(16) The card inserted will trigger the appropriate access rights to the downloading function and to the data.
(17) If the VU responds with a negative response containing a code meaning “request correctly received, response pending“, this value is extended to the same upper limit value of P3.
(18)
■
This symbol indicates that the service is mandatory in this diagnostic session.
No symbol indicates that this service is not allowed in this diagnostic session.
(19) The value inserted in byte #6 of the request message is not supported, i.e. not in Table 17.
(20) The length of the message is wrong.
(21) The criteria for the request StartDiagnosticSession are not met.